Employers Requirement NEPB PDF

VOLUME – II
Section – X
EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENT
October, 2017
FDRE NEW ETHIOPIAN PARLIAMENT BUILDING PROJECT EMPLOYERS REQUIREMENTS
Contents
6.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ 5
6.1.1 Project Overview .............................................................................................................................. 5
6.1.2 Project Goals and Objectives ........................................................................................................... 6
6.1.3 The Building Project ......................................................................................................................... 6
6.1.4 Site Location ................................................................................................................................... 9
6.1.5 Sub surface conditions ..................................................................................................................... 9
6.1.6 Items of work ................................................................................................................................... 9
6.1.7 Standards and Design References.................................................................................................. 10
6.2 General Requirement............................................................................................................................ 12
6.2.1 Conceptual Framework .................................................................................................................. 12
6.2.2 Contract Duration ........................................................................................................................ 12
6.2.3 Project Schedule........................................................................................................................... 12
6.2.4 Key Personnel/Staffing ................................................................................................................. 14
6.2.5 Meetings and Progress Reporting ................................................................................................ 16
6.2.6 Engineer’s (The Engineer) Facilities ............................................................................................... 16
6.3 Preliminary Design ................................................................................................................................ 17
6.3.1 Copy Right ...................................................................................................................................... 17
6.3.2. Architectural Design Components ................................................................................................ 17
6.4 Design Services Requirement ............................................................................................................... 19
6.4.1 Data Collection Topographical Survey and Geotechnical Investigation..................................... 19
6.4.2 Design Criteria and Considerations ................................................................................................ 20
6.4.3 Design Program .............................................................................................................................. 24
6.4.4. Major works of the design phase .................................................................................................. 41
6.5 Construction Works Requirement ........................................................................................................ 48

2
6.5.1 General ........................................................................................................................................... 48
6.5.2 Technical Specification ................................................................................................................... 51
6.5.3 Control of Work and Material ........................................................................................................ 60
6.6 Quality Assurance/Quality Control (QA/QC)......................................................................................... 62
6.6.1 Design Quality Management Plan ................................................................................................. 62
6.6.2 Construction Quality Management Plan (CQMP) .......................................................................... 63
6.7 Environmental ....................................................................................................................................... 64
6.7.1 General ........................................................................................................................................... 64
6.7.2 Mandatory Standards .................................................................................................................... 64
6.7.3 Performance Requirements ........................................................................................................... 64
6.7.4 Design and Construction Criteria (Commitments) ......................................................................... 65
6.6.5 Submittals ...................................................................................................................................... 69
6.8 General STD and HIV/AIDS and FIRST AID (PHC) .................................................................................. 70
6.9 Product Warranty Provisions ................................................................................................................ 72
6.9.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 72
6.9.2 Project Warranties ......................................................................................................................... 73
6.9.3 General Warranty .......................................................................................................................... 73
6.9.4 Time of General Warranty ............................................................................................................. 73
6.9.5 General Warranty - Performance Responsibility ........................................................................... 74
6.9.6 Extension of General Warranty...................................................................................................... 74
6.9.7 Damages for Breach of Warranty .................................................................................................. 74
6.9.8 General Warranty – No Limitations of Liability.............................................................................. 74
6.9.9 Warranty Bond and Pledge ............................................................................................................ 74
6.9.10 Warranty Performance Requirements......................................................................................... 75
6.9.11 Costs of Correction of Work......................................................................................................... 75
6.9.12 Disputes ....................................................................................................................................... 75
6.9.13 Mandatory Standards .................................................................................................................. 75
3
6.9.14 Performance ................................................................................................................................ 75
6.9.15 Material Quality ........................................................................................................................... 76
6.10 Submittals by the Contractor .............................................................................................................. 76
Annex A - Architectural Design references and finishing schedule ............................................................ 78
Annex B - Structural design references..................................................................................................... 117
Annex C - Electrical design ........................................................................................................................ 131
Annex D - MEP and Plumbing Design........................................................................................................ 171
Annex E - Technical Specification.............................................................................................................. 177
Annex F - Geotechnical investigation document ...................................................................................... 222
4
6.1 Introduction
6.1.1 Project Overview

The existing Parliament Building of Ethiopia, located in Addis Ababa, commenced its
service in 1926 EC as „The Parliament of Emperor Haile Silassie‟ under the Monarch
system. It later housed „The National Shengo of the Dergue‟ during the years of the
Communist regime. Since the establishment of Federal Democratic Republic of Ethiopia
[FDRE], following the coming of the EPRDF to power, „The Federal Parliament of Ethiopia‟
(a bicameral parliament) main building now houses the two Federal Houses: The House of
Federation and the House of Peoples‟ Representatives.
The House of Federation /Amharic የፌዴሬሽን ምክር ቤት Yefedereshn Mekir Bet/ is

composed of representatives of Nations, Nationalities and Peoples of Ethiopia. It has
112 members.
According to Article 61:2 of the Constitution of Ethiopia, each Nation, Nationality and
People of Ethiopia shall be represented in the House of the Federation by at least
one member. Each Nation or Nationality shall be represented by one additional
representative for each one million of its population.
Likewise, Members of the House of the Federation shall be elected by the State
Councils. The State Councils may themselves elect representatives to the House of
the Federation, or they may hold elections to have the representatives elected by the
people directly (Article 61:3 of the constitution).
The House of Peoples' Representatives (Amharic የሕዝብ ተወካዮች ምክር ቤት Yehizb

tewekayoch Mekir Bet) with 547 members (22 seats are reserved for representatives
of minority Nationalities and Peoples), elected for five-year terms in single-seat
constituencies.
According to Article 54.3 of the Ethiopian Constitution, Members of the House, on the
basis of population and special representation of minority Nationalities and Peoples,
shall not exceed 550; of these, minority Nationalities and Peoples shall have at least
20 seats. Particulars should be determined by law.
The parliament has 108 seats in the House of Federation and 547 seats in the House of
People Representatives. It has 16 standing committees with 3 sub-committees for each
amounting to a total of (3 x 16) = 48 Sub-Committees. The House of Federation has
members chosen by the state assemblies for the term of five year.
The members of House of People‟s Representatives are chosen through direct election for
a term of six years and these members in turn elect the president.
5
The current political system is based on the framework of Federal parliamentary Republic
which is headed by the Prime Minister and the executive power is held by the government.
The parliament selects the Prime Minister and the Federal Legislative Power is held by the
government and the two chambers of the parliament.
There are a total of 9 (nine) ethnically divided regions governed by the parliamentary
system which includes Addis Ababa; Afar; Gambela; Amhara, Benishangul/Gumaz; Dire
Dawa; Somali; Harar; Oromia; Southern Nations, Nationalities, and Peoples Region; Tigray.
The two Federal Houses together have commissioned the undertaking of a need
assessment survey for a New Ethiopian Parliament Building to determine as much
programs as possible to be included in the schedule for accommodations. However, the
Houses still anticipate for further considerations to be made likewise to be provided by the
entrants of this competition based on respective outputs of further individual researches.
The basis on which the need assessment survey was made is as follows:
 FDRE Constitution
 FDRE Federal Houses Members Rules and Regulations
 FDRE Federal Houses Reform Study and Documentation
 FDRE – Five years Growth and Transformation Plan
 Democracy and Good Governance Sector Institutes 1998-2002 EC Performance
evaluation and 2003-2007 EC Sector Strategic Plan
 Council‟s 3 years Budget Program Plan
 Discussions with concerned departments
 Regional councils‟ Building Construction Sector
6.1.2 Project Goals and Objectives
Owing to the rapid growth and transformation of the country both Houses are required to be
provided with sophisticated and facilitated services aided with advanced technological
systems. Hence 69,232.40 sq. mts. Area of land has already been granted to the Federal
Houses), to construct a state-of-the-art building capable of fulfilling its current operational
demands and symbolically representing the significant milestone, throughout the country‟s
political history, towards the establishment and sustenance of a Federal and Democratic
Ethiopia.
The Federal Houses – The House of Federation /the Upper Chamber/ and the House of
Peoples‟ Representatives /the Lower Chamber/, has made all necessary preparations to
proceed with the execution of a New Parliament Building capable of accommodating
apparent demands of both Houses, equipped with advanced technologies in serving its
currently anticipated purpose and possessing maximum flexibility to allow for change over
time. The New Parliament Building for Ethiopia will be an important Symbol for the Country
and a Landmark for the City of Addis Ababa, fully integrated to provide exemplary „best
practice‟ in all respects.
6.1.3 The Building Project
The architectural design of the New Ethiopian Parliament Project has been commissioned
to Addis Mebratu Consulting Architects & Engineers (as lead consultant for the
6
consortium of (Addis Mebratu Consulting Architects & Engineers, S7 Architects and

Treurniet & Clercx Architectuur), (who is now the assigned consultant for the DB project)
through international design competition. The Consultant has produced schematic and
preliminary designs which are approved by the Client. (Refer annex A-D…).
The DB Contractor is expected to fully comply with the design and produce final detail
Architectural and engineering designs as per the scope of work defined in section 6.4 & 6.5.
The design accommodates the all required functions in the design program (6.4.3.Design
program).
The following are considerations we took and improvements we made in accommodating
key elements of the design program:
1. Main Entrance and reception area:

 We included a visitor‟s center with exhibition gallery and an auditorium (for public
presentation of the history of government in the country) anticipating the parliament
complex will be visited by the public. Provisions are made for MPs to meet their
constituents and others for the education of school children in the democratic process of
government.
 Public forum/plaza: the new parliament complex is pushed a little further from the
existing parliament building to create a public plaza. The function of this plaza, in
addition to enhancing a sense of transparency and openness (hall marks of democracy)
is for the public to access it at various occasions to express their concerns.
2. Conference, meeting and committee rooms:
 Grouped around interconnected atriums the standing committee rooms, the HoF and
joint HoF and HoPR halls as well as the public hearing halls and the library create not
only an interesting spatial experience but also convenient interconnection.
 Access for the public to the process of government was a key consideration of our
design. Thus the halls are accessible from the visitor‟s center.
3. Offices
 Offices are placed around the halls and atriums forming a ring with convenient access to
the halls, committee rooms, etc. The „atriums‟, both inside the internal street and
7
outside, along with coffee and snack areas provide mingling space and gathering area
for MPs and staff and they are useful for casual exchange of views with refreshment.
 A key element of the office „rings‟ is the internal atrium which is at the same time an area
that allows natural light and ventilation and an area for vertical circulation, utility shafts,
coffee are …
4. Lounge and break areas:
 In addition to the main restaurant and café proposed by the design program we
included small coffee break areas in the „internal street‟ of the office areas
 Members and staff restaurant:
5. Press:
 A separate vehicular and pedestrian access is provided for the press
6. Vertical and horizontal circulation
 Horizontal circulation: a maze of bridges and atriums on several levels interconnect
the office areas and the halls
 Vertical circulation: lifts and stairs have been provided at appropriate locations and
optimum distances in between. In the office rings the atrium space has been used
for such vertical circulation
7. ACCESS, PARKING AND TRANSPORTATION:

At the most western point of Colson Street the road splits up in a public road
connecting to Niger Street and a private access road. The Colson Street is a more
quiet road and therefore more easy to get on and off with cars without disturbing the
normal flood. At the turn of the road a security post is placed. The parking area will
mainly be used by transport vehicles, VIPS, speakers and members of the
parliament. There‟s a separate parking place for the press at the General Windsor
Street.
Public transport access is planned off the main avenue on the side of the existing
parliament hall across the street
The building is set in a dense urban environment. The low-rise building volumes are
supposed to harmoniously fit the building into the existing urban fabric, and provide the
8
surrounding city with public function such as shops, conference center, restaurants and
parking facilities.
Safety, Security, wind tunnel study, and recommendation will be central part of the design.
The Addis Ababa planning office has detail requirements regarding setback from the right-
of-way. This will particularly affect the streets on the planning office together with the other
planning requirements. The BAR (Built-up Area Ratio) of 80% and FAR 1.5 – 1.7 are also
prescribed.
6.1.4 Site Location:
The Parliament of the Federal Democratic Republic of Ethiopia now aquired 69,232.40 sq.
mts. [Sixty nine Thousand Two Hundred thirty two] of land in Addis Ababa located in the
inner city Arat Kilo Area in front of the Main Palace [„Ghebbi‟] and lying to the right on the
road from Arat Kilo Memorial Square to the Palace main entrance.
The Client intends to use this plot for the New Ethiopian Parliament Building Project.
6.1.5 Sub surface conditions
A preliminary geotechnical investigation has been performed and these documents are
attached in annex…. For the DB contractor‟s reference.
6.1.6 Items of work
The work shall consist of furnishing all final detail design documents, reports
documentation, equipment, materials, labor and incidentals necessary to successfully
complete the project in compliance with the contract provisions. The Contractor for this
project shall perform, as minimum, the primary item of work listed below. This list is not all-
inclusive and the Contractor shall be responsible for identifying all items of work and
executing them according to the design and specifications to meet the employer‟s
requirement.
Design service Items

- Data collection and analysis
- Geotechnical & Geophysical investigation
- Detail Design Development in phases based on the Preliminary Design.
- Final Architectural Design
- Façade Design
- Interior Design
- Kitchen Design
- Signage Design
- Structural and Seismic Engineering Design
- Wind engineering
9
- Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing (MEP) Design

- Interior and Exterior Lighting Design
- Access and Site work Design
- Landscape Design
- Acoustic Design
- Vertical Transportation Design
- Fire Protection Design
- Security Design
- Sustainability Building Design
- Building Management System (BMS)
Construction work Items include but not limited to:
- Clearing of obstruction, if any

- Excavation and Earthwork
- Concrete work
- Masonry work
- Roof water Proofing & Dump Proofing
- Roofs and Wall Cladding
- Carpentry & Joinery
- Hardware (Iron Mongery)
- Structural Steel Work
- Metal Work
- Plastering & Pointing
- Painting and Other Finishing Works
- Façade components installations
- Glazing
- MEP
- Sanitary Installation
- Electrical & Electro-Mechanical Installation
- External Works & Services
- Other ancillary works
6.1.7 Standards and Design References
The codes and regulations to be applied are those defined by the local authorities or utilities
providers. Where there is no codes and regulations for particular authority or utility provider;
the design and construction work shall be performed in accordance with the following
standards, specification or Reference Documents:
10
 Ethiopian Building Code Standards, EBCS (where ever is appropriate for that particular
discipline),
 Ethiopian Building Proclamation, Regulation and Directive thereto,
 Adopted standards by Ethiopian Quality Standard Authority (EQSA) shall be used
where ever is fit for purpose,
 Standard Technical Specification, by Ministry of Infrastructure, 2003,
 American Society of Heating and Ventilation, Air Condition Refrigeration Engineers
Standard (ASHREA),
 British Standard (BS),
 Germany Standard (DIN),
 Fire Fighting, calculation based on National Fire Protection of America (NFPA),
 International Standard Technical Specifications,
 Recent findings by local and international experts on Geophysics and Earthquake
engineering for seismic design, in addition to the Ethiopian Building Code Standard.
 And other standards by Ministry of Works & Urban Development, British Standards
Institution (BSI), American Concrete Institute (ACI), American Association of State
Highway and Transport Officials (AASHTO),
If a specific standards, specifications or Reference documents are not listed herein, the
Contractor shall identify and submit to the Employer/The Engineer for approval. The
contractor must meet the minimum building standards & criteria. Minimum design standards
of criteria can only be utilized upon approval of the Employer/The Engineer.
The Contractor shall include standards they propose for use which will be subject to
approval by Employer/The Engineer.
Where the aforesaid codes, standards and specifications are silent on any aspect, the
following standards in the order of preference shall be adopted, unless otherwise directed
by FDRE HOF & HOPR/The Engineer
(a) Other European Standards whenever is appropriate
(b) American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM).
(c) Any other standard proposed by the Contractor and approved by FDRE HOF &
HOPR/The Engineer
However the DB contractor shall advise the FDRE HOF & HOPR/The Engineer in writing of
all Standards, Specifications, codes and recommended practices that he intends adopting a
particular code or regulation for the written approval of FDRE HOF & HOPR /The Engineer.
11
6.2 General Requirement
6.2.1 Conceptual Framework

The Design –Builder shall provide the engineering services required to furnish the work
products identified in the contract. The service includes the tasks of data preparation, data
interpretation, and design of construction documents. The design and construction
documents shall be prepared by (or under the direction of) professional Architect and
Structural, Sanitary, Electrical and Mechanical engineers. The Contractor shall design all
buildings including Architectural Design, Façade Design, Interior Design Kitchen Design,
Signage Design, Structural and seismic Engineering Design, Wind engineering, Mechanical,
Electrical and Plumbing (MEP) Design, Interior and Exterior Lighting Design, Access and
Site work Design, Landscape Design, Acoustic Design, Vertical Transportation Design, Fire
protection Design and Security Design in accordance with the design criteria of this section.
The Design –Builder shall design and construct FDRE New Ethiopian Parliament
Building project to meet the following requirement.
(1) Maintain a safe environment for buildings users and give special consideration to
winding potentially hazardous conditions.
(2) Design a Building meeting the requirements of “sustainable Building” as indicated in this
section.
(3) The Design – Builder shall coordinate and ensure that the project design accommodates
and allows for the design of technically and environmentally sound project as it is thought
in the original preliminary design concepts.
6.2.2 Contract Duration

The Contractor shall establish the contract duration for the project. The client desires
without any negotiations the completion of HOPR & HOF halls.In no event shall the contract
duration exceed 24 months for the halls given the immediate priority excluding the defects
liability period. The schedule supporting the proposed contract duration should be submitted
with the proposal.
6.2.3 Project Schedule

The Contractor shall submit a project schedule to establish contract duration as per the
conditions of the contract. The activities involved shall include but not limited to the
followings:
 Anticipated Award Date
 Geotechnical & Geophysical Investigation
 Data Collection and Brief Development
 Final Design document Submittals
 Interface of Disciplines
 Design Review by The Engineer
 Design Review/ Acceptance Milestones
12
 Design Approval and Construction Permit by the City Administration

 Construction Mobilization
 Start of Construction
 Site Clearing and Top soil Removal
 Foundation Excavation
 Shoring Works
 Foundation Design
 Foundation Construction
 Substructure Design
 Substructure Construction
 Superstructure Design
 Superstructure construction
 Sanitary and Mechanical Works,
 Electrical, IT and Communication Services
 MEP
 Site Works
 Signage works
 Design and Constructions of Safety and Security System (Fire Alarm, CCTV,
Intrusion, Access Control Obstruction Light for Air Craft Operation etc)
 Building Management System (BMS) to monitor and control automatically the building
facilities
 Medium Voltage Distribution System
 Provide central UPS system
 Entertainment and Communication system (Data, SMATV, Public address,
Telephone)
 Traffic Management in the Area of Project Site
 Additional Construction Milestones as determined by the Contractor
 Final Completion Date for All work
The Contractor schedule should allow for a thirty (30) working days review time for FDRE
HOF & HOPR/The Engineer for review of the design submittals at each stage. However,
the The Engineer has the right to give comments at any time before the construction if he
found any discrepancy between the design and the employer‟s requirement. The review
period commences upon the FDRE HOF & HOPR/The Engineer receipt of the valid
submittal or re-submittal and terminates upon the transmittal of the submittal back to the
Contractor. FDRE HOF & HOPR/The Engineer review is not meant to be a complete and
detailed review, and shall not absolve the Contractor‟s obligation under the contract.
Final signed plans will be delivered to FDRE HOF & HOPR/The Engineer a minimum of 10
working days prior to construction of that component.
FDRE HOF & HOPR/The Engineer will sign and stamp “Released for construction”. Only
13
stamped plans are valid and all work that Contractor performs in advance of FDRE HOF &
HOPR/The Engineer release of Plans will be at the Contractor‟s risk.
The Software requirement for all schedules shall be Primavera Project Planner/Microsoft
Project planer recent version or equivalent.
6.2.4 Key Personnel/Staffing

The Contractor‟s work shall be performed and directed by key personnel identified in the bid
submitted by the Contractor. Any changes in the indicated personnel shall be subject to
review and approval by FDRE HOF & HOPR/The Engineer. In case the contractor
outsources the design task to a professional design firm, the firm to render these services
shall not be affiliated with the Engineer and also the Contractor is responsible for all issues
of the design.
The Key professionals in all disciplines should fulfil the following minimum criteria:
The bidder is expected to submit this section in two categories:
1. Key Design Personnel
Discipline General Experience # of completed projects of similar

complexity & cost
Architecture A firm with minimum 5 years A firm with minimum of 5 completed projects of
general experience equivalent complexity and project cost:
Landscape A firm with minimum 5 years A firm with minimum of 5 completed projects of
Architecture general experience equivalent complexity and project cost:
Interior A firm with minimum 5 years A firm with minimum of 5 completed projects of
Design general experience equivalent complexity and project cost:
Structural A firm with minimum 5 years A firm with minimum of 5 completed projects of
engineer general experience equivalent complexity and project cost:
Electrical A firm with minimum 5 years A firm with minimum of 5 completed projects of
Engineer general experience equivalent complexity and project cost:
Mechanical A firm with minimum 5 years A firm with minimum of 5 completed projects of
Sanitary A firm with minimum 5 years A firm with minimum of 5 completed projects of
design general experience equivalent complexity and project cost:
Acoustics A firm with minimum 5 years A firm with minimum of 5 completed projects of
engineer general experience equivalent complexity and project cost:
Security A firm with minimum 5 years A firm with minimum of 5 completed projects of
Sustainability A firm with minimum 5 years A firm with minimum of 2 completed projects of
Conference A firm with minimum 5 years A firm with minimum of 2 completed projects of
Facility general experience equivalent complexity and project cost:
Engineer
14
The bidder can outsource all the above disciplines to a single firm which has the sum of all
he above qualifications.
2. Key Personnel for Constriction
No Position Min. No of Qualification & Experience

Personnel
1 Project Manager 1 B.Sc. in C.E. or in related discipline/ 14 years
general and 10 Years particular Experience
2 Project Planning 1 B.Sc. in C.E. or in related discipline/ 12 years
Manager general and 8 Years particular Experience
3 Project 1 B.Sc. in C.E. or in related discipline/ 10 years
Engineers general and 6 Years particular Experience
4 Office Engineers 1 B.Sc. in C.E. or in related discipline/ 10 years
general and 6 Years particular Experience
5 Contract 1 B.Sc. in C.E. or in related discipline/ 10 years
Administrator general and 6 Years particular Experience
7 Quantity 1 B.SC. in QS or in related / 10 Years general
Surveyors and 6 Years particular Experience
8 Surveyors 1 B.SC. surveying or in related discipline / 10
Years general and 6 Years particular Experience
9 Architect 1 B.Sc. in AR. / 10 Years general and 6 years
particular Experience
10 Structural 1 B.Sc. or above in Respective profession, and 1
Engineer 4 Years general and 10 Years particular
Experience
11 Geotechnical 3 B.Sc. or above in Respective profession, and 12
Engineer Years general and 8 Years particular Experience
12 Mechanical 1 B.Sc. or above in Respective Profession, and 14
engineer Years general and 10 Years particular
experience
13 Sanitary engineer 2 B.Sc. or above in Respective Profession, and 10
Years general and 6 Years particular experience
14 Electrical 3 B.Sc. or above in Respective Profession, and 10
engineer Years general and 6 Years particular experience
15 IT/ 2 B.Sc. or above in Respective Profession, and 10
Communication Years general and 6 Years particular experience
16 BMS professional 2 B.Sc. or above in Respective Profession, and 10
Years general and 6 Years particular experience
15
6.2.5 Meetings and Progress Reporting
The Contractor shall anticipate periodic meetings with FDRE HOF & HOPR Personnel and
Other bodies as required for resolution of design and/or construction issues.
During construction, the Contractor shall meet with The Engineer on a weekly basis and
provide a one-week look ahead for activities to be performed during the coming week. The
Contractor shall, on monthly basis, provide written reports that describe the items of
concern and the work performed in comparison with the plan on each task for that particular
month. The Design-Builder shall:
Plan and schedule weekly meetings with The Engineers to discuss Project progress,
issues, and planned Work for all phases of design and construction.
 The Design-Builder shall develop the meeting agendas in consultation with the
consultant and shall provide meeting facilities.
6.2.6 Engineer’s (The Engineer) Facilities
The contractor shall provide office and equipment as specified in this section. This shall
include providing a common location for Contractor‟s staff and FDRE HOF & HOPR/The
Engineer staff. All contractor staff including administration, design and construction staff
offices shall be located on the project site as much as possible. If need be and justifiable
office for top management of the Design-Build Contractor can be rented in the vicinity of the
project site. But the construction staff shall be located on site/project offices.
The contractor shall make its proposed facilities available for inspection and approval by
FDRE HOF & HOPR/The Engineer prior to FDRE HOF & HOPR/The Engineer occupying
any contractor provided facilities. Both parties shall participate in a facility condition
inspection prior to and at the completion of occupancy.
The contractor shall secure site, install, set up and provide utility services and maintain the
facilities as part of the work.
In the event that office or appurtenant facilities are stolen, destroyed, or damaged during
the work, the contractor shall bear the cost of repairing or replacing those items provided to
their original condition within ten working days except for those reasons beyond the
contractor‟s control (force majeure).
The contractor has to provide temporary facility starting from commencement of the works
contract until the permanent The Engineer facility is established to a maximum of four
months period.
(i) Project Office
The project office shall be located on the project site. The selected site within the project
site shall be approved by FDRE HOF & HOPR/The Engineer before the commencement of
the establishment of the project office. The Contractor shall provide his offices within the
same compound as the Engineer staff Offices to facilities communication. The contractor
shall furnish FDRE HOF & HOPR/The Engineer with facilities that are indicated in
Appendix A.
16
(i) Laboratory
Fully furnished laboratory, as per the requirement of this section will be provided by the DB
contractor for the sole use of the The Engineer on the site or on land approved by the
Employer adjacent to the site for this purpose and are in close proximity to the contractor‟s
offices and laboratories.
The Contractor shall provide for the site laboratory specified in the Contract and for the
exclusive use of the The Engineer, the minimum equipment listed in Appendix A of this
document.
6.3 Preliminary Design
6.3.1 Copy Right

The design originality and copyright is of the Engineer.
The design of a building as embodied in any tangible medium expression, including a
building, architectural plans, or drawings. The work includes the overall form as well as the
arrangement and composition of spaces and elements in the design, but does not include
individual standard features.” Protection extends to the overall form as well as the
arrangement and composition of spaces and elements in the design.
6.3.2. Architectural Design Components
 THE IDEA:
The New Ethiopian Parliament building represents the big variety of 85 million people,
covering Ethiopians beautiful landscape over an area of 1 million square kilometres. The
new building should give value to each individual inhabitant as well as to every ethnic
group, its thoughts, its interests and its own way of life.
The idea for the design is to create a very symbolical, recognisable and common shape in
which variety will take place. Making full use of its hilly location “a nice plate of Ethiopian
food” is prepared. A plate like square is placed on the upper level of the hill carrying a
delicate ensemble of three shapes related to the Negarit drums which are traditionally to be
played when a new law is announced to inhabitants. Besides this symbolical value the
strong rhythm of the drums stands for communication and continuity. Each drum will
represent a theme related to the symbolical value of the colours of the Ethiopian flag facing
the future: Hope (green), Peace (yellow) and Passion (red).
17
THE ENSEMBLE OF THE THREE DRUMS

Above the square rises three shapes resulting in the parliament building specific
appearance used to be an icon for the city, for the regions and for the democratic
federation of Ethiopia. This design approach is original and unique in the sense that it
diverges from international traditions and trends in design of parliament buildings which
emphasize the use of one dominant feature like a dome or a bell tower or one big
structure. In this case the Ensemble of the three forms is designed to be perceived as one
composition thus symbolizing Unity in Diversity and Pluralism which is the foundation of the
FDRE Constitution.
The first smallest shape is connected with the public square. It maintains the entrance of the
Parliament building. The shape symbolizes passion, the first thing that people will
discover when meeting Ethiopia. Besides the entrance at ground floor level there is the
visitor‟s centre with an exhibition hall in the upper level and water like landscape at the roof.
The Second shape accommodates the House of Federation. It symbolizes the result of
communication and understanding, peace. On the lower level in the shape is the
debating chamber, a place to have good contact and to listen to each other‟s opinions. On
the roof there‟s a terrace with a little bar where members can meet when taking a break of
the conferences.
THE FOUR OFFICE RINGS:
The Rings are connected to the quieter Colson Street. The offices have a great view to the
business district of Addis Ababa downtown. By an average set back of 10-15 metres from
the street there‟s still a good contact between the members and the urban fabric and
citizens outside showing transparency. Taking in account the lower part next to the
General Windsor Street may be developed in the future and the side in the direction of the
Sheraton Hotel to be kept more open. Security is planned by putting a see through fence
and a kind of water-basin in the setback zone, thus not compromising the sense of
openness and transparency.
18
FACADE:
In almost all cultures in Ethiopia, values of the people are transmitted from one generation
to the next through story telling by elders. Thus in our design we aspire to express the
history and culture of the people in the façade design.
The building facades can mainly be divided in two types of façade: the drum shaped
facades of the three drums and the curtain wall façade of the office rings.
The façade of the three shapes makes the Parliament building unique from all the other
buildings in the country, in Africa, even in the world. The three shapes are inspired by the
„Negarit‟ drums and are envisaged to be a facade system designed in a recognisable form
and patterns very related to Ethiopia, each confirming its own meaning.
6.4 Design Services Requirement
6.4.1 Data Collection Topographical Survey and Geotechnical Investigation
(i) Data Collection
Data on the current spaces and usage of the FDRE HOF & HOPR can be used in addition
to the bases of the preliminary designs. The contractor shall prepare survey program and
submit for approval of the FDRE HOF & HOPR/The Engineer before commencing the final
Architectural and Engineering Designs.
The collection and analysis of all relevant data shall be carried out based on information
and documents provided by FDRE HOF & HOPR/The Engineer. Accordingly, the
contractor shall compile the HOF & HOPR specific project requirements. The contractor
shall ensure coordination between each discipline to ensure functional and technical
aspects of the design aims and objectives are appraised and agreed at an early stage. The
concluded result of the Data Collection shall be submitted to the FDRE HOF & HOPR as
part of the Final design report and shall inform the detailed brief for the project to be
prepared during the construction phase.
The data collection, analysis, documentation and clarification includes; specific surrounding
development and features, site specific infrastructure, general and specific codes, statutory
and building regulations including zoning requirements, statutory and building approval
processes, utility provider regulations, utility provider approval processes, design
parameters like climate, ecology, geology and vegetation, building materials in respect to
availability, imported materials, procurement procedures technical performance, processing
materials, certification requirements and appraisal of construction materials and their
properties
(ii) Survey
At the preliminary stage, the contractor shall undertake data collection and analysis. In view
of this, the Contractor shall conduct all the necessary survey work to meet the requirements
19
associated with the project including; topographic surveys, traffic surveys, design survey,
construction surveys, utilities & Infrastructure survey land use survey and all other services
necessary to complete the project.
(iii) Geotechnical Seismic Force Investigation

Documentation and clarification statement shall include geotechnical strata, ground water
regime and site constraints.
Based on the results of data collection, design brief and desktop studies the contractor shall
undertake the following activities:-
- Soft ground drilling and high quality sampling,
- Rotary coring, looking for high recovery rates,
- Detailed logging of materials,
- In-situ testing including shear vanes (soft clays), boreholes geophysics and pressure
meter (soil and rock),
- Laboratory testing to measure strength, compressibility and elastic modulus.
Similarly, the following specific seismic assessments shall be undertaken:-
- Comprehensive earthquake catalogue shall be reviewed and used,
- Carry out a literature review of the tectonics of the region and evaluate the likely “spatial
forces” that could possibly be generated,
- Match the literature review with the known records,
- Apply appropriate transmissivity laws for the region,
- Undertake a large number of simulations to generate all possible seismic histories that
could occur over a 50-year cycle,
- Provide a report defining the site-specific seismic parameters.
The contractor shall in parallel with the site investigation being undertaken the geotechnical
team will work with the structural and civil engineers to develop the structural, foundation
and infrastructure. Architectural Design proceeds Likewise.
On completion of site investigation potential foundation basement options and project
related risks in regard to anticipated ground, condition shall be identified and reported by
the Contractor.
6.4.2 Design Criteria and Considerations
(i) Survey & Investigation Work
The Contractor shall carry out detailed sun-surface investigation over project site using the
most up-to-date equipment to recover samples that are considered necessary to complete
the detailed design and the estimation of quantities.
The Contractor shall establish a paired (coupled) inter-visible Horizontal control points at the
four corners of the site. The exact location and their set back from the boundary line shall
be determined by reviewing existing topographic maps and site conditions of the project
area.
20
a. The monument for each Control Point shall be die-stamped in the field; the Contractor
shall provide a standard canopy drawing to FDRE HOF & HOPR/The Engineer for
approval before the establishment of the control points.
b.The Deign-Builder shall maintain an accuracy level required by the FDRE HOF &
HOPR/The Engineer for the (x, y) coordinates of all the control points. The Contractor shall
provide all survey and sub-surface sample data to the The Engineer for review. Any
discrepancy found in the data provided shall be corrected by the Contractor.
(ii) Survey and Sample Data Records

Survey and sample records shall be delivered in hardcopy format and also in electronic file
format. The electronic format shall be in ASCII, drawing, or DXF format. They shall be
delivered at the time of substantial completion unless requested by FDRE HOF & HOPR or
The Engineer at an earlier time.
(iii) As-Built
The Contractor shall produce reports documenting the location of the as-built buildings and
Infrastructures and survey control monuments placements. The Contractor as-built data
shall include the coordinate types (x, y and/or z) and feature codes in the format acceptable
to FDRE HOF & HOPR/The Engineer.
(iv) Project Site Sub-Surface and Construction Material Investigation
The Contractor shall evaluate the requirements of the work, and carry out a thorough sub-
surface geotechnical investigation, construction material investigation, geotechnical
analysis, and laboratory testing sufficient to provide foundation designs and construction of
the sub-structure and earthwork.
(v) Mandatory Standards
List of publications that shall be used for all design and construction of foundation and
earthwork shall be identified by the Contractor and should get prior approval of the
Employer/The Engineer to use.
Standards and References to be used for the Geotechnical & Geophysical Investigation and
Seismic design load should not be limited to the recommendations of the Ethiopian Building
Code Standard. Recent findings by local and international experts on Geophysics and
Earthquake engineering need to be incorporated during design.
The DB Contractor shall study in detail the structural vibration due to wind loading; on the
upper stories of the building. Carrying out wind tunnel testing is also necessary.
The DB Contractor shall propose and request for approval of FDRE HOF & HOPR/The
Engineer on any standard to be used in this area.
(vi) Performance Requirement
The Contractor shall conduct a sub-surface investigation to provide information for the
foundation design. The investigation work shall be carried out as set out in the standards
and references.
21
The Contractor shall submit the plan for the investigation to FDRE HOF & HOPR/The
Engineer for review and comment prior to start-up of any of the investigation work and
subsequent foundation construction operation. This submittal shall include the number and
depths of the proposed pitting and field investigations, and the proposed sampling and
testing, to meet the minimum requirements for the project.
Soil Properties used for design shall be determined in accordance with the standards and
references given for this section or as per recommendations to be given by FDRE HOF &
HOPR/The Engineer. Field tests shall be conducted in accordance with internationally
accepted appropriate Standards.
The Contractor shall carry out the following minimum work elements and requirements; it
may be appropriate for the Contractor to include work elements or procedures not listed
here in order to provide the requested end product.
1. The contractor will review printed literature including ground water resources, soil
structure of the area, location of the fault line, historic construction and other
geotechnical relate resources.
2. Study project setting, geology, geographic and site condition.
3. Identify and evaluate potential material resource.
4. Identify and evaluate geological and geotechnical hazards.
5. Identify sub-surface excavation and water-problem areas.
6. Develop preliminary surface drainage recommendations.
7. Record other geotechnical observation that could impact design or construction.
8. Evaluate any further reconnaissance required, and mapping and subsurface
investigation needs, and anticipated difficult and completing investigation work.
9. Carry out electrical resistivity survey: vertical electrical sounding (VES) and two S
dimensional electrical resistivity imagining
a. Carry out the vertical electrical sounding (VES) at selected spots of the survey site. it is
a focused single- point probing and primarily aims to map the depth to the top of a
potential foundation rock, determine the thickness of the overburden soil. This will
ultimately be used to correlate the surface layers to that of mapped 2D resistive images.
b. Carry out the 2D electrical resistive aping of the surface. Which one the other hand,
gives more detail information that help to:-
- Construct the subsurface layer stratification,
- Determine the depth extent and relief of the foundation rock
- Reveal any concealed geologic structure, which may impose post construction hazards,
11. Carry out micro-gravity survey :
Detailed high precision gravity survey is n despicable for such integrated site
assessment and come up with vital subsurface information for identification of
concealed surface structure such as faults and mapping basement morphology. to
22
attain high precision with few micro- gals the method must be supported by high
precision deferential GPS survey to map the three dimensional location of measurement
point relative S to international reference frame with accuracy better that 0.02 meter.
This method must be used to map not structure not only at the site location but in the
vicinity of the survey construction site.
12. The seismic investigation must be carried out in the following manner:-
- Site specific hazard assessment to determine peak ground
acceleration (PGA) value for a number of return periods and
frequencies from all available data over ( 100 years long)
- Empirical site response must be estimated using micro-tremors.
13. Carry out seismic refraction survey: in addition to mapping sub-surface layer sequence;
thickness and velocities down to the bottom refractor (Bed-rock), engineers can relate
S-wave velocities more easily to share module and other properties used in engineering
calculations.
14. Carry out at least on two sites (i) rotary drilling must be the depth to be determine
depending on height of the building. Here the soil profiles hall be logged and samples
shall be taken from different depth for further laboratory testing (ii) SPT filed testing
(Geotechnical sounding) shall be carried out on selected spots. Bearing capacity of the
soil will be determined from this test and will be compared with the one determined from
laboratory test.
determine the bearing capacity of the soil based on the type of foundation selected, on
15. geometric and load data from the superstructure and soli parameters determined by
laboratory testing and filed sounding test
16. Undertake settlement analysis using similar procedure. The laboratory testing will focus
on test that gives settlement parameters.
17. Make appropriate foundation recommendation, depending on geometric and load data
from the superstructure and on the soil profile and properties.
18. Make site response analysis by selection of strong ground motion wave forms and to
determine peak value of acceleration using the source and path (attenuation) relation
from the regional seismicity.
19. Present interpretation of regional geology and geologic setting.
20. Evaluate alternative geotechnical designs where alternate design may be viable.
21. Conduct global stability analysis for walls (sliding, bearing overturning, and slope
stability) and develop design recommendations.
22. Conduct shallow foundation analysis, and settlement analysis and develop design
recommendations.
23. Provide recommendations to eliminate or minimize potential for foundation settlements
24. Discusses special design consideration.
25. Discuss special construction considerations.
26. Compile site photographs and include in reports.
23
27. Carry out additional investigation if required. Be specific with respect o type of work d
location, and expected benefit.
28. Environmental impact assessment and mitigation measure
29. Present finding and recommendation in Draft Geotechnical Investigation and
Seismic Load include a limitation paragraph describing the potential variations between
exploration and that exploration were conducted for design purpose only.
30. Incorporate FDRE HOF & HOPR‟s/The Engineer review and comments in the Draft
Geotechnical Investigation and Seismic Load report.
(vii) Submittals
The Contractor shall prepare and submit a draft and final Geotechnical & Seismic load
Investigation and material report to FDRE HOF & HOPR/The Engineer. The final
Geotechnical & Seismic load Investigation and material report must be approved by FDRE
HOF & HOPR/The Engineer in writing prior to start of any Foundation related
activities/operations in the project.
6.4.3 Design Program
(i) Design Requirements

The preliminary design tried to give solutions and shall address these basic conditions of
the FDRE HOF & HOPR interests.
(ii) Functional Requirements

A complete building automation system shall be illustrated in the design solution with
particular emphasis to security systems. The design shall enable efficient flood and fire
detection and alarm.
The following minimum functional requirements related directly to the spaces requirements,
shall be envisaged in the design of work spaces. The designations of the categories are
indicated in the schedule of Accommodation‟ (section II of this Part).
24
CAT STORAGE IT SOUND A/C

PROVITION POWER COMMUNICATION SECURITY PROTECTI PROVISIO
ON N
A low Standard Ws 220V Telephone Regular Regular None
B Medium Standard Ws 220V Telephone Regular Regular None

C High Standard Ws 220V Telephone Regular Regular None
D Law Restricted Ws 220V Telephone Fax &internet Controlled Enhanced Partial
E Medium Restricted Ws 220V Telephone Fax &internet Controlled Enhanced Partial
F High Restricted Ws 220V Telephone Fax &internet Controlled Enhanced Partial
G Low Restricted Ws 220V Telephone Hot Line Guard Buffered None
Supervised
H Low Specialized Ws 220V Telephone Hot Line Guard Buffered Full Time
Supervised
The following interpretation is adopted to designate the categories. The design shall
illustrate the basic provisions made to meet these requirements.
STORAGE LOW MEDIUM HIGH
1 meter run of wall 2 meter run of wall Above 4 meter run of wall
Standard WS Restricted WS Specialized WS
IT Provision Individual PLC Password Protected and Custom designed work station and
networked monitoring consoles
Telephone Telephone Fax & internet Telephone hot line
Communication Private or shared line Private line with full feature Special line with round the clock operation
and back up
Security Regular Controlled Guards Supervised
General check in and Restricted Access pass Access to section Personnel only
monitoring controlled
Sound Regular Enhanced Buffered
Protection Protected against Furnished to reduce Sound proofed walls gazing
ambient noise sources sound penetration
None Partial Full Time
A/C Provision Natural ventilation or A/C supply at particular Round the clock A/C supply from central
individual firms periods from central station
station to local units
(iii) Sustainability Requirements
The following requirement specific to the site shall be addressed by the design solution and
described in the design report:
i) Investigation and solutions regarding seismic and fault line conditions
ii) Flood pattern study and provision of adequate defenses
iii) Vehicular traffic study and proposal for proper ingress/egress
iv) Respect of urban fabric and scale and anticipation of future development
25
v) Utilities assessment and forwarding compatibility proposals

The design shall illustrate the following aspects of sustainability with reference to relevant
practice and fulfillment of acceptable codes for sustainable building or energy and
environmental design certification institutions.
i) Energy efficiency
ii) Water conservation
iii) Natural ventilation
iv) Day light usage
v) Durable and flexible materials usage
vi) Ease of maintenance and repair
vii) Waste management
The design shall include solutions of interior design if selected areas. Lobby spaces, the
baking hall rooms in the executive floor shall be investigated in this respect. The design
solution shall consider a very high level of flexibility to allow adaptability to changing needs
and situations and include provisions for the following items.
i) Demountable partitioning systems
ii) Floor or ceiling utility spaces
iii) Compartmentalization of sub-units m units and wings
iv) Alternative access
v) Alternative ancillary facilities
vi) Light and demountable built-in shelving
The design shall achieve a LEED rating of at least Silver level according to the US Green
Building Council standards and illustrate this in the design and reports.
(iv) Symbolic Requirement
Iconic Value
It is always a challenge to come up with an icon that represents a diverse country, both in
terms of landscape and „culture-scape‟. We understand an icon to be a symbol, or a sign
that evokes a meaning understood and shared by all, thus evoking a sense of being
represented and belongingness in all stakeholders. An icon should also be relevant to the
specific purpose of a building, in this case a parliament.
The following have been the departure points in creating a relevant iconic value:
 Ethiopian Parliament Building as a place where laws are legislated - symbolized by the
Negarit Drum Shaped structures
26
 Ethiopian Parliament as a place where elders and community representatives gather to

discuss and decide on matters of social significance – symbolized by the tree (Warka)
inspired architecture of the Joint Hall
 Ethiopian Parliament House as a symbol of transparency, democracy, good governance
and hope – signified by the square/plaza form –
 Renaissance: A shared „consciousness‟ today is the hope for Ethiopian renaissance in
terms of its economy and rightful position in the region, Africa and the world at large:
symbolized by the monumental waterfall in the plaza inspired by the Renaissance Dam
and reminiscent of Tis Abay, which we also propose as a living monument to the late
PM MelesZenawi.
 Opportunities for representation of diverse peoples and landscapes of Ethiopia: it would
be a futile effort to represent all the nations, nationalities and peoples of Ethiopia.
However, there is an idea to take opportunity of the internal street in the office rings as a
continuum in which at different junction‟s interior design themes will be envisaged that
are inspired by the landscapes, cultures, etc of the various ethnic groups in the country.
This is envisaged to be done in stages with initiation from respective parliamentarians
representing their constituencies. In this sense there is room for successive
parliamentarians to put their marks and the marks of the constituencies they represent in
the parliament.
27
v) SCHEDULE OF ACCOMMODATION
HOPR Program / Function
No Program / Function Number Floor Located Floor Remark
Of Area
room
HOPR
1 Office of the Speaker

1.1 Speaker Office 1 30 -3.84 Level
1.2 Reception Room 1 ----- -----
1.3 Executive Secretary I, II and III 1 41 -3.84 Level
1.4 Advisor to the speaker 2 73 -3.84 Level
1.5 Special assistant to the 1 ----- -----
speaker
1.6 Conference Room 1 145 -3.84 Level
1.7 Private Room 1 20 -3.84 Level
1.8 Ethics and anticorruption 1 36 -3.84 Level
Personnel
2 Office of Deputy Speaker
2.1 Deputy Speaker 1 48 -3.84 Level
2.2 Reception Room 1 32 -3.84 Level
2.3 Executive Secretary III 1 48 -3.84 Level
2.4 Private Guard Room 1 23 -3.84 Level
3 Government Whips
3.1 Chief Government Whips 1 35 -3.84 Level
3.3 Executive Secretary II and III 1 27 -3.84 Level
3.6 Deputy Government Whips 4 153 -3.84 Level
3.8 Secretaries for Deputy 4 94 -3.84 Level
Government Whips
4 Directorate, Government
Whip Affairs
4.1 Director 1 32 -11.52 Level
4.2 Executive Secretary II 1 17 --1.52 Level
4.3 Advisors 2 69 -11.52 Level
4.4 Advisors 1 38 -11.52 Level
28
No Program / Function Number Floor Located Floor Remark

Of Area
Room Proposed
5 Party Whips
5.1 Main Opposition Leader 1 36 -3.84 Level
5.2 Secretary 1 32 -3.84 Level
5.3 Other Party Whips 10 215 -3.84 Level
5.4 Secretaries for other party 2 53 -3.84 Level
Whips
6 Offices For MP’s
6.1 MP Offices 275 3160 -19.20, -15.36,
(158 -11.52, -7.68 &
Rooms) -3.84 Level
6.2 MP Offices 100 1050 -11.52 & -3.84
(42 Level
Rooms)
7 Standing Committee Offices
7.1 Chair persons & Deputy Chair 32 1296 (36 - Level
persons of Standing Rooms)
Committees
7.2 Secretaries and Standing 720 (20 -15.36, -11.52
committee Officers Rooms) & -7.68 Level
16
7.3 Standing Committee 16 1600 -15.36, -11.52,
Conference Rooms -7.68 &-3.84
Level
7.4 Sub standing Committee 39 1548 (43 -15.36, -11.52
conference rooms Rooms) & -7.68 Level
Friendship of Bilateral
Relation
7.5 Friendship rooms for Bilateral 5 324(9 -15.36, -11.52
Relation Rooms) & -7.68 Level
8 Office for the Secretary
General
8.1 Secretary General 1 35 -3.84 Level
8.2 Executive Secretary I and III 1 30 -3.84 Level
8.3 Senior Administrative Affairs 1 32 -3.84 Level

Officer
8.4 Attorney II 1 24 -3.84 Level
8.5 Reception with Mini conference 1 71 -3.84 Level
setup
29
No Program Function Number Floor Located Floor Remark

Of Area
Room Proposed
8.6 Senior Parliamentary Service 1 24 -3.84 Level
Reform Officer
8.7 Parliamentary Service Reform 1 37 -3.84 Level
Officers
Protocol Services
8.8 Senior protocol Officer 1 29 -3.84 Level
8.9 Protocol Officers 1 31 -3.84 Level
9 Professional Support and
Service Delivery on
legislation and Over
sighting
9.2 Executive Secretary II 1 25 -3.84 Level
Research , Information and
Library Team
9.3 Head 1 28 -3.84 Level
9.4 Social Affairs Researchers 1 72 -3.84 Level
Case Team
9.5 Economic Affairs Researchers 1 96 -3.84 Level
Case Team
9.6 Legal Affairs Researchers 1 120 -3.84 Level
Case Team
IT Administration Team
9.7 Head 1 25 -3.84 Level
9.8 Software engineer and 1 82 -3.84 Level
hardware engineer, hardware
Technician, Beginner software
engineer, Web Master and
Data Base Administrator.
9.9 Server room 1 48 -3.84 Level

9.10 Server Administration 1 51 -3.84 Level
9.11 Workshop 1 32 -3.84 Level
9.12 IT Lab and Training Room 1 155 -3.84 Level
9.13 Mini Store 1 20 -3.84 Level
Conference and printing
Service Team
9.14 Head 1 23 -3.84 Level
30
No Program Function Number Floor Located Remark

Of Area Floor
Room Proposed
9.15 Senior minutes preparation 4 194 -3.84 Level
Officer
9.16 Senior 1 31 -3.84 Level
9.17 Editor 1 32 -3.84 Level
9.18 Tigrigna, Afar, Oromiffa, 1 140 -3.84 Level
Somali & English
simultaneous Translation
Officer…..
9.19 Senior Electronics Equipment 1 24 -3.84 Level
Technician and Electronics
Equipment Technician
10 Human Resource
Development and
Administration Directorate
10.2 Executive Secretary II and 1 36 -3.84 Level
Secretary II
10.3 Senior Human Resource 1 36 -3.84 Level
Training Officer II
10.4 Personnel Officer VI and 1 38 -3.84 Level
Personnel Clerks
10.5 Messengers Room 1 25 -3.84 Level
Record Office/Archive
10.6 Senior Record and Document 1 23 -3.84 Level
Officer
10.7 Document Preparer , Record 1 63 -3.84 Level
Officers and Message Head,
Messengers (Motorists)
10.8 Room For Files 2 152 -3.84 Level
11 Plan & Resource directorate
11.2 Executive Secretary I and 1 25 -19.20 Level
Secretary II
Plan, Finance &
procurement Team
11.3 Head 1 25 -19.20 Level
11.4 Plan & Budget Case Team 1 42 -19.20 Level
11.5 Finance Case Team 1 72 -19.20 Level
31
No Program / Function Number Floor Located Remark

Of Area Floor
Room Proposed
11.6 Procurement Case Team 1 48 -19.20
Level
General Service Team
11.7 Head 1 24 -19.20Level
Transport & Maintenance
Service
11.8 Liaison / ጉዳይአስፈጻሚ/ 1 20 -19.20
Level
11.9 Transport Service Officer, 1 73 -19.20
Inspector and mechanics III Level
11.10 Drivers Room 1 52 -19.20
Level
Housing and Office
Administration
11.11 Head, electrician III, 1 75 -19.20
Plumbers, Carpenter, Level
maintenance Staff
11.12 Telephone operators 1 55 -19.20
Telephone operators Level
11.13 Gardeners Room 1 38 -19.20
Level
11.14 Janitors Common Room 2 72 -19.20
Level
11.15 Store 1 16 -19.20
Level
12 Information and
Communication Directorate
Information , media
Communication and press
Team
12.3 Head 1 56 -7.68 Level
12.4 Information Relation Officers, 1 50 -7.68 Level
Press officers, and
Information Desk Officers
Education, Promotion &
feedback Team
12.5 Head 1 40 -7.68 Level
32
No Program / Function Number Floor Located Remark

Of Area Floor
Room Proposed
12.6 Education, Promotion and 1 52 -7.68 Level
Feedback Officers
Audiovisual
12.7 Audiovisual Experts 1 51 -7.68 Level
12.8 Webpage information 1 70 -7.68 Level
Distribution and Security
Officers
12.9 Briefing Room adjacent to the 2 90 -7.68 Level

main halls of the Houses
12.10 Video conference Room 2 169 -7.68 Level

12.11 Document Availing Room 2 48 -7.68 Level
12.12 Audiovisual 1 108 -7.68 Level
library/Documentation Centre
12.13 Editing Room 1 63 -7.68 Level
12.14 Photo Studio 1 48 -3.84 Level
12.15 Technical Store 1 43 -3.84 Level
12.16 Control Room 1 49 -7.68 Level
12.17 Translation Booth 10 52 -7.68 Level
13 Audit and inspection
Directorate
-3.84 Level
13.1 Director 1 32
13.2 Executive Secretary 1 28 -3.84 Level
13.3 Senior Gender Officer II and 1 31 -3.84 Level
Senior Project Preparation
and Monitoring officer II
14 Women’s Affairs Directorate
14.2 Executive Secretary 1 30 -3.84 Level
14.3 Senior Gender Officer II and 1 36 -3.84 Level
Senior Project Preparation
and Monitoring officer II
33
HOF Program / Function
No Program / Function Number Floor Area Located Remark

Of Room Proposed Floor
HOF
1 Office of the Speaker
1.1 Speaker Office 1 95 -3.84 Level

1.3 Executive Secretary I, 1 57 -3.84 Level
II and III
1.4 Senior Advisor to the 1 41 -3.84 Level
Speaker
1.5 Conference Room 1 149 -3.84 Level
1.7 Ethics and Anti- 1 34 -3.84 Level
Corruption Personnel
1.9 Protocol Officer 1 34 -3.84 Level
2 Office of Deputy
Speaker
2.1 Deputy Speaker 1 48 -3.84 Level
2.3 Executive Secretary III 1 35 -3.84 Level
3 Standing committee
office
3.1 Chairperson of 2 76 -3.84 Level
standing committee
3.2 Secretaries and 2 80 -3.84 Level
standing committee
officers
3.3 Standing committee 2 160 -3.84 Level
conference rooms

4 Council of
constitution inquiry
4.1 Chair person 1 20 -7.68 Level
4.2 Secretaries III and II 1 20 -7.68 Level
34
4.3 Members 1 75 -7.68 Level

5 Office for the
secretary general of
the HoF
5.1 Secretary general 1 49 -7.86 Level
5.2 Executive secretary 3 1 53 -7.86 Level
and 1
5.3 Reception with mini 1 102 -7.86 Level
conference set up
5.4 PM and E, women‟s 1 50 -7.86 Level
affairs and Legal
Affairs Expert
6 Research decision
and follow up
directorate
6.2 Executive secretary III 1 20 -7.68 Level
and II
6.3 Casa manager 3 70 -7.68 Level
6.4 Experts 1 100 -7.68 Level
7 Constitution
interpretation and
constitutional rights
directorate of the HoF
7.2 Executive secretary II 1 25 -7.68 Level
and III
7.3 Constitution case flow 1 113 -7.68 Level
Manager
12 Information and
Communication
Directorate

and III
12.3 Experts 1 77 -3.84 Level
13 Information , media
communication and
press team
13.1 Head 1 18 -7.68 Level
35
13.2 Press and news case 1 94 -7.68 Level

team
13.3 Media and 1 69 -7.68 Level
information service
case team
13.4 Film production and 1 83 -7.68 Level
photography case
team
14 Educational
promotion and
feedback team
14.1 Head 1 30 -7.68 Level
14.2 Educational 1 70 -7.68 Level
promotion and
feedback case team
14.3 Server room 1 24 -7.68 Level
14.4 Central data base 1 25 -7.68 Level
data warehouse
14.5 IT lab and training 1 116 -7.68 Level
room
14.6 Audio visual Library 45 -7.68 Level
documentation center
14.7 Editing room 1 37 -7.68 Level
14.8 Photo studio 1 46 -7.68 Level
14.9 Technical store 1 24 -7.68 Level
14.10 Control room 1 ------ -----
14.11 Translation booth. 10 25 -7.68 Level
36
JSR for HOPR and HOF Program / Function

No Program / Function Number Of Floor Area Located Remark
Room Proposed Floor
HOPR
1 Conference Hall
1.1 Joint meeting of HoPR and 1
HoF Hall with gallery
1.2 Public hearing Hall 4 1743 -11.52
1.3 Joint Committee Meeting 3 329 -7.68
Hall Level
1.4 Constituency Reception 2
Rooms
1.5 HoF members assembly 1
hall Meeting Hall for Staff
1.6 Joint Meeting Hall for Staff 1 660 -11.52
of the Houses Level
2 Library and library staff
2.1 Administrative Section 1 37 -7.68
Level
Technical Section
2.2 Classification Section 1 34 -7.68
Level
2.3 Cataloguing Section 1 52 -7.68
Level
2.4 Acquisition Section 1 60 -7.68
Level
2.5 Binding , Laminating & 1 ------ -------
Other Auxiliary Section
Public Service Section
2.6 General Collection 1 20 -11.52
Circulation Level
2.7 Ethiopian collection 1 72 -7.68

Circulation Level
2.8 Reference Section 1 37 -11.52
Level
2.9 Committees Collection 1 20 -11.52
Circulation Level
2.10 Main Documentation -11.52
Section 1 56 Level
2.11 Mini Documentation Section 1 42 -11.52
Level
37

2.12 Audiovisual Room 2 122 -11.52
Level
2.13 Periodicals Section 1 60 -11.52
Level
2.14 Periodicals Reading room 1 25 -11.52
Internet Service Room
2.15 Parliament Members 1 96 -11.56
Internet Room Level
2.16 Staff Internet Room 1 24 -11.56
Level
2.17 Parliamentary Museum 1 93 -7.68
Room Level
2.18 Reading Rooms for MPs, 1 290 -7.68
Staff and External Level
Customers
2.19 Open Shelf Room 1 ------ ------
2.20 Temporary Store Room 1 20 -7.68
Level
2.21 Information & library 1 74 -7.68
Officers Room Level
Others
2.22 Conference/Discussion 2 50 -11.52
room Level
2.23 Toilet for Men & Women 2 58 -7.68
Level
3 Print Shop
Pre- Press Activities
Room
3.1 Dark Room 1 17 -7.68
Level
3.2 Plate & Film Washing Room 1 50 -7.68
Press Section
3.3 Printing Room with heavy 1 1346 -7.68
Machines Level
Post Press Section

3.4 Finishing Activities Room 1 75 -7.68
Level
3.5 Delivery Store 1 25 -7.68
Level
38

3.6 Mini Store 1 25 -7.68
Level
3.7 Pigeon Hall 1
Room for personnel
3.8 Main Publisher 1 16 -7.68
Level
3.9 Publisher & Assistant 1 28 -7.68
Publisher Staffs Level
3.10 Publisher and Conference 2 86 -7.68

Service Staffs Level
3.11 Room for Changing 2 46 -7.68

Working Clothes for Women Level
& Men
3.12 Shower & Toilet for Women 2 -------- --------
and Men
4 Cafeteria and Recreation
Service
4.1 Head 1 13 -15.36
Level
4.2 Accountant & Store Man , 1 33 -15.36
Purchaser, Cashier Level
4.3 Cafeteria Hall for MPs 1 437 -7.68
Level
4.4 Cafeteria Hall for VIPs 1 143 -15.36
Level
4.5 Cafeteria Hall for Staff 1 1120 -15.36 --------
Level
4.6 Kitchen 1 189 -15.36
Level
4.7 Mini Café 3 255 -15.36
Level
4.8 Shower and Working Close 2 46 -15.36
Changing Room Level
5 Clinic Service
5.1 Waiting Room 1 64 -19.20
Level
5.2 Diagnostic Room 2 64 -19.20
Level
39

5.3 Treatment Room 2 64 -19.20
Level
5.4 Rooms for Accidental 3 84 -19.20
patients (1-5) Level
5.5 Laboratory Room 1 17 -19.20
Level
5.6 X-Ray Room 1 35 -19.20
Level
5.7 Toilet 2 32 -19.20
Level
5.8 Preparation Room 1 21 -19.20
Level
5.9 Information Desk with 1 326 -19.20
Sufficient Check points and Level
waiting space
6 Sergeant and Arms Service
6.1 Head 1 35 -11.52
6.2 Guard Room 1 22 -11.52
Level
7 Standing committee
Offices
7.1 Additional Training Hall 1 205 -11.52
Level
7.2 Discussion/Syndicate Rooms 10 690 -11.52
Level
7.3 Offices for Training Centre 1 210 -15.36
Staff Level
7.4 Toilets for Trainee 8 58 -11.52 .
Level
7.5 Registration Room 1 33 -11.52
Level
7.6 Mini Store 1 33 -11.52
Level
7.7 Open Space for Break times 1 160 -11.52
Level
Supplementary Programs
Garage
Gymnasium
Day Care
Laundry Service
Beauty Salons
Indoor & Outdoor Games
40
The schedule of accommodations above are according to the preliminary design attached. The
Contractor shall check areas on the drawings as the drawings are the basis on strict conformity of which
the Contractor will proceed to final design.
6.4.4. Major works of the design phase
(i) Design Phases
The contractor shall prepare detail design of the building based on the preliminary
architectural design documents and submit to the Engineer for approval in the following
manner agreed on from the outset. The Contractor is responsible to prepare a schedule that
will allow him to commence the construction work at the earliest possible, while undertaking
the design work. But under no way he can start the construction work before the approval of
design for respective part of the Works that the Contractor intends to execute. After
approval of each discipline of design by the Engineer, the Contractor shall prepare and
submit the required documents to the relevant local authorities and utility providers for
construction permits. The Contractor is responsible to submit building permit application
through an Architect of Record that has the required category of Consulting license.
 Final Architectural Design

The basis of the Final architectural design shall be the preliminary design and comments
received thereon.
 Site plan to a scale of 1:500 or 1:200,

 Floor plan to a scale of 1:50 to 1:100 or 1:200,
 Sections to a scale of 1:50 or 1:100, or 1:200,
 Elevation to a scale of 1:50 or 1:100, or 1:200,
 Special drawings and schedules for doors, windows, stairs, fixed interior decoration
and other details to scale of 1:20, 1:10, or 1:5,
 Exterior and interior renderings of all key areas and views as required by the engineer
 Finish schedule,
 Physical Model
 BIM (incorporating all disciplines)
Small-scale drawings shall always be accompanied with partial typical details in bigger
scale.
Structural
 Plans of formwork to scale of 1:50,
 Plans of slab reinforcement to a scale of 1:50,
 Foundation plans to a scale of 1:50,
 Structural sections to a scale of 1:20 or 1:10,
 Beams, columns and foundation reinforcement drawings to a scale of 1:20,
 Drawings for wooden or steel structures to a scale of 1:20 or 1:10,
 Details to scale of 1:10, 1:5, 1:1 or as required,
41
 Bar bending schedules,

 Structural calculations,
MEP (including ventilation and air conditioning, IT, Communication, Sound and
entertainment)
 Floor plan to a scale of 1:50,
 Detail drawings for special items to a scale of 1:20 or 1:10 or 1:5 or 1:1,
 Schemes and riser diagrams,
 Hydraulic and other necessary calculations,
Electrical
 Floor plan to a scale of 1:50 or 1:100,
 Distribution layout and single line diagrams for all distribution boards,
 Illumination calculation.
Electro-mechanical
 Final design of all building services system for each individual building,
 Typical drawings for each servicing system,
 Cross section of typical floors with final services coordination,
 Schematic for individual servicing systems,
 System calculation,
 1:50 to 1:20 plant room layouts,
 Sectional and typical details for all services scale 1:50 to 1:5,
 Typical riser layouts,
Specifications and Bill of Quantities
The Contractor must submit Specification and Bill of Quantities of all components of
the Works to the Engineer.
Design Report
 Design report shall support each of the above if such reports are necessary for the
clear understanding of the various documents.
d. Final Document Preparation
 The final Document shall be prepared by incorporating comments received and

revisions made on the Final Design and as-built drawings shall be prepared
accordingly.
42
e. Additional Services
 The Contractor shall if so requested by the Employer or the Consultant provide any
of the services specified in this Article, and/or take all reasonable steps to arrange
for the provision by others.
 The Contractor shall obtain prior written agreement of the employer on the
arrangements, which he proposes to make on behalf of the employer or for the
provision of any of the series specified in the article.
 Preparing any report or additional documents required for consideration of proposals
for carrying out of alternative works.
 Carry out work in connection with any application by the Employer for any order,
license, permit or other consent, approval or authorization necessary to enable the
works to proceed.
(ii) Major Design Disciplines
- Architectural
- Structural
- MEP (Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing)
- Interior Design
- Landscape design
- Façade/envelop design
- Acoustic design
- Sustainability design
- Façade lighting design
- Signage and wayfinding
- Security Design
- FF & E ( furniture, Fixture and Equipment‟s)
 Major design disciplines are identified, but not limited to the followings:
Architecture: The architectural design is defined by the preliminary architectural design

and other conceptual sketches of the Engineer which forms part of this Employer‟s
Requirement. The Contractor shall prepare final architectural design in strict conformity with
the preliminary architectural design and other reference materials in this Employer‟s
requirement.
Façade design: the performance profile for façade Design applies to engineering services
related to the outer building comprises of outer façade made of materials glass, aluminum,
43
natural stone, sun protection and anti-glare facilities as wall, integration of self-illumination
and inbuilt lighting systems as per the design of the artificial lighting designer, integration of
definition of materials performance and specification of all building physics aspects above
ground as per the requirements defined by sustainable building design and MEP design,
structural design of façade elements, definition of requirements and details for exterior
doors and shutters, interior foyer facades of tower building and integration of symbol
requirements as per the requirement to integrate the FDRE HOF & HOPR Logo into
building façade.
The façade design must proposal that includes the advice on compilation of a façade
cleaning and maintenance concept as a specialist engineering service.
Structural and Seismic Engineering: The contractor shall design the foundation and
super-structure of the building based on the result of detailed geotechnical and geophysical
investigation to be carried out by the contractor his sub-contractor and approved by the
consultant.
The building is located in a zone of high seismic force and the structural analysis will need
to be undertaken to an internationally recognized standard. The contractor shall involve
specialist engineers experienced in the field of seismic and high rise building design.
According to international standards for high-rise building projects the seismic performance
of the structure is subject to an independent peer review to confirm the correctness and
robustness of the design.
Wind Engineering: the contractor shall establish performance profile for the wind
engineering comprising of, wind engineering study, determination of key structural design
criteria at the ultimate and serviceability limit state, establish the design wind climate at the
site i.e. extreme wind speed and direction to be used in design, quantify structural loads due
to strong winds and carry our wind tunnel testing.
Infrastructure Roads: the contractor shall establish performance profile which comprises
on site road layout, tie-in connection to the adjacent roads network, primary service, internal
vehicular and pedestrian communication, parking strategy, access to the building, drop-off
zones, firefighting routes, road details, road ways construction, integration of the
construction details of pavement, side walk, medians, curbstones, block paving, parking
spaces as per the landscape design and road marking and signage inside plot area.
Traffic impact studies and models shall be carried out by the contractor.
MEP (Mechanical Electrical and Plumbing) Design: the MEP design services cover;
heating cooling and ventilation services, domestic hot and cold water services, active
firefighting services, building environmental control systems, incoming electrical services LV
distribution and standby power, small power,
electric services for interior and exterior and street lighting design as well as the integration
of self-illumination and in build lighting systems as per the artificial light design, emergency
lighting, space planning and allocation of service space for the future installation of voice
and data system by future tenants, integration of lifts and escalators as per vertical
transportation, fire alarm systems, lightning protection of the buildings and light design for
44
all areas not covered by artificial lighting design like service areas, parking, basements,
infrastructure areas, air traffic security lighting etc.
The external utilities services cover the surface and sub-surface drainage, sewerage,
potable water, firefighting, irrigation system, electric power, telecommunication and
engineering for wireless infrastructure and applications and IT cabling.
Kitchen Design: Kitchen design comprises of calculation and definition of needed
capacities, kitchen layout with room allocation and area requirements, calculation and
definition of technical and functional requirements, planning of logistic-processes within
kitchen facilities and expert planning of all requested kitchen equipment like thermal and
cooking equipment, dish washing and conveyor system, working units, tables, sinks, basins,
hygienic equipment, specific mobile equipment, counters (self-service) and specific
equipment‟s, dispensers etc., floor drainage system, exhaust system, cold storage rooms,
refrigeration systems, storage equipment‟s, shelves, food processing machines and
equipment and coffee machines.
Vertical Transportation: in designing the vertical transportation the contractor shall take
into consideration the provision of lifts and escalators for goods and people movement
within the project boundary. The service must analyze the sizing, waiting and travel times,
movement strategies and safety issues.
Sustainable Building Design: the contractor shall develop and validate climate and energy
concepts for buildings. Emphasis must be given to providing highly comfortable
environment with minimum energy use.
The contractor in designing the buildings shall ensure the following environmental and
occupant issues:
- Sustainable sites: create site that reduce storm water runoff.
- Light pollution: reduce commute time and maximize use of natural light.
- Water efficiency: safeguard water and reduce water consumption.
- Energy and Atmosphere: reduce energy consumption, utilize renewable energy sources
and protect air quality.
- Material and Resources: recycle, minimize waste to landfills, and utilize locally
manufactured and renewable materials
- Door environmental quality: utilize low VOC materials, maximize day lighting and improve
comfort.
Signage and Way finding: The signage program must ensure providing a seamless
journey for all users both to and from their destination. Way finding are not only in the
building but also are of particular importance within car parking areas.
Signage includes but not limited to the followings:-
Internal Signage – Buildings
- Main directory listing at entrance lobby and sub-directories,
- Directional/way finding signage,
- Level identification,
- Office/room signs,
- lift lobby identification,
45
- Facility identification,
- Back of house signage,
- Disabled user signs.
External Signage – Buildings

- Development identification,
- Building identification,
- Street and courtyard identification,
- Identification of drop-off and taxi pickup areas,
- Vehicular way findings,
- Pedestrian way findings around the site,
- Integration of symbol requirements,
Basement/Car Park Signage

- Vehicular way findings,
- Column identification,
- Level identification,
- Room identification,
- Pedestrian circulation,
- Escalator and lift lobby identification,
- Entry and exit signage,
- Facility identification,
- Floor marking and individual parking space floor numbers for vehicular way finding,
Acoustic Design: the contractor shall assess site environmental noise and vibration
conditions, assess performance requirement for façade and building envelop, internal
acoustic separation, internal finishes and noise control provisions to MEP system. Public
address/voice alarm shall also be provided where required.
Landscape Design: The contractor shall address; site development plan identifying
boundaries, building access and egress points, internal vehicular and pedestrian
communication routes and use zone, spatial arrangement and appearance of site, layout of
planting, decorative fountains, recreational facilities and water features; structures, finishes,
site furniture, equipment and signage, planting species, seeding and turfing; irrigation,
boundary treatments, external street furniture, equipment; external walls, fencing; support
structure to plantings, external decorative lighting water features, courtyards and alleyways
furniture and finishes, integration of exterior lighting as per the artificial lighting design,
construction detail of pavement, sidewalks, medians, curbstone, block paving and parking
spaces.
The project landscaping works is divided mainly in to different components:
46
I. Surrounding water cascade:

The water cascade is the other important feature of the project that surrounds mostly
the south western part of the buildings with a perimeter length of around 600m.Design
details and technical details like pumps and dump proofing details should be proposed
to the satisfaction of the engineer/the client.
II. Roof terrace(soft & hard surfaces)-greenery & water:
The roof terrace landscape is a representation of Ethiopian landscapes. Vegetation
and greeneries should be designed based on the preliminary landscape design ideas to
achieve the desired effects. Pavements, rock gardens and river water representations
should be well detailed for execution. Water collection system and drainage system
should be well detailed.
III. Compound landscapes:

The overall compound landscape design and surrounding public spaces should be
detailed and designed based on the preliminary design. Public square, pavements and
surrounding trees should be seriously considered on the final design stage.
Overall landscaping features should consider different types of trees and vegetation.
Interior Design: the contractor shall address in the interior design; interior space design
(lobby, HOPR & HOF halls, Joint meeting halls, standing committee meeting halls,
executive offices) floor, wall and ceiling construction and finishes in conjunction with
acoustical considerations and , built in furniture, fixed joinery works, furniture of special
areas, curtains, drapes and furniture fabrics, decorative lighting, ironmongery selection,
integration of MEP systems, Sanitary fitting, fixture and plumbing and sanitary ware
selection. The Contractor must consider the conceptual interior designs of the Consultant to
develop detail designs based on sketches like attached Annex-A.
Artificial Lighting Design (Interior and Exterior): the contractor shall design and outline
load calculations for interior lighting, exterior lighting including street, lighting of landscape
features and illumination buildings and features, building self-illumination and in build
lighting systems, integration of decorative lighting, integration of daylight calculation results,
photorealistic visualizations and organization and presentation of luminaries samples.
Fire Protection: the contractor shall address fire protection comprising of requirements
according to the building type, use and construction method, internal and external approach
for the fire department, rescue concept, constructive fire safety measures, the designation
of compartments, fire resistance ratings of material and constructive elements, technical fire
safety measures and consideration of regulations of assurances and consideration of
regulations of occupational health and safety.
Security Design: the contractor shall be responsible to develop strategy to protect the
building, its occupants and the design of the necessary system to compliment this strategy.
The contractor shall ensure systematic integration of layered protective measures against
identified and foreseen risks. The approved strategy shall be developed into specification of
systems and physical security equipment needed to mitigate threats and vulnerabilities
whilst maintaining the sense of transparency in the approved architectural design.
47
The security systems is divided in to two categories:

1.1. Security Fence
The perimeter fence should be engineered security barrier which disappears into its
surroundings. The high density, high tensile mesh type includes apertures too narrow for
finger and footholds, highly transparent/unobtrusive, prevent g climbing or cutting with
standard tools, bolt cutters etc.
In addition to the above the fence structure should be durable and impact and crash
resistant.
1.2. CCTV security systems

A state of the art security system design with night vision CCTV systems should be
considered with a desired location in all the premises of the complex.
Detail description is written on the electrical specifications section.
The Contractor is responsible to propose and implement latest technology security features
that are not described here but are in use in similar high security government complexes
around the world.
Furniture, Fixture and Equipment’s:
The Contractor shall design layout of all furniture, fixture and equipment‟s and develop a
comprehensive and detailed specifications and bill of quantities and submit for approval by
the Engineer. The FF & E shall conform to the architectural style of the building and fulfill
design and technical quality standards conforming to BIFMA and ANSI.
6.5 Construction Works Requirement
6.5.1 General
The contractor shall be responsible to carry out the work in compliance with standards,
codes, regulations, drawings and specifications.
The contractor shall:
- Ensure the workmanship and material quality are incompliance with the contract
documents,
- Ensure technical documentation for work done and materials supplied from manufacturers,
- Ensure proper production, transpiration, placement and testing of concrete,
- Prepare as-built drawings,
- Prepare detail drawings of a work element, as required by the design review and
supervision consultant,
- Prepare and submit for approval of construction work schedule,
48
- Establish a site diary for production and monitoring the site,

- Undertake monthly measurement of work and submit with invoices to the consultant,
- Facilitate for inspection by the consultant and the Bank, as required,
- Keep updated the warranties, insurances and Bank guarantees,
- Carry out tests as scheduled and required by the consultants,
Organization and Mobilization
The contractor shall:-

- prepare and submit for approval of the consultant his mobilization plan,
- Comply with all the insurance policies,
- Fulfill the necessary Performance Bonds and Advance Payment guarantee,
- Commence the work as instructed by the consultant,
- Ensure to meet the time table set for mobilization,
- Make available the necessary forms, manuals and contract documents on the site,
Planning and Program

The contractor shall prepare a work schedule using “Primavera Project Planner” and submit
to the consultant for review and approval. The schedule shall address master work
schedule, material supply schedule, man power schedule, financial schedule and
equipment supply schedule.
The contractor‟s program shall be required to include, among others:-

- Logic Network including critical path (CPM),
- Short Construction activities,
- Activities tabular schedules,
- Bar chart schedule, shop drawings and material submission and approval schedule,
- Procurement schedule,
- Each activities having a clear defined quantity, duration, cost manpower and equipment,
- Resource schedule and histograms,
- Cost expenditure,
- Work break down structure (WBS),
- Sub-contractor‟s schedule,
Survey and Material
The contractor shall undertake the followings, among others:-
- Set control points and bench mark for alignment and level,
- Identify sources, supply and testing of the following materials, among others:-
 Construction water,
 Concrete aggregate and ingredients,
 Cement,
 Pavement materials,
49
 Bituminous materials,
 Masonry materials,
 Steel reinforcement,
 Structural steel,
 Expansion joints,
 Painting materials,
 Plastics,
 Insulation materials,
 Roofing materials,
 Electrical equipment and materials,
 Mechanical equipment and materials,
 Metals,
 Wood,
 Pipes and conduits
- Submit mix-design before commencement of works,
Plan for Site Organization

The contractor is required to submit a layout plan for all temporary site facilities for approval
of the Employer/The Engineer. These include site accesses, temporary structures, site
office and accommodation, laboratory, stocking and staging yards, plant facilities, and
service roads and parking areas.
Construction Methods
Prior to the start of any site activities, the contractor shall submit a clearly formulated and
well documented method statement for the consultant‟s review and approval.
Contract Time
The contractor shall prepare his master work schedule in terms of labor, material and
equipment supply based on the milestone set for the completion of the project and revise
quarterly. The revised schedules shall be adjusted to compensate for any delay of activities.
Work Quality
The contractor shall ensure full compliance of the work with contract requirements for all
site operations.
Reporting
The contractor shall prepare monthly progress reports highlighting problems, obstacles and
shortages. The monthly progress report shall include information on progress, performance
measurements, quality, cost data, contractual matters, materials, resources, manpower,
50
weather conditions, work variations accompanied with photos and data.

Inception Report, Mobilization Report are also required of the contractor in addition to the
monthly progress report.
Measurements and Payment Certificates
The contractor shall measure the work executed to prepare payment certificates and submit
to the consultant for subsequent checking and approval.
Completion of Works and Taking Over

The contractor shall prepare and submit to the consultant schedule for testing and
commissioning of the work to pave the way for project hand over.
The project will be provisionally accepted after the consultant verifies that all works are
done in accordance to the contract documents and joint inspection is done in the presence
of all parties.
At this stage the contractor shall prepare as built drawings of the project for future
references.
The final acceptance will be done as per the contract conditions after the certification work
is completed to the satisfaction of the consultant at expiry of the maintenance period.
Defect Liability Period

During the defect liability period the contractor shall complete such outstanding works as
listed in the taking over certificate and also remedy any defects that appear afterwards. The
contractor shall ensure the building demonstrates under operational conditions that the
requirements of the contract have been complied with.
Final Payment certificate and Final Report
The contractor shall prepare and present to the consultant the final payment certificate
along with Final Report up on final acceptance of the project.
6.5.2 Technical Specification
Neither the Technical Specification presented hereunder nor the detail Specification
attached as annex-shall A considered sufficient for this work. This Specification and the
detail Specification in the Annex shall be used in conjunction with “Standard Technical
Specification & Method of Measurement, MoWUD, and other internationally recognized
manuals; to be proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Employer/The Engineer.
a) Contract Drawings
The contractor shall avail all the necessary drawing at the required scales for a particular
work item and submit for consultant‟s approval before commencing the respective work. All
details shall be worked out in relation to their location and their connection with parts of the
work.
51
b) Shop Drawings
The Contractor shall submit for the approval of the Engineer, shop drawings, setting
drawings and schedules, required by specifications or requested by Engineer. No work shall
be fabricated, save at Contractor‟s risk until such approval has been received. Drawings
and schedules shall be delivered to the Engineer unless otherwise directed.
Drawings and schedules shall be checked and coordinated with the work of any other
trades involved, before they are submitted for approval of the Engineer and shall bear the
Contractor's stamp of approval as evidence of such checking and coordination. Drawings
and schedules submitted without this stamp of approval will be returned to the Contractor
for resubmission.
Drawings and schedules shall be submitted in quadruplicate (unless otherwise specified),
accompanied by a letter of transmission. The letter shall include a list of the numbers and
dates of the individual drawings submitted. Drawings shall be complete, bound in sets and
shall bear: the date, the name of the project, consecutive numbering and the Contractor‟s
stamp of approval.
The Contractor shall submit drawings and schedules sufficiently in advance of construction
requirements to allow ample time for checking.
The approval of drawings and schedule will be general, but approval shall not be construed:
- As permitting any departure from the contract requirements;
- As relieving the contractor of the responsibility for any errors, including details,
dimensions, materials, etc.
- As approving departure from full-size details furnished by the Engineer except as
otherwise provided herein;
c) As Built Drawings
The Contractor shall on completion of works supply the Employer with a complete set of “As
Built Drawings” in soft and hard copies comprising a semi-original negative film paper. The
Contractor shall also prepare and submit model of the building annexes thereto.
d) Units
In this specification, on the drawing and in the Bill of Quantities the S.I. (system
International d‟ units) metric system of dimensioning has been adopted. Where dimensions
are given in metric units for material which are only available in imperial dimensions, the
Contractor may, subject to his obtaining the prior approval of the Engineer, substitute
suitable sizes of materials as be available in the imperial system. Such approval shall not
reasonably be withheld provided that there is no difficulty in making interface connections
with any other part of the works.
e) Standard Specifications
For convenience and in order to establish the necessary standards of quality, reference has
been made to specifications issued by national or other widely recognized bodies. Such
specification shall be referred to as “Standard Specifications” and shall be the latest editions
of this tender document together with such additions or amendments as may have been
52
issued prior to the same date.
Subject to the written approval of the Engineer, any other internationally accepted Standard
Specification which requires an equal quality of work may be used.
If the Contractor proposes to use a Standard Specification other than that specified, three
copies of the proposed Standard Specification in English shall be submitted to the Engineer
not less than 28 days before approval of Standard Specification is required.
Reference in the Specification to any article, device, product, materials, fixture, form or type
of construction by name, make or catalogue number, shall be interpreted as establishing
standard of quality, and not as limiting competition. The Contractor may make substitutions
equal to the items specified, if approved in advance in writing by the Employer.
For the detail Specification of major construction work items refer the attached Annex-C.
f) Program
The Contractor shall submit a fully detailed program showing the order of procedure in
which he proposes to carry out the works.
The program shall show for each major item of the work planned rate of program for each
month. The Contractor shall adopt Critical Path or critical chain Programming or other
recognized and acceptable techniques and shall throughout the course of the contract,
revise and review the program in such a manner that at minimum intervals of one month
progress achieved can be compared with that program. Two copies of the program review
shall be delivered monthly to the Engineer/Employer.
g) Notice of Operations
No important operations shall be carried out without full and complete notice in writing been
given to the Engineer by the Contractor sufficiently in advance of the time of the operation
so as to enable the Engineer to make such arrangements as he may deem necessary for its
inspection or any other requirements as may be stated elsewhere in the Specification.
Every month the Contractor shall apply to the Engineer in writing, full information with
respect the locations in which materials are being obtained and in which work is being
prepared, but this period may be varied at the discretion of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer adequate but in any event not less than 24 hours‟
notice of his intention to set out or give levels for any parts of the works in order that
arrangements may be made for checking.
h) Night Work
For any work authorized to be carried out at night or in dim conditions the Contractor shall
supply and operate all necessary lighting.
The lighting shall be fully adequate in order to:
- Enable the Contractor to carry out working in accordance with the Specification; and
- Enable the Engineer to supervise and test or cause testing the work being done.
53
i) Setting Out
The Contractor shall be responsible for the full and proper setting out of the works in
accordance with the Conditions of Contract.
The Contractor shall establish permanent bench marks, as appropriate, and locate all lines
and levels necessary for the execution of the works and be responsible for the correct
location of all works.
Additional costs for material and work due to improper location of works shall be born
entirely by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall preserve all bench marks, stakes and any other survey marks and in
case of their removal or destruction be liable for the cost of their replacement.
Accurate records of location of all permanent bench marks and other survey points be kept
by the Contractor and handed over to the Employer on completion of the works.
Where directed by Engineer‟s Representative the Contractor shall take such levels and
dimensions as may be required prior to disturbance of the ground for the purpose of
measurement and these shall be agreed between the Contractor and the Engineer‟s
Representative in writing before start of operation.
j) Sources and types of Local Materials to be incorporated in the Works
The Contractor shall be responsible for locating and selecting natural materials complying
with the Specification and for ensuring that natural materials processed by him comply with
the Specification. The location of the source, trial pit logs, results of tests required by the
Specification and representative samples of sufficient size for the Engineer to perform the
same tests, shall be submitted to the Engineer for Acceptance of the source well in advance
of commencement of working of the material. No material shall be used which is not
secured from a source accepted by the Engineer. Acceptance of a source does not mean
that all materials from that source will be accepted.
All materials, manufactured articles and machinery shall be new. The Contractor shall
before placing any order for materials, manufactured articles and machinery for
incorporation in works, submit for approval of the Engineer the name of the firm from whom
he proposes to obtain such materials, etc., together with a list of the materials,
manufactured articles and machinery giving the origin, manufacturer‟s specification, quality,
weight, strength, description etc., which he proposes that the firms should supply, and no
materials, manufactured articles or machinery shall be ordered or obtained from any firm of
which the Engineer shall not have previously approved in writing.
Where samples of materials are required to be submitted by the Contractor, two samples
shall be forwarded to the Engineer/Employer.
54
k) Samples
After the award of the contract and up on completion of the design, the Contractor shall
furnish for the approval of the Engineer sample, samples required by the Specifications or
requested by the Employer.
Samples shall be delivered to the Employer unless otherwise directed. The Contractor
repay all shipping charges on samples. Materials or equipment for which samples are
required, shall not be used in the work until approved in writing by the Employer/The
Engineer, save only at the contractor‟s risk and expense.
Each sample shall have a label indicating: 1) name of the project, 2) name of the contractor,
3) material or equipment represented, 4) place of origin, 5) name of producer and brand (if
any), 6) location in the project
Samples of finished materials shall have additional markings that will identify them under
the finish schedules.
The contractor shall mail under separate cover a letter in triplicate submitting each shipment
of samples and containing the above listed information required. He shall enclose a copy of
this letter with the shipment and send a copy to the Engineer on the project. Approval of a
sample shall be only for the characteristics or use named in such approval and shall not be
construed to change or modify any contract requirement. Before submitting samples the
contractor shall assure himself that the materials or equipment will be available in the
quantities required in the project, because no change or substitution will be permitted after a
sample has been approved.
Approved samples not destroyed in testing will be sent to the Engineer at the project.
Approved sample of hard ware in good condition will be marked for identification and may
be used in the work. Materials and equipment incorporated in the work shall match the
approved samples. Samples not destructed in testing or not approved will be returned to the
contractor at his expense if so requested at the time of submission.
Failure of any material to pass the specified tests will be sufficient cause for refusal to
consider under this contract any further samples of the same brand or make of that
material. The Employer/Employer „Representative reserve the right to disapprove any
material or equipment which previously has proved unsatisfactory in service.
Samples of various materials equipment delivered on the site in plane may be taken by
employer representative for testing. Samples failing to meet the contract requirements will
automatically void previous approvals of the items tested. The contractor shall replace such
materials or equipment to meet contract requirements, or there shall be a proper adjustment
of the contract price as determined by the employer.
l) Testing by the Engineer
The engineer will from time to time, and when he deems necessary, perform such tests as
he may require. The contractor, without cost to the employer, shall:
55
- Furnish such assistance as is required from the collection, preparation or testing of

specimens and samples, and
- Reinstate sampling and testing holes
Whenever in the Specification tests on materials, tests on completed work and construction
control tests are called for or implied, they shall be carried out according to the materials
shall comply with the requirements of the specifications issued by:
 Ethiopian Building Code Standards, EBCS (where ever is appropriate for that particular
discipline),
 Standard Technical Specification, by Ministry of Infrastructure, 2003,
 American Society of Heating and Ventilation, Air Condition Refrigeration Engineers
Standard (ASHREA),
 British Standard (BS),
 Germany Standard (DIN),
 Fire Fighting, calculation based on National Fire Protection of America (NFPA),
 International Standard Technical Specifications,
 Recent findings by local and international experts on Geophysics and Earthquake
engineering for seismic design, in addition to the Ethiopian Building Code Standard.
 And other standards by Ministry of Works & Urban Development, British Standards
Institution (BSI), American Concrete Institute (ACI), American Association of State
Highway and Transport Officials (AASHTO),

m) Compliance with Specification

All materials, plant, labor and workmanship in and connected with the execution of the
works shall be the best of their respective kinds without the regard to any trade terms and
the contractor shall carry out the contract in a proper and workmanlike manner and in strict
accordance with the drawings and the instruction of the Engineer.
n) Protection of the Works
The contractor shall carefully protect from injury by weather, all work and materials which
may be affected thereby, and allow on his prices for pumping, shoring, temporary drains,
sumps, etc., necessary for the purpose and shall clear away and make good at his cost to
the satisfaction of the engineer all damage caused thereby.
o) Preservation of trees
The removal of trees shall be kept to the minimum necessary to accommodate the
permanent works.
56
Prior to the removal of any trees the contractor shall inform the Engineer of the intended
operation and obtain the permission of the Engineer for the removal of the trees. If any tree
is removed without permission the contractor shall replace it with an equivalent tree at no
additional cost to the Employer.
p) Existing Access
Existing access to lands, property and all other things shall be maintained by the contractor
during the continuance of the works to the engineer‟s satisfaction, the cost of such
maintenance being deemed to be covered by and included in the offer.
q) Temporary Access tracks

The contractor shall provide and maintain temporary access tracks for the works for his own
use, and shall make these temporary access available for the unrestricted use of other
contractors employed by the employer and authorized representatives of the employer and
of public bodies corporation such access tracks shall include tip access, and shall be
provided and maintained entirely at the cost of the contractor.
The contractor shall be deemed to have included in his offer for the provision and
maintenance of such tracks for the works.
r) Existing Services
The contractor shall make himself acquainted with the position of all existing works and
services, inter alia, sewers, storm-water drains, cables for electric city and the telephone
lines, telephone and lighting poles, water mains, before and excavation is commenced.
The contractor will be held responsible for damage caused in the course of the execution of
the works to such existing works and services and shall indemnify the Employer against any
claims arising from such damage (including consequential damages). Any damage caused
must be made good at the contractor‟s own expense.
Such existing works and services exposed by the execution of the works shall be properly
shored, hound-up and supported to the satisfaction of the Engineer and of the authority
concerned. The contractor shall exercise special care when refilling trenches or other
excavations around such existing works or services. Poles supporting cables, etc., adjacent
to the works shall be kept securely in place until the work is completed and shall then be
made as safe and permanent as before.
Notwithstanding the foregoing requirements and without lessening the contractor‟s
responsibility, the contractor shall inform the Engineer immediately when existing works
have been exposed and conform to any requirements of the proposed work and the cost of
such work will be paid for on a Day work basis.
s) Use of Heavy Plant
In the event of the contractor desiring to use heavy machinery or plant, he shall first satisfy
the Engineer that they will be of such size and used in such a manner as note to cause
disturbance damage in particular to water, electricity, post office or other mains, cables and
connection or to sewers, culverts, etc. , or interfere with the line or position of any overhead
wires and cables or any sort, telegraph poles, power poles, etc.
57
The contractor will be held liable for any such damage or disturbance and shall pay the full
costs of any reinstatement relaying, re-fixing as may be required, as agreed between the
Engineer and the owner affected.
t) Contractor’s offices, stores and workshops
The contractor shall provide and maintain on approved sites suitable office, sufficient stores
and proper storage of materials, and fuel. The stores shall be of such size and construction
that they shall provide adequate storage and protection of stocks of materials to facilitate
the uninterrupted progress of the works.
u) Temporary Services
The contractor shall be responsible, for the water supply, electricity supply, telephone,
sanitary and all other services necessary for constructional and domestic purposes for the
duration of the contract. He shall make all necessary arrangements for such water supply,
electricity supply, telephone, sanitary and other services as may be required. All costs
incurred shall be allowed for in the Tender.
The contractor shall be entirely responsible for entering in to any agreements with the
appropriate suppliers, and shall issue all notices and pay all fees, dues, rents, charges and
other costs incurred there by. As in the case of any other supplier, a failure on the part of a
supplier of these services will be relieve the contractor of any of his duties or responsibilities
under the contract, nor in respect of such failure shall the contractor have any claim the
contract.
As soon as any part or the whole of the contractors installation is no longer required for the
carrying out of the contractor is to disconnect and remove the redundant equipment and
make good to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The contractor shall provide adequate waterborne sanitation and refuse collection and
disposal, complying with the local by-laws and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. In
addition, at point where work is in progress, chemical latrine shall be provided and other
sanitary arrangements required by and to the satisfaction of the Health Authorities and the
Engineer.
v) Building Regulation
All building erected by the contactor up on the site and camp site and the layout of the
buildings and the site shall comply with the laws of the Addis Ababa City Administration and
all prevailing Bye laws in so far as they are applicable.
w) Disposal
All rubbish vegetable matter and materials not required for future be burnt or taken off the
site to tips provided by the contractor to the Engineers‟ satisfaction. The material taken to
tips shall be covered by necessary, and the area graded and left tide to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.
Burning of rubbish shall be under taken in a controlled manner.
At the end of the contract the whole works shall cleaned and left in a clean and work man
58
like condition.
x) Final Clearance
Up on completed of each section of the work the area shall be tidied up and make
presentable. The contractors working and other area shall be cleaned of all building debris,
etc., leveled off and left to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
At the end of the contractor the while works shall cleaned and cleared and left in a clean
and workman like condition.
y) Work Executed by the Employer or by Other Contractor

The Employer reserves the right to execute on the site work not included under this contract
and to employ for this purpose either his own employees or another contractor whose
contract may be either a sub contract under this contract or an entirely separate contract.
The contractor shall ensure that neither his own operation nor trespass by his employees
shall interfere with the operation of the Employer, or his contractor employed on such works
and the same obligation shall be imposed on the Employer or contractor in respect of work
being executive under his contract.
z) Specialist Sub-Contractor
The contractor shall appoint sub-contractor for those section of the work in which he is not
an experienced recognized and approved operator and where sub-contractors are not
nominated by the Employer
The contractor shall, on submission of his tender, indicate on the schedule sullied the
names of all proposed specialist sub-contractor, together with the precise sections of the
work for which each be responsible for approval. He may be required to seek alternative
sub-contractors, or to accept subcontractors nominated by the Engineer.
aa) Co-ordination with Other Contractors
The contractor shall maintain constant and careful liaison with other contractor and sub –
contractors on the sites to ensure the coordination of respective programs of work, the
accurate building of pipes, etc., as the work proceed. The Engineer will do all possible to
assist in the contractor must be prepared to assist the progress of the work generally by
carrying out building operation, in the order required to prevent delays.
The contractor shall be deemed to have included in his Tender for the coordination and
programming of the works of such contractors and for any reasonable interference or delays
which he may suffer thereby.
ab) Sign Boards
The contractor shall supply and install a painted metal sign board approximately
250x150cm. Before the erection of sign boards or posters the contractor shall obtain
agreement of the Engineer and the Employer to the size location and wording.
59
6.5.3 Control of Work and Material

(i) Construction Specification
The 2004 Ministry of Works and Urban development “Technical Specification and Method of
Measurement” Standard specification shall be used by the Contractor as a minimum
requirement for material and construction requirements by the Contractor to address project
specific needs; but shall meet Technical Specification of Appendix-C of Section-VII, Bid
Document Volume-I. The Contractor shall prepare Construction specification for Materials
and construction items and procedures not adequately covered by either Ministry of Works
or Urban development 2004 Standard Specifications or Appendix-C of Section-VII, Bid
Document Volume-I, maintaining or improving the level of quality represented therein.
The Contractor shall identify all Divisions and special provisions which will apply to the
work. The Contractor shall also include all Technical Special Provisions, which will apply to
the work. Technical Special Provisions may be written only for items not addressed by
Ministry of Works and Urban development Specification and Appendix-C of Section-VII, Bid
Document Volume-I, and may not be used as a means of changing Ministry of Works and
Urban development Specification or Appendix-C of Section-VII, Bid Document Volume-I.
Before construction activities can begin, the Contractor shall prepare and submit for review
a signed construction specification package for the project, containing all applicable
Divisions and Special Provisions in hard and softcopies to FDRE HOF & HOPR/The
Engineer. The signed specifications package shall also include individually signed and
sealed Technical Provisions for any and all work not addressed by Ministry of Works and
Urban development standard Specification or Appendix-C of Section-VII, Bid Document
Volume-I.
The Contractor must account for this review time in its schedule. Upon review and approval
by FDRE HOF & HOPR/The Engineer, the Construction Specification Package will be
stamped “Released for Construction” and initialed and dated by the reviewer.
Measurement and Payment provisions of the construction specification shall be Lump sum
basis and shall be paid upon completion of each of the work items pursuant to the payment
schedule indicated under Appendix-C of Section-VII, Bid Document Volume-I.
60
(ii) Plans and Working Drawings

A. Contractor is responsible for the design and will be required to provide project Design
Documents to FDRE HOF & HOPR/The Engineer for review and approval.
B. The Contractor shall construct the Project in accordance with the Released construction
Documents.
C .Keep one full set of the Released construction documents on the project site during
construction duration.
D. Reviews, inspections, tests, and approvals conducted by FDRE HOF & HOPR/The
Engineer and others acceptance/approval will not absolve the Contractor‟s obligation under
the contract of the materials or Work reviewed, tested, or inspected. FDRE HOF &
HOPR/The Engineer may reject or accept any Work or materials, request changes, and/or
identify additional Work that must be done to bring the project into compliance with contract
requirements at any time prior to the Final acceptance of the contract, whether or not FDRE
HOF & HOPR/The Engineer or any such Persons conducted pervious reviews inspections,
tests, or approvals. The Contractor shall not be relived of obligations to perform the Work in
accordance with the contract Documents or any of its obligations, by reviews, tests,
inspections, or approvals performed by any Persons, or by any failure of any Person to take
such action.
E. Shop and working drawings for permanent work shall include structural steel fabrications,
expansion joint fabrications, anchor bolt layouts, shop details, erection plans, equipment
lists, and any other information and details as required to adequately control the Work.
Shop and working drawings shall be reviewed and approved by the The Engineers who
approved the Project Design Documents. Work shall not be performed or materials ordered
until working drawings for such work, or changes thereto, are approved. Such approval shall
not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the successful completion of the Work.
F. the Contractor shall be responsible for agreement of dimensions and details as well as
for conformity of his working drawings with the contract. The Contractor shall indicate all
deviations from the contract and shall also itemize and explain all deviations in the letter of
transmittal.
G. Upon receipt of an approved copy of the shop working drawings, the Contractor shall
furnish to FDRE HOF & HOPR/The Engineer.
1. Two approved sets of prints
2. An electronic file that is viewable and printable with FDRE HOF & HOPR/The Engineer
hardware and software.
61
(iii) Conformity with Contract and Contractor’s Plans and

Specifications
A. Perform Work and furnish materials to meet contract requirements, including the
requirements established in the “Released for Construction” Design Documents.
B. When Work fails to meet the Contract requirements but is adequate to serve the
Work‟s intended purpose, FDRE HOF & HOPR/The Engineer will decide the extent to which
the Works will be accepted and remain in place. The FDRE HOF & HOPR/The Engineer will
document the basis of acceptance by change Order and adjust payment.
C. Remove, replace, or correct Work at the Contractor‟s expense when a work item does
not meet specified requirements and results in work inadequate to serve the design
purpose.
6.6 Quality Assurance/Quality Control (QA/QC)
Contractor shall submit its QA/QC plan to FDRE HOF & HOPR for review and approval at
the meeting held after Date of Commencement. Along with QA/QC plan submittal, the
quality assurance Manager (QAM) shall provide a presentation of the QA/QC plan for both
design and construction utilizing project related scenarios.
6.6.1 Design Quality Management Plan
The Contractor is responsible for design quality. The QAM, assigned by the Contractor,
shall be responsible for overall management of the QA/QC programs for design. This
individual, who shall report directly to the Contractor‟s Project manager, is essentially
responsible for all of the design QA activities. The QAM shall maintain close communication
with the Contractor‟s Project Manager and shall ensure the Project is completed in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The QAM shall perform all
of the design oversight reviews. FDRE HOF & HOPR and the FDRE HOF & HOPR‟s
representative will participate in these reviews. Under this procedure, the QAM will provide
FDRE HOF & HOPR with draft design plan for review and approval to confirm that the
design work complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents prior to initiation of
construction activities on the Project.
Plans to be reviewed shall be submitted to FDRE HOF & HOPR‟s Project Manager/The
Engineer who will review and approve the plans. FDRE HOF & HOPR shall have the right to
review and comment on all Draft Plans and Specifications and Special Provisions for
compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and Reference Documents.
The Contractor shall be responsible to satisfy all such requirements and acknowledge that
FDRE HOF & HOPR will have the right to disapprove any design approach that it is not in
62
compliance with the requirements of the Contract documents and Referenced.
The Contractor shall revise and modify all draft design plans so as to fully reflect all
comments and shall deliver to FDRE HOF & HOPR‟s Project Manager, the revised
submittal, who will distribute plans to appropriate FDRE HOF & HOPR staff for review and
comments. Final plans are to be submitted to FDRE HOF & HOPR for review and approval
by the The Engineer prior to the construction of the element. The time frame for plan review
and approval shall be in accordance with the requirement of the Contract Documents.
6.6.2 Construction Quality Management Plan (CQMP)
By way of complying with the requirements of the Standard Specification the contractor
shall develop a Quality Control System which shall be described in a Quality Control Manual
(QCM). This shall be presented in draft in four (4) copies, two (2) to FDRE HOF &
HOPRand two (2) to the Supervisor, for review and comment during the mobilization period.
The contractor shall modify the QCM if required and submit controlled copies of the final
document for the use of FDRE HOF & HOPRand the Supervisor also in four (4) plus two (2)
copies. The QCM shall be in a suitable binding approved by the Supervisor so that the QCM
can be updated from time to time on approval by the Supervisor.
The Quality Control Manual shall include inter alia:
 The Contractor‟s general approach in providing a Quality Control System.

 The QC organization with details of staffing and interrelationships and
responsibilities within the contractor‟s organization and with the Supervisor.
 A detailed description of the request system for checking completed works and for
the inspection of elements when required prior to performing works.
 Methods and frequency of testing for all elements of the works.
 Reporting procedures.
 Procedures for rectifying deficiencies identified.
 Standard Formats proposed for use in the system with a description of how they are
to be used during the project.
 Software proposed for use in maintaining system records and reporting. Where the
contractor proposes software for use in the system copies must be provided for the
free use of both FDRE HOF & HOPRand the Supervisor.
The methods of reporting and any standard formats proposed must be compatible with the
inputs required by FDRE HOF & HOPR‟s record system. The QC Manual must be in
conformance with the requirements of the Standard Specification and any Special
Provisions.
63
6.7 Environmental
6.7.1 General
The Design-Builder shall first try to avoid impacts to environmental resources, the
community, and historic, cultural, and archaeological resources. If impacts are unavoidable,
the Design-Builder shall make every effort to minimize the unavoidable impacts.
The Design-Builder shall foster good relationships with federal, the city administration, and
local agencies, and local stakeholders by ensuring that the commitments the Employer has
made are reflected in the project‟s final design and fulfilled during construction. The Design-
Builder shall accomplish this by meeting or exceeding all environmental requirements listed
in the contract. The Design-Builder shall comply with all federal, city administration and local
laws, regulations, and ordinances (throughout this chapter referred to as regulations) and
receive no violations in law.
6.7.2 Mandatory Standards
Implement the environmental commitments of the FDRE HOF & HOPR Head Quarter
Building Project in accordance with the relevant environmental regulations as well as the
requirements of the standards and publications.
6.7.3 Performance Requirements
The Design-Builder shall prepare and implement an Environmental Compliance and

Monitoring Plan, which shall be incorporated in the Quality Management Plan that identifies
key personnel roles and responsibilities, identifies procedures for environmental
compliance, establishes procedures for identifying and correcting non-compliance and
establishes procedures for emergency response.
The Environmental Compliance Plan shall include the following plus others deemed
appropriate by the Design-Builder in order to achieve environmental compliance:
1. Commitment Implementation
2. Environmental Plans and Strategies
The Design-Builder shall comply with all applicable Laws. The Design-Builder is responsible
for Environmental Assessment re-evaluation required for the proposed Work. The Design-
Builder shall submit to the Employer copies of all environmental reports.
64
6.7.4 Design and Construction Criteria (Commitments)
Landscape Preservation
(a) General
The Contractor shall exercise care to preserve the natural landscape and shall conduct his
construction operations so as to prevent any unnecessary destruction, scarring, or defacing
of the natural surroundings the vicinity of the work. Except where clearing is required for
permanent works, approved construction buildings, site and infrastructure works; all trees,
shall be preserved and shall be protected from damage by the Contractor's construction
operations and equipment.
All unnecessary destruction, scarring, damage, or defacing of the landscape resulting from
the Contractor's activities shall be reinstated, replanted, reseeded or otherwise corrected as
directed by the Engineer.
(b) Haul Roads/Routes
The location and alignment of haul roads/routes shall be subject to the approval of the The
Engineer. When no longer required these roads shall, if required by the The Engineer, be
restored to the original condition.
(c) Contractor’s Facilities
Workshop, office, storage and plant areas shall be located and arranged in a manner that
will preserve trees to the maximum practicable. On abandonment, all temporary buildings,
including concrete footings and slabs, and all construction materials and debris shall be
removed from the site and disposed of to the satisfaction of the The Engineer. The area
shall be re-graded, as required to provide for proper drainage, and prevent erosion.
(d) Blasting Precautions
In addition to Daily requirements of local regulations, the Contractor shall adopt precautions
when using explosives, which will prevent scattering of rocks, stumps, or other debris
outside the work area, and prevent damage to surrounding buildings and other properties.
(d) Quarries, Borrow Pits, Plant and Storage Areas etc.
When they are no longer required, all quarry sites, borrow pits and areas used for the
disposal or storage of surplus materials and concrete plants, shall be reinstated by
landscaping including the replacement and spreading of topsoil as directed by and to the
satisfaction of the The Engineer.
65
Temporary Flood Control

(a) General
These Works shall consist of temporary control measures to control flood and water
pollution by use of erosion control devices or methods.
(b) Construction
A schedule of proposed temporary (and permanent) flood control works shall be developed
by the Contractor at the commencement of the Contract, in consultation with the The
Engineer and to his satisfaction.
Preservation of Trees and Shrubbery
(a) Preservation
All trees and shrubbery which are not specifically required to be cleared or removed for
construction purposes shall be preserved and shall be protected from any damage that may
be caused by the Contractor's construction operations and equipment. The removal of trees
or shrubs will be permitted only after prior approval by the The Engineer.
The layout of the Contractor's construction facilities such as workshops, warehouses,
storage areas, and parking areas; location of access and haul routes; and operation in
borrow and spoil areas shall be planned and conducted in such manner that all trees and
shrubbery not approved for removal by the The Engineer shall be preserved and adequately
protected from either direct or indirect damage by the Contractor's operations.
(b) Replacement
Trees or shrubs that, in the opinion of the The Engineer, are beyond saving shall be
removed and replaced early in the next planting season. The replacement shall be of the
same species, or other approved species, and of the maximum size that is practicable to
plant and sustain growth in the particular environment. Replacement trees and shrubs shall
be stayed, watered, and maintained for a period of one year. Any replacement tree or shrub
that dies shall be removed and replaced, as directed by the The Engineer, with such
replacements being maintained for a period of one year from the date of replacement.
Prevention of Water Pollution

(a) General
The Contractor's construction activities shall be performed by methods that will prevent the
entry, or accidental spillage, of solid matter, contaminants, debris, and other pollutants and
wastes into underground water sources. Such pollutants and wastes include, but are not
restricted to, refuse, garbage, cement, concrete, sanitary waste, industrial waste,
radioactive substances, oil and other petroleum products, aggregate processing tailings,
mineral salts and thermal pollution. Wastewater from aggregate processing, concrete
batching, or other construction operations shall not enter surface waters without the use of
turbidity control methods. Any such wastewater discharged into surface waters shall contain
the least concentration of settle able material possible. For the purpose of this
Specification, settle able material is defined as that material which will settle from the water
by gravity during a one hour quiescent detention period.
66
(b) Compliance with Laws and Regulations
The Contractor shall comply with all applicable Ethiopian laws, orders, regulations, and
water quality standards concerning the control and abatement of water pollution.
Abatement of Air, Dust, Noise and Light Pollution

(a) Abatement of Air Pollution
The Contractor shall comply with applicable Ethiopian laws and regulations concerning the
prevention and control of air pollution. Notwithstanding the above in conduct of construction
activities and operation of equipment, the Contractor shall utilize methods and devices as
are, reasonably available to control, prevent, and otherwise minimize emissions or
discharges of air contaminants.
The emission of dust into the atmosphere shall be strictly controlled during the production,
handling, and storage of concrete and aggregates, and the Contractor shall use such
methods and equipment as are necessary for the collection and disposal, or prevention, of
dust during these operations. The Contractor‟s methods of storing and handling cement and
pozzolans shall also include means of eliminating atmospheric discharges of dust.
Equipment and vehicles that show excessive emissions of exhaust gases due to poor
engine adjustments, or other inefficient operating conditions, shall not be operated until
corrective repairs or adjustments are made.
Burning of materials resulting from clearing of trees and brush, combustible construction
materials, and rubbish will be permitted only when atmospheric conditions for burning are
considered favorable and when authorized by the The Engineer. In lieu of burning, such
combustible materials may be disposed of by other methods. Where open burning is
permitted, the burn piles shall be properly constructed to minimize smoke, and in no case
shall unapproved materials, such as tiers, plastics, rubber products, asphalt products, or
other materials that create heavy black smoke or nuisance odors, be burned.
(b) Dust Abatement
During the performance of the work required by this Specification or any operations
appurtenant thereto, whether within the site and in the surrounding provided by the
Contracting entity or elsewhere, the Contractor shall furnish all the labor, equipment,
materials, and means required, and shall carry out proper and efficient measure, wherever
and as often as necessary to reduce the dust nuisance, and to prevent dust which has
originated from his operations from damaging dwellings, or causing a nuisance to persons.
The Contractor will be held liable for any damage resulting from dust originating from his
operations under this Specification on the site or elsewhere. 'The The Engineer may direct
sprinkling or other measures for dust abatement if necessary to obtain adequate control.
(c) Noise Abatement
The Contractor shall comply with applicable Ethiopian laws, orders, and regulations
concerning the prevention, control, and abatement of excessive noise.
Blasting, the use of jack hammers, rock crushing, or other operations producing high
intensity impact noise may be performed at appropriate time as approved by the The
Engineer.
67
Cleanup and Disposal of Waste Materials

(a) Cleanup
The Contractor shall, at all times, keep the construction area, including storage areas used,
free from accumulations of waste materials or rubbish.
All waste water and sewage from office, and camps shall be piped to municipality sewer
line, soak pits or other disposal areas constructed in accordance with local regulations, and,
where and when such regulations require it, the Contractor shall obtain a permit or other
appropriate documentation approving the disposal methods being used.
All used fuels, oils, other plant or vehicle fluids, and old tiers and tubes shall be collected to
a central disposal point, on a regular basis and disposed of as specified below.
All offices, workshops and other solid waste shall be collected to a central disposal area, on
a daily basis and disposed of in a manner approved by the The Engineer.
Servicing of plant, equipment and vehicles shall, whenever possible, be carried out at a
workshop area. This workshop area shall be equipped with secure storage areas for fuels,
oils and other fluids constructed in such a way as to contain any spillages which may occur,
and similar storage where used fluids can be stored securely prior to their disposal.
When the servicing of plant, equipment and vehicles is carried out away from the workshop
area it shall be done at locations and in such a manner as to avoid spillage and
contamination of drainage courses. Any spillages shall be cleaned up by either burning in
place or collecting the contaminated soils and burning them at the central disposal area, all
to the satisfaction of the The Engineer.
Prior to completion of the work, the Contractor shall remove from the vicinity of the work all
plant facilities, temporary buildings, rubbish, unused materials, concrete formworks, and
other similar material, belonging to him or used under his direction during construction, All
work areas shall be graded and left in a neat manner conforming to the natural appearance
of the landscape.
Any residue deposited on the ground from washing out transit mix trucks or any similar
concrete operations shall be buried or cleaned up in a manner acceptable to the The
Engineer.
In the event of the Contractor's failure to perform the above work, the work may be
performed by the Contracting entity, at the expense of the Contractor and his sureties shall
be liable thereof.
(b) Disposal of Waste Material
Waste materials including, but not restricted to, refuse, garbage, sanitary wastes, industrial
wastes, and oil and other petroleum products, shall be disposed of by the Contractor.
Disposal of combustible materials shall be by burying, where burial of such materials is
approved by the The Engineer; by burning, where burning of approved materials is
68
permitted; or by removal from the construction area. Disposal of non-combustible materials

shall be by burying, where burial of such materials is approved by the The Engineer, or by
removal from the construction area. Waste materials removed from the construction area
shall be dumped at an approved dump.
(c) Disposal of Material by Burying
Only materials approved by the The Engineer may be buried. Burial shall be in pits and the
location, size and depth of which shall be approved by the The Engineer. The pits shall be
covered by at least 600mm of earth material prior to abandonment.
(d) Disposal of Material by Burning
All materials to be burned shall be piled in designated burning areas in such a manner as
will cause the least fire hazards. Burning shall be thorough and complete and all charred
pieces remaining after burning, except for scattered small pieces, shall be removed from the
construction area and disposed of as otherwise provided in this Section.
The Contractor shall, at all times, take special precautions to prevent fire from spreading
beyond the piles being burned and shall be liable for any damage caused by his burning
operations. The Contractor shall have available, at all times, suitable equipment and
supplies for use in preventing and suppressing fires and shall be subject to all laws and
regulations locally applicable for pre-suppression, suppression, and prevention of fires.
(e) Disposal of Material by Removal
Material to be disposed of by removal from the construction area shall be removed from the
area prior to the completion of the work under the Contract.
Materials to be disposed of by dumping shall be hauled to an approved dump. It shall be
the responsibility of the Contractor to make any necessary arrangements with private
parties and with local officials pertinent to locations and regulations of such dumping.
6.6.5 Submittals
Submit the following information and documentation, at a minimum, to the Employer:
1. Environmental Compliance Plan

2. Environmental Construction Monitoring Reports
3. Temporary Flood Control Plan
69
6.8 General STD and HIV/AIDS and FIRST AID (PHC)

(a) Scope
The General STD and HIV/AIDS alleviation measure to be undertaken by the Contractor is
to all the workers and the community in the surrounding area. For this purpose the
Contractor shall assign a specialist Sub-Contractor who can carry out the above services.
The experience and qualification of the sub-contractor shall be approved by the The
Engineer/ Client (FDRE HOF & HOPR) prior to assigning him to the Work.
1. The Contractor is expected to carry out knowledge Attitude and practice (KAP) on the
current status of HIV/AIDS epidemic in the project including the project influenced areas.
The target population of the project shall include all the workers and the community in the
project influenced area. Based on the KAP survey finding the Contractor shall revise the
action plan and implement after the approval of the client.
2. The Contractor shall prepare an action plan for the period of the service, management
and monitoring plans. A detailed plan shall be prepared to monitor the implementation of the
HIV/AIDS prevention and control activities and the impacts of the proposed project work
during construction and after completion. The Contractor should define a few indicators of
prevention and control performance activities that can be monitored on a regular basis and
also indicate the different eligible stakeholders in place to monitor the activities
3. The Contractor shall submit activity focused budget break down and result focused
proposal as well as to be ready to hand over activities to the target to assure sustainability.
4. The Contractor shall implement the STD and HIV/AIDS alleviation measures at the
project campsites and those communities in the project influenced area based on the
Government strategic plan.
5. The Contractor shall work on awareness raising activities, established train peer
educators & Anti - AIDS Committees based on the number of the beneficiaries.
6. The Contractor shall provide information, education and communication (IEC) campaign
about HIV/AIDS and STD to the project staff and the host communities at convenient
places, at least every two month. The Contractor shall also put posters, dispatches leaflets
and pamphlets. The pamphlets, leaflets and brochures shall be prepared in the respective
community language (i.e. widely spoken language) for easy communication and information
sharing. In occasions of IEC campaigns on HIV/AIDS to the project communities, the
Contractor shall take the opportunities to undertake sensitization of the community on
environment and safety and security issues to ensure sustainability.
70
7. The Contractor shall give Voluntary Counseling to the beneficiaries and establish
referral system with nearest Governmental and Non-Governmental health institutions and
shall pay for voluntary counseling and Testing Services and pay for treatment of
opportunistic infections.
8. The Contractor shall establish network with health institutions (local Government, NGOs,
Community Based Organizations, Faith Based Organization, Association, etc) working on
HIV/AIDS.
9. The Contractor shall make available at least 100 condoms per year for each members of
the construction staff and the host community. The condoms shall be of the male and
female types, which shall be provided in accordance with gender of the recipient .The
condoms shall comply with the respective current WHO/UN AIDS specification and
guidelines.
10. For care and support/nutritional supplement/not less than 200 birr per month for each
worker living with HIV/AIDS has to be included in the project action plan.
11. The Contractor, in collaboration with the Consultant, shall celebrate the „‟World
HIV/AIDS Day‟‟ on December 1 every year and prepare and incorporate all activities carried
out on this day in a monthly or quarterly report.
12. The Contractor shall prepare monthly and quarterly reports and submit to the The
Engineer and the client based on the format prepared by the client.
13. The Contractor shall closely work with the Consultant and client and shall liaise with the
representative of the Woreda Health Office and HAPCO.
14. The Contractor, as part of the contract, shall recruit a sociologist as a coordinator, a
nurse as a counselor and an animator who can speak the local language and deploy in the
field. The personnel shall have the following qualifications.
1. Sociologist
General Qualification
 A min. BA degree in Sociology/Social Anthropology
Adequacy for the assignment
71
 At least 2 years on HIV/AIDS prevention and control program

 Knowledge of Computer Application Software
 Fluency in English
2. Nurse
 A min. Diploma from Medical College
 At least 1 years on HIV/AIDS prevention and control program

3. Animator
 12 Grade Complete
 Experience on HIV/AIDS prevention and control program

 Fluency in Local Language
15. The Contractor, at the end of the project duration, shall hand over all accomplished and
started activities to the local health offices or other organizations working on same
procedurally.
6.9 Product Warranty Provisions

6.9.1 Introduction
The Employer requires warranties on construction items to help ensure both the initial and
long term quality of the project‟s products, workmanship, and materials.
72
6.9.2 Project Warranties

The Design-Builder must warranty the work in accordance with this scope of work. In
general, the warranties must remain in effect until ten years after issuance of taking over
Certificate (TOC) for any section or the entire project building as the case may be.
6.9.3 General Warranty

The Design-Builder warrants that:
 All design and works performed pursuant to the Contract Documents, including that
done by the Subcontractors and manufacturers, shall conform to all professional The
Engineer principles generally accepted as standards of the industry;
 The Project shall be free of defects, including design errors, omissions,
inconsistencies and other defects;
 Materials and equipment furnished under the Contract Documents shall be of good
quality and when installed shall be new;
 The Work shall meet all of the requirements of the Contract Documents;
 The specifications and/or drawings selected or prepared for use during construction
are appropriate for their intended use; and
 The Project shall be fit for use for the intended function.
6.9.4 Time of General Warranty

The General Warranty shall commence upon Physical Completion, without prejudice the
warranty stipulation under Article 3039 of the Ethiopian Civil Code. The General Warranty
shall remain in effect until ten years after the date of Physical Completion. If the Employer
determines that any of the Work has not met the standards set forth in this Section at any
time during the Warranty period for such Work, then the Design-Builder shall correct such
Work as specified below even if the performance of such correction Work extends beyond
the stated Warranty period. Within seven days of receipt by the Design-Builder of notice
from the Employer specifying a failure of any of the Work to satisfy the Design-Builder‟s
Warranties, or of any Subcontractor representation, Warranty, guarantee, or obligation
which the Design-Builder is responsible to enforce, the Design-Builder and the Employer
shall mutually agree when and how the Design-Builder shall remedy such violation,
provided, however, that in case of an emergency requiring immediate corrective action, the
Design-Builder shall implement such action as it deems necessary and shall notify the
Employer of the urgency of a decision. The Design-Builder and the Employer shall agree on
a remedy immediately upon notice by or to the Employer of such emergency.
If the Design-Builder does not use its best efforts to proceed to effectuate such remedy
within the agreed time, or if the Design-Builder and the Employer fail to reach such an
agreement within such seven-day period (or immediately, in the case of emergency
conditions), then the Employer upon notice to the Design-Builder, shall have the right to
order the Design-Builder to perform the work or to perform or have performed by third
parties as necessary the Employer approved remedy, and the costs thereof shall be borne
73
by the Design-Builder.
6.9.5 General Warranty - Performance Responsibility
The Design-Builder retains responsibility for all Work performed on the Project, including all
Work of Subcontractors and all Materials and Equipment provided by suppliers, vendors
and/or manufacturers. Upon receipt from the Employer of notice of a failure of any of the
Work, the Design-Builder shall be responsible for enforcing or performing any Warranty,
guarantee, or obligation, in addition to the Design-Builder‟s other obligations hereunder. The
Employer‟s rights under this Section shall commence at the time such representation;
Warranty, guarantee, or obligation is furnished and shall continue until the expiration of the
Design-Builder‟s relevant Warranty (including extensions for redone Work). Until such
expiration, the cost of any Equipment, Material, labor (including re-engineering), and/or
shipping shall be for the account of the Design-Builder if such cost is covered by such a
Warranty, and the Design-Builder shall be required to replace or repair defective
Equipment, Material, or workmanship furnished by Subcontractors.
6.9.6 Extension of General Warranty
The Design-Builder‟s Warranties shall apply to all Work re-done pursuant to the terms of
this Contract. The Design-Builder‟s Warranty for repaired or replaced elements of the Work
shall extend beyond the original Warranty period if necessary to provide a two year
Warranty period following acceptance for any repaired or replaced Work.
6.9.7 Damages for Breach of Warranty
In addition to all rights and remedies available under the Contract Documents or applicable
law, if the Design-Builder fails or refuses to provide the Warranty remedy described in this
Section, notwithstanding a valid request by the Employer, the Design-Builder shall be liable
for the cost of performance of the Warranty work by others.
6.9.8 General Warranty – No Limitations of Liability
The foregoing Warranties are in addition to all rights and remedies available under the
Contract Documents or applicable law, and shall not limit the Design-Builder‟s liability or
responsibility imposed by the Contract Documents or applicable law with respect to the
Work, including liability for design defects, latent construction defects, strict liability
negligence, or fraud provided.
6.9.9 Warranty Bond and Pledge
Amount and Term: The Design-Builder must furnish a single -term warranty before the
date of issuance of taking over Certificate (TOC) for any part or the entire project as the
case may be. The warranty pledge will be released at Final Warranty Acceptance or after all
warranty work has been completed, whichever is latest.
74
6.9.10 Warranty Performance Requirements
In addition to the Warranty provisions of this Section, Project components shall meet the
specific performance requirements specified in the Contract Documents.
6.9.11 Costs of Correction of Work
All costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections, shall
be deemed to be covered by the Design-Builder.
6.9.12 Disputes
Any disagreement between the Employer and Design-Builder relating to this Section shall
be subject to the dispute resolution provisions, provided that Design-Builder shall proceed
as directed by the Employer pending resolution of the dispute.
6.9.13 Mandatory Standards
Conflicts and Priority: -If there is any conflict in standards, adhere to the standard with the
highest priority. However, if the Design-Builder‟s Proposal has a higher standard than any of
the listed standards, adhere to the Design-Builders Proposal standard.
Ambiguity: If there is any unresolved ambiguity in standards; obtain clarification from the
Employer before proceeding with design or construction, the Design-Builder shall request
clarification of any ambiguity or conflict contained in these mandatory standards from the
Employer. Employer‟s interpretation and decision shall be final.
Version and Date: Use the most current version of each standard as of the initial
publication date of this contract unless modified by change order.
6.9.14 Performance
The parameters that will be used by the Employer to evaluate performance of all
constructed parts of the building and material quality will be measured and evaluated by the
Employer on an as needed basis during the warranty period.
At least 60 calendar days prior to the expiration of the warranty or at any time deemed
necessary by the Employer, the Employer will notify the Design-Builder in writing if any part
of the work defect from the criteria.
Within 45 calendar days of receiving notice, the Design-Builder shall commence to

undertake the warranty work, submit a plan for completing the work. If the Design-Builder
75
fails to undertake warranty work within 45 calendar days after receiving written notice from
the Employer, the Employer will complete the warranty work or contract to have it
completed and the Design-Builder shall be responsible for the total cost of the warranty
work.
All repair, maintenance, and warranty work performed as part of this warranty provision
shall be covered by the warranty provision for the remainder of the warranty term.
During the warranty period, the warranty work shall be performed at no cost to the
Employer. Maintenance (elective and preventative action) work that the Design-Builder
elects to perform during the warranty period shall be at no cost to the Employer. If corrective
action needs to be taken, the Design-Builder shall coordinate all such activities to minimize
disruption of other work items and shall be approved by the Employer.
6.9.15 Material Quality
Material quality shall be evaluated prior to and during construction through the Design-
Builder‟s approved Quality Management Plan. Materials specified in the design and meeting
the requirements outlined in the Standard Specifications shall be evaluated to meet or
exceed requirements. Materials not meeting these specifications shall be removed
immediately and replaced with acceptable material.
6.10 Submittals by the Contractor
During the construction of the Project, the Contractor shall timely submit the reports to the
Employers Representative in hard and soft copies with compatible software. A minimum of
three original hard and two soft/CD copies of the following reports shall be submitted to the
Employers Representative, via which the Employer gets the reports.
 Monthly and quarterly progress and site activity reports
 Annual progress reports
 Final report before provisional acceptance on disciplines of Design and Construction
works.
 The provisional and commissioning acceptance report
 Special reports as required by the Panel of Employer, if necessary
 Project Final completion report
Monthly progress and site activity Reports
Monthly and Quarterly Reports by the Contractor will be submitted to the Consultant, where
it will be checked and reviewed for the Consultant‟s approval, and will be submitted to the
Owner on the 5th day of every month stating progress of the previous month.
The monthly and quarterly progress reports which shall be checked, commented and
76
verified by the Consultant before submittal to the Employer will be as follow:
A1. Civil Works Section

1. Progress in work
2. Current status narrative report
3. Upcoming and planned construction activities
4. Status assessment of Construction Schedule
5. Manpower on site and Home Office
6. Major equipment on site and in factory
7. Material & equipment delivered to site for permanent works
8. Special events having impacts on schedule and costs and precautions to be taken
9. Status of Claims, if any
10. Weather report
11. Site and factory digital photographs
12. Miscellaneous
A2. MEP Section

Similar with the reporting details for civil works stipulated in A1 above including reports on
design, procurement and manufacturing status of MEP Equipment.
A4. Reporting by the Contractor’s Designer

This part of the report will describe the progress in production of designs and drawings with
indication of their status as: - "Preparation" or "Submitted on...”, "Under examination by the
Consultant", or "Reviewed by the Consultant on...." etc.
77
Annex A - Architectural Design references and finishing

schedule
 Special considerations with respect to ease of construction and facilities planning

and organization
 Considerations of accessibility for all type of users especially that of the
physically challenged
 Special respect paid to its historic surrounding but at the same time reflecting the
prevailing 21st century contemporary architecture
 Sensitivity with respect to resonance of quality, durability and civic importance of
which the Ethiopian people can be proud of
 Promoting pedestrian movement rather than vehicular – produce an environment
in which there is considerably less intrusion from through traffic
 The building must reflect the opposing requirements of openness and security
 Facilities planning
②Surrounding environment
Plan for minimal sound, light /natural or artificial/ and wave interference in the
area especially in the area where the chambers are located
③Vehicle ingress locations
Keep surface vehicular parking to a minimum and maximize open spaces
④Provisions for Authorized persons’ vehicle parking areas
Plan for the VIP and guest parking areas When planning, give due consideration to
the movements of vehicles belonging to officials requiring maximum security
⑤Landscaping plan
The overall plan shall have a “green” or environmentally friendly aspect.
Additionally, if a perimeter fence or similar is required for facilities management,
this fence must be planned with respect to the overall management plan of the site.
The design of the complex should possess a particular public dimension operating
on mutual grounds with the required high level security. The building should
contribute constructively towards the formation of the public realm within its
sphere of influence in its very urban presence and symbolism of the Ethiopian
nation as a rapidly developing democratic society.
 When designing the Ethiopian New Parliament Building, endeavour for a

rational and functional design so as to plan a facility that can be maintained
78
and managed efficiently. The plans should also be considerate to the global
environment in terms of effective use of energy and resources, and give
adequate consideration to lifecycle cost and the surrounding environment.
 Plan the scale, structure, various facility and location etc. so as to satisfy
Ergonometric and Anthropometric standards.
 The main halls (HoPR and HoF) should be centrally and comfortably designed
 Floor area
Allow ample space for the building’s required rooms and for communal spaces
such as the public spaces and circulation routes.
 Facility plan:
- Plan for giving due consideration to the ascertainment of usage efficiency,
maintenance ease and durability/sustainability, as well as lifecycle cost. While
introducing advanced devices and systems that are energy efficient, resource
and environmentally friendly, ensure that these are adaptable to future
changes and are easy to instigate a renewal of.
- Plan both the lighting and acoustic facility so as to reduce the inconvenience
in use of the meeting halls, to the maximum extent possible.
- Provide information and telecommunications facilities that will be able to
accommodate progress in multimedia, and furthermore plan them so that news
media personnel will be provided with high quality support functions.
- In respect of management, to the extent possible formulate a unified system
for communications, observation and emergency and security centers etc.
- Water supply, drainage and sanitary facility:
o Plan water and hot water supply facility so that it ensures delivery of
the necessary water flows and water quality. Drainage shall be split-
flow type, drain via natural flows to the maximum extent possible, and
be connected to the public sewers.
o The scale of toilets etc. should be sufficient to cater for expected usage
levels during peak hours and should be appropriately located so that all
people, including disabled people and senior citizens, find them easy
to use.
- Elevator facility
Elevator facilities should have capacity matching their usage purpose and
should be easy for everybody, including disabled people and senior citizens,
to use safely. Also, in addition to elevators, for principal circulation routes
plan slopes that are easy for anyone to utilize.
79
- Advanced technology
Plan for incorporation of the advanced technology listed below. Utilization of
such advanced technology should give due consideration to maintenance and
management and to energy efficiency.
a. Technology that is able to reduce the noise pollution

Make innovations in the facility’s structure and materials, and adopt
appropriate design approaches, in order to reduce the noise interference
b. Building Management System

Use innovative technological means to strategize multi-disciplinary
management aspects of the building
c. Technology that provides for a comfortable working and user environment
d. Other
Bidders are invited to incorporate advanced technology other than that
mentioned above into their designs.
SPACE REQUIREMENTS AND USES
This section of the brief is provided to inform the designer of the various spatial elements, which will
form the Parliament building. The uses have been grouped to reflect the adjacencies of rooms and the
interaction of political and service functions in the building.
The main halls (HoF and HoPR halls) and the Committee Rooms will be the main focus of the
Parliament's work, supported by Members' Rooms, Press and Broadcasting facilities and public visitor
areas. The interaction of all these spaces is crucial in achieving the aim of transparency in an open
government.
In addition to the areas accommodated in the design, Plant rooms, ducts, IT equipment, switch rooms,
toilets and other utility rooms are to be provided to meet the building and occupational requirements.
The building will be used by the Ethiopian government as the new parliament of Ethiopia; Members of
the Ethiopian Parliament; staff providing a wide spectrum of services in the operation of the Parliament
and the building; constituents visiting their Members of Parliament; the public who are interested in the
Parliament and school children as part of a democratic educational process.
The building design may reflect the many activities and uses which it will provide but should also make a
cohesive statement as a natural symbol of democracy in Ethiopia.
80
Main Entrances and Reception Area
Main entrance areas should provide a light, attractive and welcoming approach to the building using
good quality materials with hardwearing low maintenance floors and attractive yet durable wall finishes.
Ceilings should be good quality feature types with effect lighting incorporated as an integral part of the
design. High quality doormats should be provided in entrance lobbies.
Doormats can cause problems for disabled people both by their texture and position. Specification should
be such that they are fully accessible for disabled people. Where the separate MP’s, staff and public
entrances are provided, consideration should be given to the design of the individual entrances. A more
restrained approach could be used at the MP’s and staff entrance, with the over-riding priority being the
safety and security of the MP’s and staff.
The public entrances in this type of building require a more robust approach to the design philosophy.
The entrance area especially should provide hard, easily cleaned and vandal resistant finishes while still
providing an attractive ambience.
It should be noted that hard surfaces and open spaces generally cause poor acoustic conditions, and the
requirements of disabled people should be taken into account when specifying finishes.
Main Circulation Stairs
Main staircases and lift halls shall be designed to reflect the philosophy of the main entrance and have a
high quality of finish.
Secondary staircases where used for circulation should be designed to a similar standard, and fire escape
stairs should be provided with plastered, painted walls and vinyl flooring with non-slip nosings as a
minimum standard.
Escape stairs should not utilize open risers. Balustrades should use infill panels or rails with the gap
between rails no greater than 100mm in the public areas.
Due consideration should be given in the design of stairs for the requirements of disabled people, with
refuges, tactile finishes and suitable colors.
Conference, Meeting and Committee Rooms
Conference rooms, etc should be in areas convenient for access from main access areas. Care should be
taken in reducing nuisance to the users from noise and solar gain. These rooms should have emergency
call buttons linked to the Security Control Room. The indicator in the Control Room should identify the
particular room.
The design of the rooms should result in a quiet, well-proportioned environment with finishes
sympathetic to the proposed use.
A higher level of finish is required in all of these rooms except the Meeting Rooms, which are generally
in office areas.
Double doors are the preferred means of entry, with at least one leaf 900 mm wide for Disabled Access.
81
It should be assumed that overhead projectors and audio/visual presentation facilities will be used, and
provision should be made for their use including black out blinds or curtains and containment systems for
wiring in all Conference and Committee Rooms. The Committee Rooms should be equipped with
facilities to allow the proceedings to be recorded by audio, transcription and video.
Dimmer switches should be provided to enable adjustment of the room lighting levels.
Care must be taken to ensure fresh air ventilation provisions are suitable for the proposed occupation
density. Necessary mechanical ventilation and cooling should be incorporated where needed.
Stores
Where stores are provided care must be exercised in the design to ensure that the floor loadings are
adequate, and that access doors are sized to permit the passage of goods trolleys if required.
Lighting layouts must take into account proposed racking/shelving layouts to ensure that passages
between units are adequately lit.
Fire protection, fire detection and security requirements must be appropriate for the type/value of goods
stored. Internal environment must be suitable for the type of goods to be stored (e.g., temperature,
humidity, ventilation needs, etc.).
Staff Toilets
Male and female staff toilets should be provided on all occupied floor levels and the design should
provide an attractive integrated environment, capable of being varied in appearance at intervals and with
finishes which are hard wearing, hygienic, attractive and easily maintained.
Facilities for disabled people should be part of the general toilet accommodation and be accessible from
all parts of the staff area. Toilets should be alternate left and right hand transfer, located adjacent to the
standard provisions and no greater than 80m apart.
Where false ceilings are provided these should be modular suspended ceilings suitable for use in damp
conditions. Toilets shall be effectively ventilated by incorporating mechanical ventilation systems that
are independent of other systems.
Cubicles should complement the walls finishes and be no less than 2.0m in height and raised 150mm
from the floor for ease of cleaning; minimum width 900mm.
Sanitary accommodation should be provided on the basis of 50% male staff: 50% female staff. WC
suites, wash-hand basins, urinal bowls and modesty divisions should be of good quality vitreous china.
The preferred method of sanitary towel disposal is by bin service that will be arranged by the client.
Consideration should be given to the appropriate positioning of soap and roller towel dispensers.
Unless referred, where toilets are designated for particular groups, the following general provision shall
be made:
WC’s WHB’s Shower Urinals
Male 1/20 1/15 1/40 1/15

82
Female 1/15 1/15 1/40
Public Toilets
Where toilets are provided for the public, the provision is to be as the brief with separately accessed
unisex disabled person's compartments.
Public toilets should be located in a supervised area with the facilities designed to be vandal resistant,
with hard impervious floor and wall finishes resistant to damage and graffiti.
Toilet fittings, sundries and lighting fitments should also be as vandal resistant as possible and
consideration should be given to concealing flushing cisterns. Locks are to be provided to the entrance
doors.
[Lounge and Break Areas]
Restaurants, Kitchens
The location of these facilities should complement with, structural design, service requirements, health
and safety provisions, arrangements for deliveries/disposals, etc. Any catering facilities for public or
Press must be wholly self-contained within the public area and cannot share facilities with Members/staff
restaurants/bar (such as kitchens and washing up facilities) which would allow potential access to
controlled areas.
All accommodation should be designed as a modern unit providing a good working environment for the
kitchen staff and quality dining areas complete with furnishings and fittings.
The kitchen facilities should be carefully sited to ensure minimum impact on the environment while
remaining easily accessible, both for staff and deliveries. Kitchen facilities are major energy consumers
and designers should therefore incorporate measures to reduce energy consumption.
Fly screens should be provided to all windows in kitchen and food preparation/storage areas. Fly screens
should also be provided on the air intakes and exhausts of ventilation systems.
Trolley standing areas should be located within the kitchen and wash-up areas and not in restaurants.
A means of water supply should be provided within the restaurant together with means of water/electrical
services for drinks dispensers.
Smoking Rooms
Smoking is not likely to be permitted in the building generally or in staff/mess rooms. Separate smoking
facilities are therefore required.
Smoking rooms should be appropriately sized and should be provided with suitably sized 100% fresh air
mechanical ventilation and a dedicated extract system, whose discharge shall be located to prevent re-
entrainment by air intakes.
First Aid Accommodation
First Aid accommodation should have the following in Each room:
83
- A separate WC compartment, wash-hand basin with hot, cold and drinking services with wrist
action taps, mirror, paper towels, bin, etc.
- Local light switching and inspection lamp.
- Space to accommodate a bed, stretcher, cabinet and table.
- Visual/audible alarm activated by a floor-length pull-cord, sounding in Security where staff can
register the alarm.
Shower Room
Shower rooms will be unisex and suitable for disabled people.
Shower rooms will be provided with non-slip floor finishes, fully tiled walls to shower areas,
thermostatic shower mixing valves with adjustable height spray outlets, seating and shower curtains, with
finishes suitable for a humid environment.
Cleaner’s Room
Cleaners’ rooms should preferably be provided on each floor of the building.
The rooms should be adequately sized for the purpose, and contain a bucket sink complete with grating,
hot and cold water supplies, side drainer/laying space and adequate storage shelving.
The floor shall be hard impervious material with a coved skirting in matching material. Walls will be
tiled around the sink area, and the preference is for tiling
Door locks capable of being easily opened from the outside in case of emergency throughout the room to
1500mm above floor level.
Plant, Switch and Lift Motor Rooms, and Service Units
Plant areas and switch-rooms should be sufficient in scale to enable easy and safe access to equipment
for inspection and maintenance and to facilitate the removal/replacement of plant components.
Access to plant and switch-rooms should be restricted to authorized persons only and exit doors should
have panic latches. Plant, switch-rooms and IT rooms must be lockable.
Access arrangements must permit the removal of the largest and heaviest items of plant without the need
for dismantling, except where the plant design specifically provides for a large component to be broken
down into smaller parts (e.g., sectional air handling plant).
Plant and switch-rooms shall be adequately lit, including emergency lighting, and ventilated to provide a
safe working environment. Ventilation provisions should be sufficient to avoid excessive heat build-up
and provide sufficient combustion and ventilation air in boiler rooms.
The detailed arrangements shall provide for, drainage gullies in plant-rooms housing water services,
arranged to prevent loss of water-seal or with a trap replenishment system; provide adequate socket
outlets with ELV/RCD protection; site air intakes well away from sources of airborne containment's;
provide noise and vibration attenuation as necessary to ensure a satisfactory environment in adjacent
areas and external to the building.
Primary plant such as boilers, chillers, generators, substations have to be located wherever possible, but
84
not above IT rooms or equipment. IT systems in the form of space for vertical risers and IT cupboards
located one above the other on multi-storey developments.
All lift machine rooms, shaft sizes and other facilities should comply with the requirements and the mass
of the occupants. Lift machine rooms will contain only lift machinery and any associated lift control
equipment and there should be safe access to all lift machine rooms (i.e. by a fixed staircase).
Loading Bays
Loading bays including any loading bay lifts or dock levelers should be designed specifically to suit the
intended purpose.
Where loading bays are provided the designer should ensure that adequate vehicular access is provided
for the type of vehicles, which is intended to use the loading bay.
The vehicular access should not cause a hazard to other users of the building or the public.
Due attention should be given to any security provisions and the need for specific facilities such as
motorized doors/roller shutters, warm air curtains, etc,
Waste Disposal
Waste disposal facilities adequate for and suited to the purpose and size of the development should be
provided. The facilities are within the building and house containers compatible with the refuse disposal
service.
The location should be in a lockable area resistant to vermin attack and should contain a separate space
for the storage of recyclable materials.
Care shall be given to the location and design of waste disposal facilities for kitchen waste.
The majority of paper with any security implication will be shredded at source in the building and then
held prior to collection in a store room near the loading bay, which should also have a secure area for un-
shredded secure material.
Windows and Façade Cleaning
Suitable arrangements, access and facilities should be incorporated for safe window façade cleaning. The
preferred method is by cleaning from the inside.
Facilities should be incorporated to enable safe, economic cleaning of atria/roof glazing without undue
disturbance to members of staff.
If the design of the building envelope requires that cleaning facilities are required other than for
windows, (e.g., fully glazed elevations), then a cradle system either powered or manually operated must
be provided.
Suspended access equipment should be provided where windows are over 9m above ground level and
cannot be safely cleaned from inside.
Buildings over 9m and up to 30m high should be provided with facilities for either manual or power
operated cradles and that above this height must have the facility for power operated cradles.
85
Main Hall
The access for the public to the process of government is an important aim to be reflected in the
accommodation provided and the design of the building.
The various public spaces reflect this aim extending access into the viewing gallery of the Conference
Halls.
Provision is made here for Members to meet their constituents and others and for the education of school
children in the democratic processes of government.
Visitors to the Parliament building are to be welcomed and the facilities provided will emphasize this.
Vending and Store
Special arrangements can be made within the Parliament building catering provision, if visiting groups
requires meals.
The intention is to provide vending facilities for short stay visitors, these are, free vend "bean to cup" hot
drinks vendor for Presiding Officer's visitors etc.
Delivery Bay - hot drinks vendor for out of hour’s security staff.
MP’s Block and Fitness Suite - combination machines vending confectionery/snacks and canned drinks.
Public Restaurant - canned drinks vendor
Parliamentary Training Centre
The Education Centre should be a stimulating environment where young people, and other educational
groups, can learn about the Parliament through a variety of mediums. This would include watching
presentations delivered through ITC, participating in group discussions, watching live footage of the
Debating Chamber and Committees, participating in question and answer sessions with Members,
looking at the Parliament website projected onto a large interactive screen... There should be an emphasis
on the use of technology, as the educational community will expect this center to set an example of good
practice.
The space must provide flexibility. It will be used for lecture style presentations to visiting school groups
and other educational groups. It will also be used for events such as pupil parliaments, committee
simulations and teachers seminars. Therefore it should be possible, and simple, to adapt the layout of
seating and any other furniture.
With these points in mind, the following list identifies some of the core equipment
and facilities required.
Seating
Chairs with removable writing tables and under-seat storage basket for young people participating in
visits. Seats should be suitable for adults as well as children.
- chairs for teachers/group leaders.

- chairs (for use at work stations) for Education Service staff
86
Other furniture
- small work stations/desks for Education Service staff, one of which could hold the color printer.
- small table/cabinet on wheels to hold IT projector or overhead projector.
- table-height, lockable cabinets on wheels with cupboards and drawers.
Presentation equipment
“Magi-rail” or other track presentation system has to be fitted on interior wall and narrow wall at back of
room.
System above to include the following equipment
- high definition projection screen, flipcharts, whiteboard and magnetic/felt display panels.
- Magnetic/felt panels will be used to display young people’s artwork, Education Service
resources etc.
Glazed areas
Electronic blinds/curtains on all windows and roof lights. This system should have the flexibility to close
one blind/curtain independently of the others and create varying degrees of blackout.
Lighting
A flexible lighting system will be required. It should include dimmer switches and offer a range of
lighting levels from 50 Lux to brighter levels of up to 200 Lux. The lights should be focused on the
central part of the room where visitors will be seated.
Light from this area will then filter to the corners of the room.
A desk top/free standing lamp may require to be integrated into the workstation to illuminate the PCs
IT and electronic equipment
- PCs with slim-screen monitors for staff use.
These computers should be networked, have access to the internet and Parliament live, and have multi-
media software installed to allow video clips and sound to be used in presentations.
- plasma screen to project from PCs,
- a video recorder and the Parliament’s internal broadcasting channels (including live feed from
the Chamber and Committee rooms or the Information Channel).
- interactive whiteboard*
- projector suitable for use with PCs and laptops
- color printer
- telephone line
Induction hearing loop/infra-red system for people with hearing impairment

Power sockets and IT points should be located around the rooms. Also should include-
- Discussion/Syndicate Rooms
- Offices for Training Centre Staff
- Toilets for Trainee
- Registration Room
- Mini Store
87
- Open Space for Break times

* indicates optional items
Visitor center
This is an open area preferably near the entrance to the public area where exhibitions and displays
introducing the public to the work and history of Parliament can be arranged.
The lighting display areas should be flexible to allow for a variety of uses.
Main Hall
On the days when Parliament sits, progress by the public and Press from the general area through to the
viewing gallery will be controlled by Security. The public information desk will be located in this area
with space for 4 staff. The desk and associated area should include;
- Lockable cupboards and drawers.

- Open shelving behind the desk for storage of staff reference materials.
- PC's for staff use (in-set into desk) and 1 extra monitor for public to view.
- phone lines.
- dedicated phone line for mini com / text phone.
- dedicated line for credit card machine
- Fax machine.
- printers.
- staff seats.
- whiteboards or similar for staff information. (Section at height for wheelchair access)
Induction loop system.
- Distribution racks for literature (attached to the desk and free standing).
- Video / electronic information boards for public view.
- Emergency "panic button" alarm system.
There is a requirement to create an area where the public can consult official publications in print format
and on-line. This should be located near to the Information Desk and should include;
public seats and wheelchair spaces networked touch screen PC's allowing public access to the Parliament
web site bookshelves for publications tables (coffee tables and desk height)
Space is also required for the issue, storage, recharging and administration of an audio tour. This could
be included with the desk or a separate desk provided for it within the general public areas.
Visitors will have free use of the general area, which apart from the access to toilets, vending, class room
and exhibition space will contain displays of educational material, education by video, display and
exhibition space for particular projects by both Parliament and groups to keep the public informed.
During the plenary sessions in the conference halls the amount of seating space may be less than the
numbers wishing to view the proceedings. To compensate for this a large screen, showing the Parliament
at work in the Halls will form part of the display.
Sound for this will be provided by an infrared loop system with headsets to allow the normal business of
the general area to take place undisturbed by the sound broadcast.
88
The area may also be used during non-parliamentary time for non-government exhibitions - art,
sculpture, conservation, etc;.
An automated method of counting visitors is required at the entrance / exit.
First Aid Room
This should be sited off the General Area.
Drinking water facilities will be installed at various communal areas within Holyrood, namely:
- Adjacent to the First Aid room
- Within the Public Café
Press Area
There are a number of areas allocated in the building to the Press, which are used to communicate or hold
interviews with the Press. They have a presence in the viewing gallery of the meeting halls and require
media broadcasting outlets.
"Press" is used to cover newspaper, television and sound cover.
Conference Room (HoPR and HoF halls)
The room's main use will be to present press conferences to the media in an environment, which enables
TV and radio broadcasters to cover proceedings effectively. It is also envisaged that the room would be
used for delivering presentations to delegates visiting the Parliament.
The facilities to be included within the Conference Rooms are to include;

- Press Wall-box
- Presenter / MP’s Rostrum
- Projection screen & projector, or plasma screen
- Picture monitors
- Microphones for desk and rostrum [1 per person, + spare]
- PC for presentations
- Sound reinforcement
- Acoustic treatment
- Control of lighting system from the desk / rostrum
- Entry lights on all doors
- Floor boxes
- Microphone switches
- Microphone amplifiers
- IT outlets [ to coffee lounge area]
- Audio and Video level monitors
- Sound mixer
- Feeds to press
- Equipment racking
- System switcher [sound and vision switching to displays]
- Video recorder / player
- Cassette recorder / player
The one side of the room should be fitted out to include a catering area where MP’s will be able to access
teas and coffees. The furniture and fittings in the catering area must be capable of easy removal to allow
89
the whole room to be used for its primary function.
The catering facility should comprise a table from which hot and cold beverages in flasks/bottles, biscuits
and fruit can be offered together with the associated crockery [that is, there is no requirement for the
facility to be supported by building services].
Gallery Office
A room is required by the Press to provide verbatim reporting of the proceedings in the conference room
to a large number of news outlets.
In summary, there will be desks with PA equipment, VDUs, bookshelves, filing cabinets and lockers.
The services include ISDN telephone system; clean feed of the proceedings; video grab from the halls;
reception of satellite and terrestrial television channels. The room will need to be close to the Press Area
in the viewing gallery.
Television and Sound Broadcasting
This area will be occupied by a number of television and radio broadcasting companies. It will be divided
into units according to individual requirements.
The resulting rooms will be used as studios, reporting, and editing and office spaces.
They will be highly serviced with IT equipment, monitor and lighting, and will in part require cooling or
air-conditioning.
The area should be located off the Public area and have access for Members of Parliament to be
interviewed on TV and sound.
The Television and Sound Broadcasting should be equipped with the latest technology for
Television and Sound Broadcasting purposes.
Press Rooms
The Press located a number of reporters and staff in the Parliament Building.
Although a room may be for the photographic work of development and editing, with a consequent
demand for additional services, particularly ventilation, these rooms are designated as offices.
They have a high occupancy rate around 1 person/7m2 and will be fully fitted with IT services, fax and
telephones.
Conference rooms
The design of this, the most important area of the Parliament building, should reflect the commitment to
open government. It has two-story space because of the viewing gallery at the upper level.
It must be located close to the ancillary accommodation but also accessible at the upper level from the
public general area.
The Press conference room and Press area should be planned adjacent to the meeting hall to allow ease of
90
access by Ministers and Parliamentary staff and ready but controlled access by the Press.
The arrangement of the Members’ seating reflects the role of the Parliament.
The stage should be the focal point.
The Principal Clerk and the Minute Clerk will flank the Presiding Officer on either side. Positioned to the
front and left of them, and at a lower level will be seating for a Voting Clerk and one spare.
Electronic control of both voting and speaking should be installed, and control of the IT screens and
particularly the voting system should be available to all the Clerks positions.
A lectern with microphone and possibly a display of the time available for speaking, controlled by the
Presiding Officer, should also be provided. The generally accepted principle is that each MP’s should
have a desk microphone at their seat.
The Presiding Officers desk and chair should be such that it is either higher or larger, or both, than the
Clerks desk / chairs.
The mace should be situated in the meeting hall, directly in front of the seating for the Presiding Officer
and clerks. It will be in a secure display case and should be visible by all MP’s and those in the public
gallery.
The display of the mace should be able to be adjusted to signify when a meeting of the Parliament is
taking place. The sound system should be complimented with adequate ambient microphones to pick up
background sound and also to act as a backup system in the event of a failure of the stem microphone
system
Digital Clocks:
[Number dependant on the design of the meeting hall] with approximately 12cm high characters for the
hours and minutes display and 10cm high characters for the display of seconds.
- 230v AC power supply.
- Should include input for connection to debate timer facility, and
- Receiver to allow radio code synchronization.
The over-riding requirement is that all Members, as well as the Presiding Officer and clerks in the well of
the hall, are able to see one clock displaying actual time and one clock displaying current speaking time.
Provision should also be made for a clock on the Presiding Officers desk [only visible to the Presiding
Officer], which displays the amount of time left to speakers.
There should be a mechanism on the clock face to alert Members that speaking times are coming to an
end: flashing colons are suggested as one possibility. Clocks linked to the same system are also required
in the following areas,
- Presiding Officer's office

- Presiding Officers Ante room
- All Committee Rooms
- Official Report Office
- Meeting hall Office, Business Team
91
Official Report Booth
This should be compatible with the digital clocks specified above and should include the facility for pre-
setting at least two [2] different time limits for speakers in debates. When activated, it should
automatically change the display on all but one of the digital clocks specified above from the time of day
to timer display. The timer should have the facility to either:-
Count down from set number of minutes to zero when the display should then flash until reset by the
operator; or Count up from zero - indicating the time a speaker has been on their feet - until reset by the
operator.
The operator should be able to restore the time of display to all clocks when the timer facility is no longer
required.
The timer should also have the facility to act as a stopwatch to count up without limit of time until reset
by the operator.
The intention is that the main debate timer unit would be situated and controlled from one of the clerks'
desks. 2 x slave units:
- To allow the main functions of the debate timer system to be operated remotely by the clerks
seated on either side of the Presiding Officer.
1 x omni-directional radio code receiver head:
- To synchronize digital clocks specified to radio time code information from local radio station
MW and FM.
The seating arrangement should recognize that there could be different political parties who may wish
their Members to sit together.
The seating should be capable of grouping together to reflect this wish.
Individual seating with space around for the individual to enter or leave his/her seat is the desired
provision.
Papers may be brought into the Chamber and there should be a provision for temporary storage.
The allocated space should be wired through floor terminals for electronic voting and individual sound.
Each floor box should be configured with 4 Nos. (Cat 6 (or equivalent) RJ45 outlets plus one twin 13amp
socket.)
the seating layout should give each Member a clear view of the lectern and the Presiding Officer’s dais.
There are others present in the conference Halls who have important roles to play.
The Clerk of the Parliament and the support staff should also be facing the main body of the Hall.
The Parliament controls the output of television and sound broadcasting and radio/TV control rooms will
be located in the Broadcast Services accommodation.
Reporters work in a rota of short “turns”, so easy access to the Halls is important, as is convenient access
by foot to the Official Report office. Reporters note, among other things, which member is speaking and
92
an outline of what they are saying.
An uninterrupted view of all members’ faces and a good acoustic location are therefore essential, as is a
surface on which to write.
A clear view of a digital clock used or synchronized with that used by the Presiding
Officer is also essential.
Reporters and meeting hall attendants should be able easily to send, deliver, collect and return notes.
- Raised seating to allow clear sight lines and good acoustics for all parts of the Chamber
- A desk and two chairs next to each other
- A clear view of a digital clock (or one built into the desk).
- Ample writing surface
- IT facilities including mouse,
- keyboard and a foldaway screen at both seats, for use as necessary (e.g. if there is not a clear
view of voting/presentation screens); flexibility to accommodate future innovation and
development
- Ability to plug into the sound/interpretation system, for example, a jack plug for headphones;
channel selector and volume control
- A ledge under the desk to store papers
- A third chair close to the desk, for staff waiting to take over
There needs to be a letter rack-type storage area for envelopes, notepaper etc. and a delivery/collection
point convenient for security staff delivering and receiving the notes to members.
Although security guards may not always be present in the halls, seating is required for guards, at the
entrances level and at viewing gallery level.
The Foyer is an important part of the Parliament space.
It forms part of the meeting hall but should be screened both visually and acoustically from the hall.
Its purpose is to allow Members to leave the formal seated area without leaving the Halls and to be able
to discuss together items of business while the work of the Parliament proceeds. Seats and tables should
also be provided for their use.
It should be possible to leave the Hall for the ancillary accommodation or the Press conference room.
An infrared system for the hard of hearing and translation systems will be installed in the Meeting halls.
Disabled persons may also be Members, and their requirements should be respected.
There are detailed requirements for services for disabled people including the installation of a Palan
system, or similar [as and when deemed necessary].
To achieve this, accommodation is needed, in the Halls, which is air-conditioned and soundproofed but
could still benefit from a view of the Hall.
The following space requirements for the In-House Television and Sound Broadcasting areas are
required:
93
TV Control Room
This will include control of the cameras, vision switching and captioning. The area will include a
recording and editing suite and will mainly be used in association with the Meeting Hall.
Recording and Editing Rooms /for sound and vision recording/
For the Meeting halls, this may also house signing and subtitling facilities.
Apparatus Room
Termination Control Room
It is not necessary for these rooms to have a view of the Hall but all rooms should be co-located.
Workshop
Rest Room
It is suggested that all of this accommodation can be located remote from the conference halls with
proximity to the Communications Room and PABX an important factor.
These control rooms will require cooling/air conditioning.
Archive Storage
Archive Storage, for the recording of meetings in the Halls and standing Committee meeting Rooms, will
be held in the Parliament, Racking for approximately 2,500 videotapes per year is required.
Translation Booth
These are soundproofed from exterior uses and each other, and are air-conditioned spaces with a view
over the conference halls.
Meeting Halls– Gallery level
Consisting of,
Public Gallery
Press Gallery
Guests' Gallery
The main element of the gallery area is the viewing gallery excluding Press, with tiered seating looking
out over the Meeting Hall towards the stage with the Clerk of Parliament and their assistants.
Space should be provided for wheelchair users with the option of flexible additional spaces for special
occasions.
The viewing gallery is for members of the public but will also accommodate researchers or assistants
who have a particular interest in the presentation of the Members.
Their access to speak with Members during the plenary sessions must be controlled by Security, who
requires seating for Security Officers in the gallery. Some seating will be provided with armrests for
94
people with impaired mobility. The gallery is open to the Meeting Hall level below.
The seating is raked; tip up with no note taking tables or IT facilities for the Public.
The area has an infrared system for the hard of hearing, switchable to a separate channel for simultaneous
interpretation.
Space should be reserved in the viewing gallery for members of the Press.
They may have an area separated from the public by handrail or screen. Facilities for sound reception are
to be available.
Any transmission of reporting must be done outside the gallery from the Pressroom. The entrance to this
area will be separate from the public entrance but available to accredited Press members only.
The seating in this area should have note-taking fittings.
There should be a space provided for wheelchair users. Some seats should be provided with armrests for
those with impaired mobility.
Sound, camera and monitoring is required in the viewing gallery to record, film and transmit sound from
the Hall below.
Sounds broadcasting live commentary booths are required. Booths should be soundproofed and air-
conditioned.
Careful consideration should be given to the design of these to ensure they do not exclude their use by
wheelchair users.
Standing Committee Conference Rooms (x16) – General Requirements
- The 16 Standing Committee Conference Rooms, should be planned as a suite with controlled
access to the suite by either pass or escort from the public area. Each committee room should
also be individually secure with access controlled either by pass or key.
- Each of the 16 Standing Committee Conference Rooms should have the following facilities:
- Each of the table spaces must be fitted with audio microphone and voting units, provision of the
units would allow automatic microphone, camera and captioning operation as well as meaning
that electronic voting could be used at a convener’s discretion.
- There should also be a spare microphone/voting sets for use in any of the 16 Standing
Committee Conference Rooms in the event of breakdown or if more than 50 people need to be
seated around a committee table.
- The table must be accessible to and usable by wheelchair users.
- The table should incorporate modesty panels and the seats should be on wheels for easy
movement.
- There should be cabling for IT at all table spaces. In addition, there are the following specific IT
cabling and desk space requirements:
- Official Report spaces should be able to accommodate equipment associated with a digital audio
95
system.
- The clerks’ spaces should be able to accommodate electronic voting control equipment.
- The broadcasting spaces should be able to accommodate microphone operation equipment.
- There should be a laying out table for papers.
- There should be a separate small table capable of holding tea/coffee requirements for members,
staff and witnesses.
- There should be wiring and space for equipment to relay proceedings, including sound, vision
and interpretation to everyone (i.e. Members, staff, witnesses, officials, press and public) in the
room via screens and a sound enhancement system, and to others out with the room.
- There may be a need to have a sign language interpreter in the room for one or more individuals
and who may need to be watched via monitor by those who cannot see the signing direct)
- There should be two chairs (preferably with fold-away writing table) for security staff, one to be
located by public entrance with full view of public seating and the other on the opposite side
within easy reach of the committee table. There should be a fixed induction loop system for the
hard of hearing and an infra-red sound enhancement system.
- There should be digital clocks synchronized centrally.
- There should be lights outside rooms to indicate that a live broadcast is in progress.
- There should be two-way peep holes in all Standing Committee Conference Room doors giving
access to corridors.
- There should be space outside each entry door to Standing Committee Conference Rooms to
have a vacant/engaged sign, a booking timetable and a sign providing details of the committee
name and expected duration of meeting (much of this information could be displayed on a
Public Information Channel monitor outside each door, if that is considered appropriate).
- There should be a table, modesty panels and a small shelf on the underside of the table for
papers.
- There should be provision of cold water for drinking (either via a water dispenser, positioned
well away from the public, or bottled and provided on the tea/coffee table).
- There should be wall-mounted first aid boxes (consistent with any wider first aid policy).
- There should be blinds on windows or glazed walls. There should be seating behind the
committee table for the press and public. Seating numbers will vary according to room size and
layout. Where layout allows, the seating area for press should be separated from the public
seating to allow security and other staff to differentiate between press and public. Press seating
should include provision of fold-away desk tops for writing on dedicated space should be
provided for any members of the press or public using wheelchairs and the public seats normally
provided should be removable to create further wheelchair spaces if required
96
- Standing Committee Conference Rooms should contain permanent interpretation booths. Booth
should be able to accommodate two interpreters and should be positioned to give a clear view of
proceedings. Cameras should be positioned to record speakers not in the direct line of sight of
the interpreters so that these can be viewed on a TV monitor in the booth.
Sub Standing Committee Conference Rooms (x39) – General Requirements
- The 39 - Sub Standing Committee Conference Rooms, should be planned as a suite with
controlled access to the suite by either pass or escort from the public area. Each committee room
should also be individually secure with access controlled either by pass or key.
- Each of the 39 Sub Standing Committee Conference Rooms should have the following facilities:
- Each of the table spaces must be fitted with audio microphone and voting units, provision of the
units would allow automatic microphone, camera and captioning operation as well as meaning
that electronic voting could be used at a convener’s discretion.
- There should also be a spare microphone/voting sets for use in any of the 39 Sub Standing
Committee Conference Rooms in the event of breakdown or if more people need to be seated
around a committee table.
- The table must be accessible to and usable by wheelchair users.
- The table should incorporate modesty panels and the seats should be on wheels for easy
movement.
- There should be cabling for IT at all table spaces. In addition, there are the following specific IT
cabling and desk space requirements:
- Official Report spaces should be able to accommodate equipment associated with a digital audio
system.
- The clerks’ spaces should be able to accommodate electronic voting control equipment.
- The broadcasting spaces should be able to accommodate microphone operation equipment.
- There should be a laying out table for papers.
- There should be a separate small table capable of holding tea/coffee requirements for members,
staff and witnesses.
- There should be wiring and space for equipment to relay proceedings, including sound, vision
and interpretation to everyone (i.e. Members, staff, witnesses, officials, press and public) in the
room via screens and a sound enhancement system, and to others out with the room.
- There may be a need to have a sign language interpreter in the room for one or more individuals
and who may need to be watched via monitor by those who cannot see the signing direct)
- There should be two chairs (preferably with fold-away writing table) for security staff, one to be
located by public entrance with full view of public seating and the other on the opposite side
within easy reach of the committee table. There should be a fixed induction loop system for the
97
hard of hearing and an infra-red sound enhancement system.
- There should be digital clocks synchronized centrally.
- There should be lights outside rooms to indicate that a live broadcast is in progress.
- There should be two-way peep holes in all Sub Standing Committee Conference Room doors
giving access to corridors.
- There should be space outside each entry door to Sub Standing Committee Conference Rooms
to have a vacant/engaged sign, a booking timetable and a sign providing details of the
committee name and expected duration of meeting (much of this information could be displayed
on a Public Information Channel monitor outside each door, if that is considered appropriate).
- There should be a table, modesty panels and a small shelf on the underside of the table for
papers.
- There should be provision of cold water for drinking (either via a water dispenser, positioned
well away from the public, or bottled and provided on the tea/coffee table).
- There should be wall-mounted first aid boxes (consistent with any wider first aid policy).
- There should be blinds on windows or glazed walls. There should be seating behind the
committee table for the press and public. Seating numbers will vary according to room size and
layout. Where layout allows, the seating area for press should be separated from the public
seating to allow security and other staff to differentiate between press and public. Press seating
should include provision of fold-away desk tops for writing on dedicated space should be
provided for any members of the press or public using wheelchairs and the public seats normally
- Sub Standing Committee Conference Rooms should contain permanent interpretation booths.
Booth should be able to accommodate two interpreters and should be positioned to give a clear
view of proceedings. Cameras should be positioned to record speakers not in the direct line of
sight of the interpreters so that these can be viewed on a TV monitor in the booth.
N.B. - These rooms will be provided with full IT and voice facilities. The Committee
conference Rooms may require Acoustic treatment if the ambient noise level
exceeds 42dB. The room walls (and doors), ceiling and floor should have an
insulation level of 45dB minimum and mechanical air conditioning system.
- Enable the room temperature to be adjustable.
Storage
A lockable, secure storage space with racking and secure filing cabinets for the storage of Committee
material should be allocates and can also be an internal space without windows.
98
Photocopier / Storage
To provide the above, an enclosed space with shelving for stationery and space for photocopiers is
required.
Mail points can also be provided at these locations. Suitable ventilation should be provided to this area,
including direct extract.
Office of the Speaker
A suite of rooms is provided for the Speaker.
This comprises his/her room of 64m2 furnished with desk, chair, bookcases, low level table and lounge
chairs, a meeting table with 12 chairs. The room should also be fitted with a desk, 2 storage cabinets (one
with a lockable internal security box), IT services, a printer, a TV monitor providing live broadcast feed
and a telephone. The room should be provided with natural light and blinds.
The entrance to this room is from a reception room, which also has access to a secretary room of 60 m2,
furnished for 3 persons with IT, telephones, monitor TV, etc.
Enable the room temperature to be adjusted by the occupant.
A private room with private toilet with WC, wash-hand basin and shower is provided with direct access
from the First Minister's Room.
The toilet and shower facility should be designed to be easily adaptable for disabled use.
Conference rooms for 40 people should be accommodated
And also should include-
- Advisor to the speaker

- Special Assistant to the speaker
- Private Guard Room
- Ethics and anticorruption Personnel
Office of Deputy Speaker
A suite of rooms is provided for the deputy Speaker.
furnished for 2 persons with IT, telephones, monitor TV, etc.
99
Office of the Government Whips
A suite of rooms is provided.
furnished for 2 persons with IT, telephones, monitor TV, etc. This space should be demarcated with
privacy screening and should be provided with natural light and blinds. Because of the confidential
nature of much of the personal secretary’s work, a dedicated printer should be available within the space
allocated. There should be room for 2 storage cabinets (one with a lockable internal security box).

- Deputy Government Whips
- Reception Room
- Secretaries for Deputy Government Whips
Office of the Directorate, Government Whip Affairs
A suite of rooms is provided for the Director.
chairs, a meeting table with 4 chairs.
The entrance to this room is from secretary room of 20 m2, furnished for 1 person with IT, telephones,
monitor TV, etc.
And also should include 2 advisors rooms of which one can accommodate 2 persons and the other should
accommodate 3 persons.
Chair persons & Deputy Chair persons of Standing Committees offices
There will be 32 Chair persons & Deputy Chair persons. It is intended that each one shall have a room
1:1 ratio.
100
Each room should be a size of 36m2.
It will be fitted out with a worktable, filing, storage, an executive chair and 2 visitors' chairs a 3 seat
couch and a coffee table for each office.
The room will be fully wired for all IT services, plus a PC and separate broadcasting monitor, and
telephone.
Fax machines are provided in the open area. In addition, the room will be fitted with; fridge and coat
hanging space, all within an enclosed fitment.
These are intended as workrooms.
Meeting the public, press and constituents will take place in other areas of the building in order to
maintain the security of the Parliament building.
Secretaries and Standing committee Officers
Each room should be a size of 36m2.
This is an office accommodation between two Standing Committees offices with 2 staff positions
available and serving the two standing committee rooms it should be provided with internal access to the
standing committee offices.
The desking will be structured, each member of staff having a desk, chair, personal storage and lockable
filing for correspondence and papers.
A 3 seat couch and a coffee table should be accommodated.
The space should be planned as a shared office between 2 Committees offices. The area should be fully
wired for IT, telephones, etc. and have monitors, TV, and division bells, via voice alarm.
MP’s offices
There will be 547 Members in the Parliament. It is intended that each one shall have a room 1:2 ratio.
20m2 office space should be provided for 2 MP’s.
it will be fitted out with a worktable, filing, storage, an executive chair and 2 visitors' chairs for each
member.
The room will be fully wired for all IT services, plus a PC and separate broadcasting monitor, and
telephone.
Fax machines are provided in the open area. In addition, the room will be fitted with; fridge and coat
hanging space, all within an enclosed fitment.
101
These are intended as workrooms.
Meeting the public, press and constituents will take place in other areas of the building in order to
maintain the security of the Parliament building.
Open Plan Offices
Open plan office areas should provide a working environment, which is both pleasant for the user and
economical in use. Particular attention should be given to the following requirements.
- Provide adequate natural light and areas which are regular in shape and of good proportions;
keep columns to a minimum compatible with good design; ensure height to depth ratios are
reasonable and avoid the “tunnel” effect. The need for open plan spaces to be capable of being
partitioned at some future date with minimal disruption should be considered
- enable the room temperature to be adjusted.
.
All office areas should be designed for VDU use with suitable glare control, and the general use of VDUs
taken into account particularly in respect of service facilities and environmental effects. TV screens will
also be provided in the relevant areas for the live feed and the annunciator.
Engineering service requirements (e.g. lighting, power, voice/data facilities etc.) are separately identified
elsewhere in this document but attention should be given to the integration and co-ordination of services
particularly in relation to potential layout changes.
Cellular Offices
Cellular offices should have the following characteristics.
- Adequate natural light; regular shape with proportions suitable to the purpose and permitting a
sensible arrangement of furniture and working area.
- Enable the room temperature to be adjusted by the occupant.
- The rooms will be fitted with IT, telephones, monitor, TV, etc. To ensure future flexibility, the
rooms should be formed using demountable partitioning.
*The rest of the Offices in the program are subjected to a similar arrangement and facilities should
be referenced from the above description according to their hierarchy.
Coffee, Snacks
Provided within the Conference Room, a space is provided for to break from plenary sessions and to
have coffee, etc without returning to other distant parts of the building.
There should be some seating with tables. The use of the area will vary according to demand. It will be
supplied from one of the Finishing Kitchens.
Concourse
Linked with the Coffee, Snack area, this provides a milling space and gathering area for the Committee
and Conference Rooms. During breaks in business, it is a useful area for an impromptu exchange of
views, with refreshment.
102
There should be a newspaper rack, some chairs and tables, but it is mainly standing
up space. It is a linking area, part of the circulation.
Catering
There are 4 groups within the Parliament building who require to have catering facilities provided for
them to a greater or lesser degree – Members of Parliament, Staff, Press and the Public.
The level of catering also depends on the working hours of the Parliament and if this works into the
evening, the facility will have to be maintained. Provision has also been made in the accommodation for
dining; receptions for sponsored groups, companies who with the Parliament's approval may make use of
the facilities.
The flexibility to use Committee Rooms as dining spaces has also been built in by the incorporation of
finishing kitchens and stores. The principle of the catering provision is based on the use of a large kitchen
for preparation and cooking with finishing kitchens for Members' Dining Rooms and Committee Rooms.
Kitchen
This is the main cooking area for the building preparing a range of meals from snacks to full dinners.
There should be direct access to the Staff Restaurant servery and by either dedicated lift or heated trolley
to the other kitchens.
The other elements of the catering unit are grouped around the kitchen. The equipment is likely to be in
an island configuration with stainless steel benching and sinks around the walls.
All the finishes will be washable and easy clean. Kitchen extract ventilation discharges should be located
to ensure that there is no re-entrainment of air into intakes.
Preparation
This area close to the kitchen will be used mainly for vegetable preparation and requires equipment, sinks
and bin storage.
Pot Wash
Sited between the kitchen and preparation area, it requires sinks, worktops, dishwasher (for large items)
and bin storage.
The floor must be properly drained with grease traps and gullies.
This applies to all kitchen/servery areas.
Cold Room and Freezer
Accessible directly from the kitchen, the area is divided into 2 equal but self- contained compartments
and should be of a demountable proprietary design. Care must be taken in siting of the compressor
equipment to minimize noise and condensation.
103
Cleaner/Detergent Store
The cleaners' store, as part of the kitchen, requires special ventilation, as toxic chemical fumes could be
present because of the cleaning processes. All the equipment, shelving and sinks must be stainless steel
or ceramic and the finishes washable.
Office
This office is for 2 persons, the catering manager and assistant and must have a view over the kitchen
area and may be an internal space, which will require mechanical ventilation as it is likely to be occupied
during the full working day by at least one person.
It must be designed to have access without passing through the kitchen
Store
The store, which is for kitchen supplies, should be close by the office and capable of the supervision of
deliveries from the office.
It is essential that a dry atmosphere be maintained.
Servery
This servery is for the Members and staff restaurant with direct access from the kitchen for personnel by
self-closing doors, but the food route should be via pass through hot and chilled cupboards.
There should be generous circulation areas around the various carousels serving a range of hot and cold
foods, special meals and non-alcoholic drinks.
It is essential that a first impression of the catering areas is one of quality created by good design and that
this is carried through all the catering spaces whatever the level of function.
Care must be taken in the design of access for kitchen staff to and from the server and the ventilation
must be designed to prevent kitchen smells circulating through the building.
Members’ and Staff Restaurant
The restaurant should have seating for 160 persons.

It should be laid out in an informal non-institutional manner and reflected in the decoration and furniture.
The meals are self-service tray to table to dishwasher.
It does not allow for seating all members and staff at the same time.
The servery and restaurant may be at a different level from the kitchen requiring a service lift for trolleys,
refuse and stores. This area should have a broadcast feed via a TV monitor.
Coffee Lounge
This is an extension of the Members’ and Staff Restaurant. The intention is to provide a comfortable
seating area for coffee takers after a meal. The seating should be lounge chairs with tables.
104
It is a non-smoking area - separate smoking rooms are provided. This area should have a broadcast feed
via a TV monitor.
Dish-wash (Carousel)
The dish-wash area is usually remote from kitchen and servery but adjacent to the dining room.
It is designed to deal with crockery, cutlery and glass. Allowance should be made for the wash to be
based on a carousel tray system with staff returning trays to the conveyor.
The Carousel deals with the maceration of soft food.
Cleaner
A large cleaners’ room should be located adjacent to the main kitchen. And can be access from the Dish-
wash area.
Switch-room
Because of the high electrical loads of the various pieces of equipment, a Switch-room is required as part
of the kitchen complex.
Members’ Dining
This is intended as a formal dining room with waiter service, where Members, their guests and the Press
by invitation only, can dine. If all Members wished to dine together this would have to be set up in the
combined Members’/Staff Restaurant. Visiting delegations with some Members could use this space.
Private Dining
Located close to Finishing Kitchen, and members Dining, this room can be used for invited parties,
Members’ guests and delegations. (A sliding, folding partition between the Members’ and Private Dining
Rooms would allow greater flexibility.)
Finishing Kitchen
This provides food for the Members' Dining Room and the Private Dining Room. It would be served by a
catering dedicated lift from the main kitchen with meals conveyed by trolley. The Finishing Kitchen,
which may operate when the main restaurant is closed, should function as a self-contained unit.
Space has to be reserved for trolleys, refuse and goods to be loaded on to the lift. The finishes are the
same as the kitchen.
Dish-wash/Servery
A dual use space as servery/dish-wash for Members' Dining and Private Dining within an enclosed area,
finishing kitchen serves directly to Members' Dining Room. One store should be located next to Dish-
105
wash/Servery.
Lounge/Guest (MP’s)
Located close to the Members' / Staff Restaurant. Members who have invited guests to dine may use this
lounge for coffee or as a meeting place with an accredited visitor.
Coffee by waiter service is provided from the Finishing Kitchen. Fitted with lounge chairs, low tables
and newspaper/magazine rack.
Tea Points
Each tea point unit should incorporate water heater for tea/coffee, fridge, a sink for washing up and
cupboards for storage of paper towels etc.
To be distributed throughout the complex,
Stores
These stores are distributed as follows.
Two are part of main kitchen complex; one is related to Committee Rooms and the other close to the
Press Conference area.
They are fitted with racking and shelving for tables' chairs and secure storage for small items.
Public Cafeteria
It is intended to provide snacks/sandwiches and a fixed menu. Drinks from a vending machine will be
available during the flexible hours worked by the Press.
The service to this area will be limited.

There should be tables and seating.
Finishing Kitchen/Dish-wash
This will combine with the Cafeteria to provide a servery and wash up area. The kitchen will rely entirely
on meals prepared in the main kitchen, provided by trolley access from the controlled area.
Store/Vending
A store is provided for the area of Press Cafeteria/Finishing Kitchen, accessed from the kitchen, with an
area accessed from the Cafeteria with sink, hot water boiler and cupboard.
Smoking Room
A designated smoking room is to be provided to service the whole of the complex. The room should have
a lobby entrance and walls and ceilings should be sealed to prevent smoke spreading into other parts of
the building. Furnishings must be carefully selected related to the use of the room.
Facilities Management
The management and provision of services such as engineering, cleaning and maintenance, may be in-
house or contracted out. The schedule of accommodation will apply in either case.
106
The Facilities Manager will be the Head of the Division within the Directorate of Corporate Affairs.
Facilities Manager
A suite of rooms is required to house the Facilities Manager and staff. This should preferably be on the
ground floor near to the main entrances and Security. The manager's room is an office with full IT
facilities and printout for BMS. It should have desk, table, filing and secure filing.
Facilities Staff
There will be fifteen staff in an open plan office with a meeting room including the;
- Health & Safety Officer
- FM Office Service Manager
- FM Support Manager
- Deputy Head of Facilities Management and
- support staff.
All personnel will require a standard desk layout with storage, desktop IT and telephony; in addition the
Deputy Head FM will require sufficient space for meetings with up to two (2) people at their desk. Other
Facilities staff will be located throughout the building.
The BMS control will be located in this room and the lighting control system, for monitoring by the
Engineers. The area will be set out as an office with desks, filing, full IT and telephones.
Help Desk
A structured open office space with four desks, IT, filing and shelving. Purpose is to allow MP’s, Staff,
etc to obtain advice on building problems, information and services.
Office Manager meeting halls / Committee Room Manager
To manage the equipment, booking and facilities within these two areas. It should be equipped with
desks, IT, filing and shelving.
Engineer's Workshop/Office, Toilet and Shower
The Engineer requires an office of 10m2 for record keeping activities in the building including servicing,
materials supply, faults and repairs.
A workbench for minor repairs with a power tool supply, desk, chairs and racking to be provided. The
WC, WHB and shower are in a separate, single compartment.
Mail Room / Screen Dispatch Receipt
The mailroom receives all parcels and deliveries, which are security screened before being passed for
sorting and distribution. This is done during normal working hours and franking and dispatching of mail
after hours.
The mailroom will be fitted out with screening apparatus, sorting tables, scales, pigeon-hole racking and
mail sack holders.
107
Post Office Facility
Trolley Store Area
A trolley store area required.
The porters will operate from this area and from the loading bay, stores, etc. One of the lifts should be
next to this area and dedicated to the messenger and porter service only.
Mail/Porters/Receptionists Mess Room, Changing and Toilet facilities
The means of delivery into the building will be through the loading bay; there is therefore a need for this
room to be located near to that area. Separate rooms for male and female showers toilets and lockers
should be provided with a communal messing area.
PABX
This room should be located preferably with one external wall to receive the main telephone and
broadcasting intakes into the site. This external wall should be strengthened to offer protection in the
event of a bomb blast.
The access floor (approx. 600mm clear) will provide connection ways by cable trays to the vertical risers
for distribution to the upper floors. Cooling will be required to maintain operating conditions; 100%
standby, stand-alone cooling is required.
No water, waste or soil pipes should pass through or over the rooms and water tanks should be located at
a distance. The under floor cableway area will need to be waterproof. The walls should be smooth with
no projections and capable of supporting equipment racks.
The room must be free from condensation.
Communications Room
This space has 2 functions and should be divided equally with access from one to the other.
The first area contains servers and hubs for the whole IT system in the building. The second area is the
workspace for IT staff and a teaching area. All the space should be secure from flooding and external
windows must have laminated glass and will be wired for security with relays to the Security Room.
The double doors will have security locks, with wired glass viewing panels. Racking for equipment is
required in the server area. Cooling to the server room is necessary to ensure the equipment continues to
perform in periods of excessive heat; 100% stand-by, stand alone cooling is required.
Full IT, telephone and fax services.
IT
IT requires on each floor, processor rooms of 20m2 each. The rooms should be located next to each
vertical riser. These rooms must be secure and free from any risk of water ingress, either externally or
108
internally. Water tanks, cooling equipment should be at a distance. To link these rooms to the
Communications and PABX rooms, a duct 600 wide x 300 deep is required running horizontally under
the access floor.
Vertical Risers and Servers
Provided to meet the service requirements of the building. These will require cooling. The ducts will be
shared between IT and telephones. There should be a direct cable route between the riser and the server
compartments agreed design. All ducts must have a fire resistance of 2 hours with 1-hour self-closing
doors. The floors at each riser should be accessible over the whole length with removable covers.
Stores
General stores dispersed throughout the office and working areas of the building and not in the meeting
rooms, Committee Rooms or service areas such as Catering which have their own storage.
Natural light is not required; the rooms can be part of the internal cores or intersections. They require
racking and secure filing.
Lighting / Store
Depending on the system adopted, space for equipment and storage is allowed.
Printing shop
This space should be located at a good access point.

The printing shop should be provided with
- Dark Room
- Plate & Film Washing Room
- Printing Room with heavy Machines
- Finishing Activities Room
- Delivery Store
- Mini Store
- Pigeon Hall
- Main Publisher
- Publisher & Assistant Publisher Staffs
- Publisher and Conference Service Staffs
- Room for Changing Working Clothes for Women & Men
- Shower & Toilet for Women and Men The number of toilets in this area assuming a 50/50 split
male/female, Two shower compartments are provided in this area. Hanging space for cleaning
staff’s coats should also be provided.
-
The print shop should be equipped with the latest technology for heavy printing facilities.
Furniture Store
This store should be located close to the goods lift with access to the loading bay.
The main items stored will be desks, chairs, tables, etc but with computer or word processing equipment
stored from time to time. This room does not require natural light but must be ventilated and secure.
109
Paper Store
The Paper Store will be used to hold bulk supplies. It should be located near to the Loading Bay.
The supplies will be distributed from the goods lift to open plan and office areas throughout the building.
Racking and shelving is required.
Cleaners' Store
This store, close to the goods lift, will be used to store cleaning materials, paper towels, soap, etc and will
be used as a distribution center to Cleaners' Rooms, Toilets, etc.
The room does not require natural light.
Racking and shelving is required
Cleaners' Rooms
The Cleaners' Store will be used as a Cleaners' Room. The rooms are distributed throughout the building.
They do not require natural light but must be well ventilated. There should be a cleaners' sink, shelving,
racking and coat hooks for cleaners' outdoor clothes.
Paper Shredder / Refuse
All paper is shredded at the work place. Storage is required for shredded paper and bulk items.
The room should be close to the Loading Bay. A compactor may be used to bale paper.
A secure area is required for non-shredded material.
Refuse Recyclable
This store should be sited close to the Kitchen but accessible from the loading bay for wheeled bins.
This is not a working area for the separation of materials, which will be organized at source in the
kitchens, restaurants, and break areas and on the office floors. The Caterer requires waste disposal to all
kitchens and this will affect the drainage design.
Refuse
All other waste will be put directly into wheeled containers. An area off the loading bay is required
where the bins can be accessed from within the building and by the Refuse Contractor, under supervision
by the Security Guard.
Delivery / Loading Bay
The Delivery / Loading Bay is required for the delivery of bulk goods such as furniture, equipment,
consumable and catering supplies and for the dispatch of refuse.
Mail Room deliveries and pick-ups will also be handled via the loading bay. The area must allow parking
for large cars.
110
Reference to The area must be ventilated to prevent fumes or smells penetrating into the rest of Sniffer
system of the building. The Security Room should be sited to give clear views of approaching traffic,
pedestrians and callers.
An entry-phone system is required from the loading bay entrance to the Security room with a facility to
switch this out of hours to the Security Control Room. The loading bay must be security controlled at all
times.
Stores
On each floor a general store is required which can be made available to the Facilities Manager.
This should have racking and shelving with 2 hour fireproof walls and doors and need not have natural
light.
Miscellaneous
There are a number of areas, which do not fall into a particular category.
Fitness Room (Members and Staff only)
Finishes robust with enhanced ventilation need not have natural light.
This room must have an assistance alarm.

Should be equipped with all the necessary gym facilities with the reference of international standard.
Changing Rooms
Two changing rooms are required one male, one female. They should have locker space, showers, and a
WC and wash-hand basin. Access should be direct from the Fitness Room lobby. A suitable accessible
changing facility should be provided close to the fitness room.
Shower rooms will be unisex and suitable for disabled people.
Shower rooms will be provided with non-slip floor finishes, fully tiled walls to shower areas,
thermostatic shower mixing valves with adjustable height spray outlets, seating and shower curtains, with
finishes suitable for a humid environment.
Car Parking
Within the building car parking spaces are provided. The entrance and exit will be covered by a Security
Officer.
There should be direct access by lift, which must be located next to the Officers’ booth and be capable of
being controlled by the Officer, to the floors above. The car-park area and specifically all entrances and
exits must be covered by CCTV camera with any doors/shutters being alarmed.
The parking bays must be clearly numbered and each user will be given a designated bay. Lighting levels
must be above normal parking provision. There is a dedicated parking space for VIP’s with a separate
access point. There should also be dedicated parking spaces for disabled people closer to the main
circulation with a signage that can indicate the dedicated space from the rest of the parking.
111
Day care
The Day care for the children is designed in accordance with the standards.
The Day care should be accessible for disabled people and close to drop off points. The division of the
area depends on the age range of the children, assuming most aged 2 or under, the playroom area should
have a clear floor space calculated by 3.7m2 per child.
This should be divided into separate areas for different age groups, with activity, noisy, and sleeping
areas.
Demountable partitions will assist in varying the size of space requirements. In addition, an area of
6.5m2 is required for children's toilets (one toilet and wash- hand basin for every 10 children aged
between 2 and 5). This area should also have adequate space for the storage of potties, and facilities for
washing and changing babies. There should also be a system for the disposal of nappies and the contents
of potties.
Space and plumbing for a washing machine will also be required. A kitchen area should be positioned
close to the area where children will be fed, and should be of a large enough size to allow access for
children under supervision.
The kitchen should not be located next to the toilets. An area should be provided for storage of buggies,
cloakroom and display area.
An enclosed outdoor play area is also required. All of these areas must be totally secure and accessed
from an entrance, which has no link with the main building.
Staff accommodation of could be provided if necessary. An office is required for the storage of records
and other documentation, and to allow staff to meet with parents in private. A break area / locker area
allows staff to take breaks away from the children and also to leave personal belongings, coats, etc. A
separate staff toilet and showering facilities should also be provided.
First Aid Rooms
There should be lobby access from any corridor and each room will have an en-suite WC/wash-hand
basin compartment. Care should be taken in the layout to allow for the maneuvering of a wheeled
stretcher or invalid chair.
The main staff area should be close to a toilet for disabled people and a lift capable of accommodating a
stretcher.
Communication and alarms will be wired to the Security Room to call for assistance. Various items of
furniture are required – couch and 2 chairs, bedside table, and inspection lamp and storage unit.
Baby Changing/Nursing Mother Room
There should be rooms dedicated to baby changing and nursing mother room
One room should be in the area where access is available to the Public and the other in the MP’s Staff
area.
Each room will have an en-suite WC/Wash-hand basin compartment and should also be sited close to a
112
toilet for disabled people. It will be fitted out as the First Aid Rooms with the addition of a mobile
changing trolley.
[The heights of the baby changing facility should be accessible and knee-space should be provided below
the units.]
Standby Generators
There is reference to this requirement in the Services Section. It is unlikely, given the exhaust fumes
from the diesel generating sets, which these would be in the building.
They may have to be sited in a landscaped area with vehicle access for oil deliveries and repairs.
Meters, Intakes and Plant-rooms
No specific allowance is made in the schedule of accommodation for these items, which are a product of
the engineering design. The space allocated should be kept to a minimum, compatible with the Health
and Safety Requirements, and is contained within the 20% allowed for stairs, lifts, plant rooms and
circulation.
Taxi Rank
A taxi rank is required, located outside the security railings and gates. The taxi will only enter the
Parliament building grounds when called by Security to pick up a passenger or when cleared by Security
to proceed into the pick-up bay at the Members’/Staff entrance.
CCTV
The external areas of the building car park, landscaped areas and entrance gates for pedestrian and
vehicles will be monitored by a CCTV camera system, adjusted via a PIDS alarm system.
Gatehouse
Security will require a gatehouse and / or a dedicated control point at the main vehicle and pedestrian
entrances to the site. This should have controls, telephones linked to the Security Room.
It is a building with office space access to cars on both sides and suitable for 2 persons to work in.
To offer the required protection, the building must be secure with laminated glass and security doors.
There should be toilet and tea making facilities.
Note: Sound Enhancement facilities to MP’s desks in the Halls and positions at Committee tables are
provided via the Audio and Electronic voting Console.
113
Architectural Finishing Schedule Guidelines and Special considerations
Room Floor Walls Ceiling Remarks

No. Name N S E W
1. Plaza A D D D D
2. Cafeteria D D D D D A
3. Kitchen F C C C C C
4. VIP Canteen F D D D D B
5. Check-in A D D D D B
6. Reception A D D D D B
7. Public Spaces A D D D D B/D
8. VIP Foyer A D D D D B
9. Exhibition A D D D D B
10. House Speaker office E D D D D A
11. Manager‟s office E D D D D A
12. MP‟s office E D D D D A
13. Standing committee E D D D D A
14. Offices E D D D D B
15. Meeting Halls E F F F F A
16. Library G D D D D B
17. Toilets & Bath Rooms B E/C E/C E/C E/C
18. Training Rooms A D D D D B
19. HOPR hall E F F F F A
20. HOF hall E F F F F A
21. Visitor center A C C C C A
22. Translation Booth E F F F F A
23. Grand stairs A A A A A A
24. Stairs A A A A A A
25. Fire stairs A A A A A A
26. Printing press A D D D D B
27. Parking F D D D D
Key-
Public spaces: Reception, Corridors, seating areas, Foyers,
Floor
A. Granite tiles
B. Marble tiles
114
C. Non slippery ceramic flooring laid with approved type adhesive glue including cement
sand screed and joints grouted.
D. Non slippery porcelain flooring laid with approved type adhesive glue including cement
sand screed and joints grouted.
E. Carpet of 80% pure wool and 20% polyamide fiber carpet of special permanent antistatic
with rubber latex under lay. all the necessary accessories as per manufacturer‟s
instructions (specifications)
F. Epoxy flooring-Apply High-build solvent free epoxy coating system as a protection at
2mm thickness.
G. Linoleum flooring
Walls
A. Granite wall tiles

B. Marble wall tiles
C. 6 mm thick glazed ceramic wall tiles placed with approved type adhesive glue and joints
grouted
D. Paint
E. Stainless steel edge High pressure laminated (HPL) solid phenolic urinal screens with
Scratch ,dent, moisture & impact resistant .With all the necessary accessories .color to
be approved by the Architect
F. Acoustic wall panels
Ceiling
A. Acoustic Ceiling Systems tiles that are high density glass wool, Class A fire while back
tile is covered in glass tissue
B. Open grid aluminum ceiling for external parts with suspension system from the structure
above using rigid rods and adjustable spring clips. With all the necessary accessories as
per manufacturer‟s instructions (specifications)
C. Hygiene Performance Ceiling Systems. The panels shall have brighter visual with 20%
more light reflectance than vinyl-covered gypsum; the panels are intended for
environments where there is a risk of slight contamination and where cleaning is
required regularly and where there are occasional high humidity levels.
D. Sky light roof cover according to the details with 16mm thick poly carbonate sheet with
UV Protection and aluminum frame bracings all according to the manufactures
instruction. The steel support structure should be according to structural design. With all
the necessary accessories as per manufacturer‟s instructions (specifications) should be
included.
 Glass and aluminum:

o Aluminum framed windows, window doors and doors as per ISO standard aluminum
frame Profile thickness should be 2mm anodized thickness 15-25 micro unit & all fixing
accessories should be of same standard as that of the profile. Complete work
according to supplier‟s instruction.
115
 Accessories:
o Architectural metal sun louvers made up of aluminum extrusion or aluminum panel.
The surface of the panel can be anodized or powered coated. The installed can be
either vertically or horizontally according to the design and the angle of the sunshine.
With all the necessary accessories as per manufacturer‟s instructions (specifications)
o conference seat with an average size of 96x57cm, made of High-density plastic seat
liner and integral polyurethane foam upholstered in fabric and Back shell upholstered
with all accessories of interchangeable Seat and Back Blocks, TS system, translation
box, anti-panic writing tablet(integrated folding table),document holder and other
important accessories.(Provisional sum)
o Vehicle Gate with Standard Flange with Up/Down/Normal Switch, up to 5m long – or
jointed barrier arms.
 Special features
1. Building envelopes of HOPR, HOF and visitor center: the Contractor must submit final
design for the envelope designs following the preliminary design and renderings of the
Consultant for final conformity.
2. Partition systems for offices: Internal partition systems for offices are with Anodized
aluminum frame solid construction structure, 80mm clip on aluminum skirting, 6mm
thick double glazed, integrated venetian blinds incorporated within the double glazed
with 15mm slate width, manual knob cover made of aluminum and anodized surface
with steel wires for control the venetian rollover 180° and ≤48db sound insulation.
116
Annex B - Structural design references

Structural design references
1. Scope of the Structural Concept Development
Outlined herewith is the structural concept development for the design of one of the kind New
Ethiopian parliament building. The concept level development focuses on describing the basis
of structural design and conceptual configurations and considerations of the special structures.
N.B. The three drums - halls are the noted special structures
2. Design Stage
Concept development level
3. Introductory
The project of the construction of the new Ethiopian parliament building project is an ambitious
project taken up by the Ethiopian government. The plan is to construct bigger and modern, state
of the art Parliament building for Ethiopia. The building is to be located right across where the
current parliament building is. It is to be incorporated with existing features such as the existing
parliament, surrounding churches, parks, hotel and other surrounding features.
Major features of the project include;
The drums: Are the representative features of the parliament building; the winning character of
the project. The drum shape concept as discussed and reflected in the architectural design is
the major feature which is to have a floor and a roof with no intermediate floor. The structural
configuration should match the architectural design and shouldn‟t alter the 'purity of the form'
and the intended configuration.
Security: Border and transition zone focuses on protection and security of the highest office in
the country. The option of physical security zone, buffers and or green buffer zone is viable.
However, design for blast may be necessary for selected areas as peripheral structures and
entrance areas.
Sustainability: As much as possible the materials, workmanship and technology for construction
should comply with what is locally available.
4. Type of Design
The feasible and chosen type of design is Reinforced Concrete Design. This is due to the
major advantages of achieving the irregular shape of the structures (form flexibility), technical
knowhow, material availability, durability, fire resistance and other desirable features.
For selected structural elements however, the use of steel construction is more feasible and
hence considered. For instance, the roof systems of the drums are preferred to be space truss
system.
The Transfer elements proposed for the drums, as discussed later on, would be subjected to
large stress concentrations. For these elements, the use of steel concrete composite or
prestressed
construction may be feasible.
5. Method of Construction
As Reinforced concrete is the basic type of design and construction chosen, the construction
would be cast in situ. Medium to high grade concrete is envisaged to be used.
Pre-stressing may to be used to achieve large spans efficiently and cost effectively. The use of
pre stressing may also be advantageous to be used for the transfer elements construction.
117
Concrete admixtures may be used to speed up the construction work and also give other
desirable features as required.
6. Sustainability
Maximizing the use of local available construction material and technique is also another
important feature. To this end, the use of Reinforced concrete system is preferred as both
concrete and steel reinforcement are easily available. The knowhow of designing and building
with reinforced concrete system is by far better than handling other types of construction in
Ethiopia.
7. Realization of the Architectural Plan
As ever, the role of the structural engineer is giving the architects dream flesh and bone and
realizing it. Therefore it is of paramount importance that the architectural plan be properly
achieved as much as possible. With the basic three pillars of any structural design being safety,
serviceability and economy; a fourth pillar for this project is the realization of the architectural
plan.
One very important concept of the architectural plan is the 'purity of form' of the drums. The
appearance and hence the structural configuration of the drums should be separated from the
rest of the structure.
8. Design Standards
The design standards to be used for design and construction is the newly revised Ethiopian
building code with is consistent with Euro code standards. For areas not covered by the
Eurocode
reference to the American code ACI is made.
9. Design Aspects and Loads
Limit state design (LSD) procedure is followed for the analysis and design of the structure.
Therefore proper design of Ultimate and Serviceability limit state should be carried out. In doing
so, the following loads and combinations of loads are taken into account.
The basic principle of LSD, stating dependable strength should exceed factored loading is the
concept for arranging and detailing structural members. Failure should always be ductile and
the proper hierarchy should be kept.
Gravity
Dead Loads
Self-weight
Finishes
Partitions
Live Loads
Loads shall be considered as per the desired functionalities
Eg: for Assemblies take 5.0KPa
118
Fig 1.1: Loading Intensity, live load

Wind
Reference wind speed for Addis Ababa is 22m/s.
The structure being low rise and higher portion of it lying below natural ground level wind action
is not of major concern.
Nevertheless, wind action on the drums/ halls roofs and facades does need to be carried out.
Earthquake
Fig 1.2: Magnitude and frequency of past earthquakes in Ethiopia
119
Fig 1.3: Seismic hazard Map along the Horn of Africa as per the recently revised Ethiopian building code
According to the revised Ethiopian Building code and seismic hazard map of Ethiopia, Peak
ground acceleration for Addis Ababa is PGA= 0.1g
Considering the functionality, high congregation of people and huge capital investment 50%
amplification is considered.
Design PGA= 0.15g
Taking the appropriate importance class of the building; class III= 1.20
Thus, 0.15gx1.20= 0.18g
It is important to define performance levels corresponding to intermediate level seismic action
for achieving desirable performance during lower level seismic action.
Table 1.1: Performance levels
Performance Level Design PGA

Life safety 0.18g 0.18g
Operational (Limitation Damage) 0.11g 0.11g
Fully Operational 0.07g
Vertical Earthquake
In addition to the conventional horizontal Earthquake action, Vertical earthquake should be
considered especially for the large cantilevers, large spans and flexible structural zones.
Lateral Earth Pressure
Both static and dynamic effects of lateral earth pressure have to be accounted for. Due to
architectural and landscape configuration; the structure is subjected to unbalanced/directional
lateral earth pressure which may be governing.
120
Fire Resistance and Durability

The advantage of choosing Reinforced concrete type of construction is concrete's innate
behavior for better fire resistance and durability.
Minimum three Hours of fire resistance is an appropriate fire rating for determining minimum
thickness of members and the corresponding concrete cover.
In accordance to the environmental influences and exposures, both requirements of fire
resistance and durability shall be addressed with suitable concrete cover.
Temperature Effects
One of the reasons to divide the structure into blocks, as discussed later, is to control the effect
of temperature strains.
Effect of temperature for the design of the deep transfer elements should be accounted for.
Concrete mix design, casting methods and design also should take temperature effects into
account.
10. Structural System
The three main features of any structural design are having adequate stiffness, adequate
strength and ductility.
The stiffness - rigidity requirement is directly related to structural arrangements and sizes.
Despite the key advantageous feature of the structure being low rise, it has irregular
arrangement both in plan and elevation with numerous slab protrusions and large spans.
Reinforced concrete.
The bulk of the structure cannot be designed and constructed as one. Separation of the
structure into independent blocks is of course mandatory. The key parameters for the division of
the structure with separation/expansion joints are;
To have simple, fairly regular blocks that is of prime features of seismic design.
Ease of construction, separated blocks is easier to manage during construction and
scheduling.
Ease and dependability of the design; smaller, simpler blocks lead to more accurate
analysis and of lesser effort.
Temperature effects control; Expansions provide safe accommodation gap for material
temperature strains due to variations.
The envisaged separation blocks are as shown below,
121
Fig 1.4: The structure separated into blocks
The feasible and better structural system suiting accordingly is Dual system configuration where
interacting frame system and walls resist both gravity and lateral loads. This system is also
suitable to better address the other two requirements of adequate strength and ductility.
Columns as shown on the architectural plan can be a starting configuration of the frame system,
while elevator cores, stair enclosures could be made structural walls. Additional walls as
required may be added after preliminary analysis and in consultation with the architects.
The degree of stiffness required is determined by the following key features;
Safety requirements, limited level of displacement so that second order effects are kept
as low as possible.
No pounding between adjacent blocks; the separation between adjacent blocks should
be constructible and should be large enough to accommodate the lateral displacement
of the adjacent structures during design level loading. It should also be limited to not
deter serviceability or create aesthetic problems. Hence, better rigidity results in smaller
displacement and hence smaller separation joint which are better manageable and
constructible.
The two way frame wall system is better enhanced with the provision of intermediate beams to
improve on overall stiffness and decrease the mass (slab thickness) of the structure. This also
makes the structure more redundant, robust and economical but perhaps more time consuming
for construction. For instance the slab over the parking area is ideally suited for the use of
secondary/intermediate beams for better efficiency.
Strength Requirements - Limit state design principle shall be followed and hence the structure
shall be designed for both ultimate and serviceability limit states. Accordingly, the following limit
122
states are considered for analysis and design.

Ultimate Limit States of
Loss of Equilibrium,
Rupture,
Instability and
Fatigue
Serviceability Limit States of
Excessive deflection
Excessive crack width
Ductility Requirements - Directly related to design for Earthquake, sufficient ductility is an

important requirement for any structure located in seismically active zones such as this
structure. Different levels of performance shall be defined during different range of earthquake
levels. Sufficient level of ductility shall be provided to safely support the structure during design
level of shaking.
Generalized Load Path and Configuration for the Blocks
A thin slab supported on beam system would create a rigid and strong platform for usage as
intended. The beam system may be spanning from support to support and/or may be with
intermediate beams supported on other beams. The beams would transfer shear and
unbalanced moment to supporting columns and walls which in turn would transfer to the ground
below.
System stiffness and safety requirements would generally determine sections sizes and
arrangement which would be refined with strength requirements. Along with ductility
requirements, strength requirements would entail reinforcement requirements and
arrangements.
Special Structures: The Drums
The drum shape concept for the halls is the outstanding feature of the structure which is to have
a floor and a roof with no intermediate floor. Two distinct structural concepts are developed for
the three drums as discussed herewith.
Hall 1/- HoPR Hall/ Drum 1
123
Fig 1.5: Architectural plan of HoPR hall, below main hall level
Fig 1.6: Architectural plan of HoPR hall, main hall level
124
Fig 1.7: 3D sketch of HoPR hall
Structural floors:
Two options are considered for providing the suspended main hall level slab
1. A slab - beam system/ plate system supported on wall structures, shown on plan levels of -
12.16m and -8.34m on the architectural drawings, would create a flat, rigid platform designated
as the technical area on the AR plan. The stepping floor of the hall would be supported on rigid
platform below with a truss system or planted columns from it. This stepping floor would
preferably be intricately supported to make it as light as possible. Care should be taken to
achieve to avoid excessive vibration, sound during serviceability. Moreover, the support system
over the technical area, functional area for any maintenances necessary, shouldn't create
difficulties for maneuvering and maintenance work.
2. The other option is to make the bottom technical floor and the top stepping floor tension and
compression flanges of a deep slab beam system connected by webs preferably along the
sitting lines of HoPR above. This option is perhaps more efficient and stiffer but more
challenging for construction and also design.
Vertical Supports for the roof above:
Since there would not be any interior columns/ walls; the only possible option is to support the
roof on the exterior structure. Therefore the skin of the building would be used as a structural
element.
The main challenge of this Drum is the design to safely take down the roof load through the
Structural facade to ground. Adding to the challenge, the facade and hence the roof supporting
system is inclined outwards and shouldn't lose with the facade concept as per the architectural
plan.
125
Fig 1.8: Inclined facades to be used as structural elements supporting the roof, HoPR hall
The proposal for the facade is to have 3 or 4 interlocking branches of distinct structural element
configurations with dummy members, serving the architectural function only, repeated
throughout the peripheral. These branches shall be preferably configured to take axial
compressive forces from the ring beam proposed to support the roof structure.
A consistent method of design, strut and tie method, may be more preferable to
analyze and design the structural skin. Elastic method of analysis shall also be
carried out to stress trajectories, concentrations and load path also verify outputs.
126
Fig 1.9: Sketches of interlocking structural facades that can be used to support the roof system
Ring Beam:
Deep ring beam is envisaged to be used to directly support the roof structure. This deep beam
would in turn be supported on the structural facade. The ring beam would also tie the outward
branching facade structure and stabilize it. The depth of the section shall be deep enough to
transfer the roof load as axial compressions to the supporting facade for better efficiency and
dependability.
Roof System:
The most feasible roof system would be space truss system.
Arching form can increase better efficiency in taking the load by compression.
The architectural requirement to have a flat roof should also be achieved with light system over
the space truss.
Drainage is also another important aspect of the roof design to be considered.
Halls 2 and 3/ HoF and Visitor Center
The structural systems of these two halls are proposed to be similar as described herewith.
The distinctive feature of these two blocks is that they are raised and supported on 3 mega
columns only. The independency of these structures from the rest of the structure is another key
feature.
The purity of the forms as described by the architects should be achieved.
127
Fig 1.10: Hall 2, HoF hall
Fig 1.11: Hall 3, Visitor's centre
Mega Columns:
The mega columns, each three on each block are arranged on stable triangular shape to
support the entire hall load.
The column sizes would be governed by stiffness and as much as strength requirements. To
give them sufficient rigidity, the section is better arranged to result in higher moment of inertia.
128
Fig 1.12: Hall 2, structural columns arrangement and transfer system
Fig 1.13: Concept level structural model for Hall 2, HoF
Transfer structure:
The plan configuration of the functional levels and supporting levels are not the same as seen.
Therefore, transfer elements should be used to transfer superstructure loads to the three
columns.
These transfer plate/ plate-beam would be subjected large stress concentrations and hence
careful analysis and design is necessary. The main design concern would be to achieve the
necessary rigidity to create the base platform necessary to be occupied and also support the
rest of the structure.
Dependable load path and redundancy are other key aspects of the transfer element design.
Pre-stressing may be used to enhance the load carrying capacity and make the element leaner
and economical.
129
Structural Facade and Roof Support

Similar to HoPR Hall, the facade of the HoF Hall is also inclined outwards while that of the
visitors center is inclined inwards.
In HoF Hall; the outer part of the supporting mega columns can be suitably extended to the
peripheral system to support the significant portion of the roof structure. Planted structural
facade elements can also assist in taking the roof above and transferring it downwards.
Ring Beam and Roof structure:
Similar treatments and considerations can be made to HoPR hall as discussed above.
Foundation elements
The mega columns are preferably supported on deep foundation elements to safely take down
the high concentration of load to a deeper, stronger soil layer.
Extreme care should be taken to avoid differential support movements since the transfer
structures are very sensitive to it.
Connected deep foundation seams the feasible approach considering the loading and the
rigidity requirement.
11. Structural Robustness

Structural Robustness/General structural integrity is resistance to progressive collapse.
Redundancy, reserve capacity and alternative load path are parameters to seek for good design
of structural robustness.
This may not be necessary considering the high level of expected security for the building.
Despite though, general structural integrity would provide additional level of safety and hence is
desirable especially for structural elements near entrances and other susceptible zones.
12. Constructability
The design outputs should be as simple as possible, but no simpler for proper construction
work.
Details and arrangement of members should be simple for proper construction and to reduce
uncertainties.
Construction stage analysis of special elements should be properly accounted and necessary
formwork scheduling and method, sequence of construction should be identified and detailed.
13. Geotechnical Investigation
Appropriate geotechnical investigation is always important and mandatory input for the analysis
and design of any structure. Determination of ground type is one of the important inputs for
seismic design.
For such structures with numerous separation joints, special care is needed for determining
settlement properties of the underlying bearing strata.
Extra care is needed in determining settlement properties for the bearing strata of the smaller
two drums, HoF and Visitors Centre since proposed transfer elements are extremely sensitive to
differential support movement.
The loads of the smaller two drums, HoF and Visitors Centre, concentrate on three supporting
columns and hence would be very large. The depth of influence would therefore be deep. The
geotechnical investigation should therefore take this aspect into account.
130
Annex C - Electrical design

I. ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
The electrical installation works were designed based on local building code (EBCS – 10
– Ethiopian Building Standard Code – 10), rules, regulations, standards and norms
followed by the Ethiopian Electric Power (EEP), FDRE HOF & HOPR/The Engineer on
one hand and foreign relevant international standards like BS (British Standards), IEC
(International Electro – Technical Commission) on the other hand.
Scope of Work
1. Power Supply System
2. Lighting Installation
General purpose lighting, Emergency lighting, Escape lighting, Safety lighting
2.1. Lighting Luminaires
2.2Switch
2.2.1. esthetics
2.2.2. Height
2.2.3. A mpacity
2.3.4. Circutry
3. Socket and Power Installation
4. Distribution board
5. Lightning Protection System
6. Lift, Escalator power supply system
7. Manhole and pipes
8. Compound lighting system
1. POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
The electrical power system shall consist of Secondary MV switchgear with dual 15kV utility
in-feeds from two directions which shall be backed by LV diesel generator sets and stepped
up to 15kV and connected to a 15kV bus running in parallel (synchronized at LV and each
Gen-set feed connected at MV bus after step up) microprocessor controlled to have one of
the three inputs is operating at a time based upon a suitable & configurable criterion. The
solution shall include closed type transition from generator operation to utility operation to
minimize the number of interruptions at each utility outage occurrence. At each distribution
transformer location a centralized UPS system shall be provided for all final circuits except
kitchen equipment, corridor socket outlets, heaters, motors, office lighting. All others shall
be connected to the UPS for a no break operation, with the battery autonomy not more than
10minutes because of the backup generators for extended operation.
Equipment required expected for above scheme is;
I. Secondary MV switchgear (IEC 62271-200)SF6 gas insulated(IEC 62271-303) with
automation components (IEC 62271-3), factory assembled, type-tested, three pole, metal-
enclosed, metal-clad, single bus bar for indoor installation, feeder and busbar currents of
630A-3P consisting of all standard accessories like voltage sensors per section (IEC
131
62271-206) , surge protection devices, 3-poition switch with load break/isolating/make

proof earthing switch (IEC 62271-102) etc and sufficient cable entry clearance with floor
ducts and/or panel bottom section installed as per IEC 61936-1;
a. Feeder line section -motorized MV vacuum circuit breaker with electronic (SLIG) trip
and measurement unit for load monitoring and control. (IEC 62271-100)
b. Metering section –voltage transformers, current transformers (utility class), voltage,
current, frequency, power factor, %harmonic distortion indicator (electronic). (IEC
60044-1,2,3)
c. Output section (Ring or radial) – motorized MV vacuum circuit breaker with
electronic (SLIG) trip and measurement unit for load monitoring and control.
d. Transformer section -motorized MV vacuum circuit breaker with electronic (SLIG) trip
and measurement unit for load monitoring and control.
e. Sectionalizer panel -motorized MV vacuum circuit breaker with electronic (SLIG) trip
and measurement unit for load monitoring and control.
II. Diesel generator sets of varying sizes shall be used, to increase steps in generator
switching and to allow for optimized load handling operation with 500kVA, 1000kVA,
1500kVA ratings –and power the complex with 10% spare capacity at maximum
demand. The generating units shall be of prime duty –being able to handle
system70% maximum demand load continuously for a 24 hours per day PRP (ISO
8528-1). The generating sets shall be certified by EPA for the level of class they are
operating in and shall be enclosed in sound attenuating canopy including residential
class exhaust silencer (80dBA maximum @ 1m). Complete units i.e. diesel engine,
electrical generators, controllers shall be manufactured by the same company for
optimal system operation. Control unit with microprocessor for paralleling, load
management function for optimal load generator matching at any one time,
generator status monitoring, and communication interface for remote management
and control shall be used for power system control. The control unit shall integrate
the MV & LV system into one interface for simple and easy to use management
functionality. Operational conditions like primary power source, allowable voltage
drop before source transfer, time delay before transfer, generator starting and load
pickup/dropping commands, generator to load-correlation optimizing algorithm, etc.
shall be adjustable on site with simple intuitive GUI based interface. All relevant
settings and status for engines, generators, LV/MV switchgear, utility source
conditions, shall be made available at the remote control unit in addition to each
monitored/controlled unit. The network communication shall preferably be over IP
network with the structured cabling put in place and with native IP functionality (no
gateways and protocol translations etc.). The power system network shall be
protected from all threats with standard security measures including hierarchical
password protection -management/operations/monitoring level access, firewall, and
antivirus etc. software. Any alarm on any one system shall be delivered over the
132
network to the control system, and in addition to all management, security, and
technical people in charge of building operation via email, sms, or voice mail
immediately.
a. Diesel Generating Set designed and manufactured as per ISO 8528 standards.
b. Testing & commissioning to be performed as per ISO 8528-2.
c. Turbo charged, direct injection type, with high fuel efficiency.
d. Generator sets shall be manufactured and tested to have low level of internal
vibrations from internal normal operations to ISO1940.
e. The generator set shall have seismic load isolator as per IBC requirements.
f. EMC compatibility to IEC 61000-6-2, & 6-4.
g. Shall have standard fuel filter with water separator, combination full flow and bypass
oil filer, and dry replaceable air filter with sufficient spare for the warranty period.
h. Standard water cooled radiator system skid mounted on generator set.
i. Shall be of 1500 rpm rated speed, with electronic governor (±0.5% no load to full load
regulation), 24 Volts DC cranking battery system, with electrical charging system from
utility feed.
j. Alternator shall be brushless, designed for 220/380V, 50Hz nominal voltage and
frequency, with class H insulation, directly mounted blower fan, and THD < 5%, stator
winding temperature sensor with terminal box with terminal sufficient for the cable
sizes specified.
k. The generator sets shall be skid mounted on rails, with 8 hours day tank fuel capacity
on the chassis, all necessary circuits for battery chargers, fuel pumps etc.
l. The generator set shall accept full rated power in one step. Expected maximum load
step is 250kW – from HVAC load of each parliamentary hall during normal generator
operating conditions. The HVAC startup command shall have a control input to the
power system to enable the power system to be prepared during generator operation
for the starting of the HVAC related motors, etc. by starting generator sets necessary
to accommodate the surge in power demand.
m. The generator set capacity shall be de-rated for the site altitude, temperature, relative
humidity conditions.
n. Central fuel storage tanker of 20,000 liters capacity to be installed below grade as per
fuel supplier specifications.
o. External fuel pump for pumping fuel from central fuel storage tank to day tank with
automatic pump controller, all necessary valves, fuel supply and return lines, vents,
collecting pans, and flame screen, etc.
p. Provide sufficient room space for the generator set mounting including space for
switching and control equipment, and provide sufficient air intake and exhaust grill
system to maintain acceptable engine supply and ventilation air.
133
q. Generator-set control panel with full monitoring capability of engine, alternator, and
control equipment including communication interface for power system
management/control functionality described on the previous chapter.
r. Air circuit breaker of appropriate size suitable with electronic trip unit (SLIG) matched
with generator system.
s. Grounding of system unit.
III. Step-up power transformers (630, 1250, 1600kVA) are used for changing LV to MV
at each generator set electrical output. The outputs are terminated at the MV system
bus with the utility in-feeds with automated MV switchgear as described earlier for
fully automated power system solution. The transformers LV terminals shall not be
connected in parallel with each other to avoid loop currents. The transformers shall
be matched with each generator set it is connected to with capacity to accommodate
10% short time overload capacity.
a. Shall be manufactured according to IEC 60076 standard, for 15/0.4 kV, 50Hz
operation, shall be AF type cast resin with thermistor inside windings for
monitoring coil temperature and operate base mounted fans including
communication interface for remote administration and status indication.
b. Shall be mounted on wheels for easy transportation and anchored in place during
operation.
c. Coils shall be aluminum with 6% short circuit impedance and vector group of
Dyn11, insulation class of F, Environmental class E3, Climate class C2, & fire
class F1. Appropriate de-rating shall be employed for site altitude, temperature,
and humidity values.
d. Efficiency shall be better than 98% at full load, and power factor of 0.8.
e. Shall be open type and installed inside accessible room with enough clearance
space from adjacent wall/transformers, protected from weather conditions, and
with sufficient air intake/discharge grill provision to maintain acceptable room
temperature.
IV. MV cables in single core format shall be used for utility and generator supply from
utility drop externally and MV transformer internally to MV switchgear. Cables shall
be run inside cement pipes of 200mm for utility intake and inside trenches/trays for
generator feeds. Cables shall be manufactured to IEC 60502-2 standard, for 15kV
nominal rated voltage, with plain annealed compacted class 2 circular conductors to
IEC 60228, including XLPE insulation, semi-conducting layer with a copper tape
screen cover for each core, PVC bedding, SWA or AWA, PVC sheath for a
maximum operating temperature of 90°C, designed for low smoke classification
complying with EN50266-1, and IEC 61034-1.
V. The UPS system shall be a 220/380V, 50Hz, 5wires, 3-phase system input and
output , with THD less than 5% and unity power factor at the output, delta conversion
134
scheme for online operation and high efficiency (>90% at 50% loading). System shall
have N+1 redundancy in the Power, Control, and Battery modules with hot swap
capability. In addition it shall have full equipment monitoring capability both locally
and at power system control station as described earlier for system health, voltage,
current, frequency, THD, battery status etc. Finally it shall be compatible with the
generator sets installed for seamless operation. There shall be two 1.25MVA
capacity and one of 0.80MVA.
Power distribution is done through MV cable to the two remote distribution locations inside
cable trays with shortest possible routing and terminated at the MV switchgear and
distribution transformers with a similar specification like the power house units except the
MV cables shall consist of NON-PVC compounds for all the insulating and bedding and
shall not include armoring for easier installation on bends. The design temperature shall be
reduced to 70°C to protect internal building parts from heating up. The power house at the
distribution stations shall be large enough to accommodate MV switchgear, transformer, LV
distribution panel, and shall have air inlet and air outlet louvers for natural ventilation of
rooms.
a. MV switchgear specification shall be same as above at the power house.
b. MV cables shall be plain annealed compacted class 2 circular conductors to IEC
60228, including XLPE insulation, semi-conducting layer with a copper tape
screen cover for each core, bedding, fire-retardant and halogen free polyolefin
sheath for a maximum operating temperature of 70°C, designed for low smoke
and flame retardant classification complying with EN50266-1, IEC 61034, and IEC
60332-1 suitable for indoor use.
VI. All wiring shall follow TNC-S earth format with the panel chassis bonded to system
ground terminal. All main breakers shall be ACB or MCCB type with electronic trip unit
including measuring units (Voltage, current, frequency, power factor, Harmonics etc)
and fitted with communication units for remote monitoring with Ethernet IP
communication.
a. Surface/floor standing panels to IEC 61439
b. Switchgear and components to IEC 60947
c. All socket outlet circuits shall be protected by final circuit MCB/RCD protective
device combination with 16A/32mA size to IEC 60947-2.
d. All lighting circuits shall be protected by final circuit MCB of 16A with additional
digital lighting control interface (KNX switch) in series.
e. All emergency and essential circuits shall be protected by final circuit breakers of
appropriate size and shall include auxiliary contacts which shall indicate faults at
the power system monitoring facility through monitoring of the contact.
135
f. All equipment supply circuits shall be protected by appropriately sized circuit

breakers primarily sized to protect the feeder cables. All equipment shall have its
own protective/control circuit protection device.
VII. Electrical circuit installation shall be done according to IEC 60364 recommendations.
Installation shall consist of wiring, wire support and fixing, wire identification, wire
labeling and physical wire protection means. All wiring shall be with flame retardant
cables of LSZH sheath/insulation specifications to IEC 60502-1 and conductors shall
be copper as per IEC 60228. All final circuits wiring from sub-distribution boards
shall be run inside cable trays laid along corridors and electric room shafts with cable
ties at 1.0m spacing. Cable trays shall be perforated type with cover for better
ventilation and rodent control, manufactured from hot-dip galvanized steel and
supported from the roof slab by appropriate brackets at spacing as per manufacturer
specifications and cable loading per section. At the final circuit locations, cabling
shall be run clipped to concrete roof every 50cm with surface mounted junction
boxes with insulating terminals, on or near the trays at the corridor, for better
accessibility. Where screws are used for connections motorized screw drivers with
torque settings are used to screw terminals as per manufacturers‟ recommendations.
To minimize cabling KNX multiple actuators can be located at each final circuit
location on roof slab inside protective boxes per lighting circuit. Alternatively as
stated earlier KNX actuators can be placed at the distribution panels with multiple
cabling being run to each separately controlled office. KNX cabling shall be flame
retardant and LSZH type and shall be run in a separate compartment to the power
and data cabling. KNX cabling shall follow standard KNX wiring format with a
maximum of 54 devices per line (with 10 left as reserve). The KNX system shall be
integrated at the power monitoring center for remote monitoring and control through
IP gateway/interface and shall include KNX type wall switches at individual spaces,
movement sensors with daylight monitoring or logic/timer operators for public space
lighting control.
a. Socket outlet circuits – run inside cable tray – conduit drop recessed inside
wall
b. Lighting circuits –run inside cable tray –surface mounted fixed to ceiling slab -
wall light/switch drop inside conduit drops recessed inside walls.
c. Others as per individual conditions with proper mechanical, and electrical
protection scheme
VIII. Installation components (switches, sockets, data outlets etc) shall be of the same
series (Switches & sockets could differ but should have the same color). Lighting
switches for KNX control shall satisfy IEC 60669-2-5 standards.
a. Switches shall be installed at 1.20m height above finished floor level unless
indicated otherwise.
b. Electric and data socket outlets shall be installed at 0.5m above finished floor
level in offices at desk locations, corridors and other public places. At TV
outlet locations electric and data outlets shall be installed at 1.20m above
finished floor level.
136
c. Hand drier socket outlets shall be installed at 1.20m above finished floor
level.
d. Other equipment outlet shall be installed as per equipment manufacturers‟
recommendations.
2.1 Lighting Installation
2.1.1 General Lighting
All lighting system shall utilize LED lamps, with luminaries of one same brand but differ
in size and lumen output and high degree of protection for various areas. The
Luminaires shall be environmental friendly for using LED lamps that has no carbon
emission and heat development. The LED lamps have 30,000-50,000 hours service life
time, and have low power consumption for the same or better lumen output than TL–D
fluorescent lamps.
All lighting fixtures shall be LED type with class A or better energy efficiency class as
per EU directives. LED lamp units shall have bulb useful life of 50000 hours with
L80B50 (for L –lumen output of 80% of initial value and B-batch survival rate of 50%) for
quality indication certified by an independent laboratory.
The illumination level on the task shall be:

Office – 300 lux
Conference room – 500 lux
Circulation area & corridor – 200 lux
Stairs & escalators – 200 lux
Auditorium – 400 lux
Parking lots – 150 lux
The above recommended illumination levels were taken from „Philips lighting manual –
third edition with certain modification as per our national context. Philips is the first
company that achieves 200 lumen per watt from its LED lamps and that is how energy
efficiency is maximized.
Lighting installation shall be carried out through PVC cables of 3x2.5sq.mm in conduits
of ø16mm in/under surface including junction boxes, screw type insulating caps cover,
all complete with switches.
Standards used
ES 1537:2005 for cable

ES IEC:2006 for conduit system
IEC 60364 for electrical installation of building.
Under lighting installation, there are few items to be presented. These are general
lighting which was briefed earlier:
Emergency lighting
Escape lighting
Safety lighting
137
2.1.1.1 Emergency lighting
These lighting shall be operated during failure of the main power. The duration shall be at
least one hour for there will be a standby generator that shall supply power for the whole
system. Emergency lighting Luminaires was provided as per standard ES 1431:2005.
2.1.1.2 Escape lighting
During fire all power supplies shall be out of services. Hence, for employees to go out of
the building, at least an illumination of one lux shall be obtained.
2.1.1.3 Safety lighting
When both the national grid and generator power fails, people shall leave the building
safely. To do so, the illumination level at that time shall be a minimum of 5% of normal
lighting which is 5% of 500 lux which is 25 lux.
2.1.3 Switches
2.1.2.1Lighting switches in the office area will be of 10amp/1ph.
2.1.2.2 Lighting switches in the office area will be within the room
2.1.2.3 Height of switches in all location will be at 1.20mts above finished floor while
for disabled room it will be 90cms
2.1.2.4 Lighting switches in the parking lots will be of 16amp/1ph concentrated in a
convenient location.
3. Socket and Power Installation
1.1. Socket outlets Installation
Socket outlets shall be fed through PVC cable of 3x2.5sq.mm in plastic conduits of ø16mm
in/under surface including junction boxes screw type insulating caps and cover all
complete. Socket outlet in the office area will be flush mounted type of 16amp/1ph with
earthing contact. Socket outlets were distribution according to the furnished Architectural
drawings. For offices, where there are no walls in the nearby, sockets were provided
through floor boxes as shown on the drawing.
For offices area sockets will be twin type. Water heater socket outlets will be water tight
and of 16amp/1ph with earthing contacts and switches. Sockets in general will be fixed at
a height of 40cms unless indicated otherwise, while water heater sockets shall be fixed at
a height of 1.5mts above finished floor level.
1.2. Power outlet installation

Power outlets are provided for mechanical, sanitary and data system equipment‟s. The
rating of circuit‟s breakers and cable sizes depend on the power requirement of the
equipment‟s. Power outlets cables will be three wires for single phase and five wires for
three phases.
4. Main and SUB Distribution Boards
LV distribution panels shall all be factory assembled to satisfy IEC 61439 standards, for
138
verification of design, materials, fabrication, and installation. All panels shall be either
surface or floor mounted with metallic enclosure with main/sub-main and sub panels
having 4b and 2b forms-of-separation respectively and shall have 25% extra space for
future expansion and shall be always be installed placed in protected electric rooms with
no direct access to the public. All distribution panel cascaded arrangement shall be
designed to have full short circuit current discrimination between upstream and
downstream breakers. All switchgear components shall satisfy IEC 60947 standards and
shall be fixed with fixing plates or Ω rail, and fed from copper bus-bars or distribution
terminals (>80A) or comb bus bars (<=80A), fully wired to numbered terminals with copper
conductors with appropriately sized end sleeves. Neutral and earth terminals shall be
provided with sufficient connection for all neutral and ground terminations and 10% extra.
Circuit identification shall be placed on the inside cover. All cable entry in and out of the
panels shall be through appropriately sized cable glands and shall be arranged for top
entry unless indicated otherwise. Cables having cross-sections larger than 35mm² shall be
terminated on bus-bar terminals with appropriately sized cable lugs. All connections shall
be done with clean and orderly manner and with no mechanical stress on the terminals or
cables.
Main and Sub Distribution board will be surface, flush and floor standing type made of
single galvanized sheet steel panel with lockable door. Degree of protection will be IP 43
and IP30 when door closed and opened respectively. Distribution boards will consist single
and triple pole circuits breakers and other components. The current rating and type of
each panel are indicated on the appropriate distribution board schedules.
There will be top and bottom entry knock outs and/or glands matching the number and
size of cables. Bigger distribution boards especially the floor standing type will be factory
tested. Inside the board, wiring will be completed to with stand the maximum short circuit
at the bus bar. There shall be a plastic card fixed to the inside of the lid with circuit number
of all the outlets fed from each distribution way and circuit breaker rating, typed and printed
on the card or presented in similar legible manner in English. The bus bar or phase bar will
be made of copper and will stand to carry full load current. The main and sub – distribution
board will be install in the position indicated on the drawing.
5. Lightning Protection system

The building will fully provide with conventional lightning arrestor system to protect it from
lightning strike. The arrestor point will be on the two extreme side of the roof (i.e. on axis
EF; LM and axis 30, 32) and this will be repeated for other four building as well (i.e.
keeping axis EL, LM as it is the other axis will be [(2,4), (9,11), (16,18) and (23,25)]. The
preventer head will be fixed on mast. The mast will then be anchored to the roof using guy
wires, bolts and nuts. There will be a copper tape from preventer head down to the test
point. At test point, the copper tape and the bare copper conductor that comes from the
earthing rod will be properly interconnected using metal clips. The earthing resistance
measured at the test point shall be measured to be less that 5 ohms.
139
6. Lifts, Escalator power supply system

Power from bus way shall be tapped to distribution board through PVC sheath cable of
5x10sq.mm. at the bus way there will be plug in breaker when the cable will be connected
to.
7. Manholes, and Pipes

Manholes will be constructed by double brick walls plastered in 1:3 ratios (Cement to
Sand). The size depends on the number and cross sectional area of cable passing through
it. Manhole should also allow the minimum bending radius of cables. Manholes will have
reinforced concrete (RC) cover that will be opened whenever in need. The handle will be
capable to withstand weight of the cover without bend. The bottom of the manholes will be
5cm lean concrete.
Pipes will be from concrete or rigid plastic. Pipe sizes will be determined by the number of
cables passing through it. The works that will be carried for constructing manhole and
laying pipes shall be described in the bill of quantities.
8. Compound lighting system

The compound will be illuminated on steel pole erected lighting luminaries. The lamps will
be from LED. Connection of power cables for compound lighting will be carried out the
above described manhole and pipes. The steel poles will have cable entry hole and
connection point. The connection point shall be covered with factory made steel gate. The
control system shall either be with time switch, photocell, contactor and push buttons or
tumbler switches. Detail requirement for final design
II. LOW CURRENT AND IT SYSTEMS
Technical Specification
All the required systems may have to be responded in line with technical and
performance criteria set out in this document.
All system are to be supplied with all equipment hardware , software ,and
cabling and ancillary services as required to provide each system complete
and functional in all aspects.
The project is planned to be executed as the design , supply and installation

will be excited in one phase
The subsystem for this project is as follows
1. Structural Cabling Solution

2. CCTV surveillance system.
3. Access Control System and I.D Badging.
140
4. Intrusion Detection System

5. Fire Alarm System.
6. Master Antenna System (MATV)
7. PA and Evacuation System
8. Audio and Video Conferencing System
9. Guard Touring System
10. Digital Signage System
11. Automatic Car Parking System
12. Building Management System
Minimum Requirements
All equipment will be new, unused, Undamaged and free from defects and in
conformity with specification.
All equipment comprising each system must not be proprietary (Must be open
system) and generally available products. This is to ensure that the future
extensions to the system may be carried out by any installing company
extending the controls by adding cards , cages etc. the use of specialized
manufactured components will not be acceptable . This does not preclude the
use of badged‟ products, providing the manufactures are clearly stated and the
product has not been modified or customized in any way.
All items or accessories (i.e. cables, conduits, components, etc) necessary to render the
required systems complete operable, and ready to use will be included as part of the
equipment. Any additions. Deletions or variations must be outlined.
The contractor (sub- contractor) will be an authorized dealer and installer or authorized
system integrator for all the equipment proposed. To this end, the contractor (bidder)
should attach of authorization.
Standards (references)
 ISO/IEC
 EN-CENELEC
 BRITSH STANDARDS
 TIA
Other Standards
 ANSI/ASHRAEmt Standard 135- 2001
 ELA Electronic Industries Alliance
 EN-54-EU fire detection and fire alarm sytem
 NFPA 70 – National fire protection Association
 FIA – fire protection Association
 IEE- Institution for Electrical &Electronic
Engineers
 Construction Specification Institute (CSI)
141
1. Structural Cabling Solution
1.1 OVERVIEW
The New Ethiopian Parliament is planning to construct a Head office Building to be
located at Addis Ababa. it has been considered, and planned to implement a “Structured
Cabling System”, which will after on referred to as the SCS, for the purpose of integrating all
the Voice Data, and Video onto a common distribution platform.
All intra-building connections, save for the data center, which may use Cat 6A or fiber
patch cables, are to be connected through Cat 6A F/FTP, PVC riser rated, solid pure
copper conductor cables. All cable accessories should be Cat 6A standard.
Inter-building optical fiber cables will run through PN-10 heavy duty PVC conduit buried at
least 60cm below ground. High grade galvanized steel pipe shall be used for all roads and
above ground installations in order to protect the fibers not only from damage but also
from vibrations.
Buildings are to be connected through 50μm laser-optimized multimode OM4 fiber if their
distances from the data center are less than 500m; otherwise they are to be connected
through single-mode fiber.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Total System Design: A detailed design shall be submitted, to include, but not limited to:
schematics, layouts, and service models.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer‟s catalogue information showing dimensions,
colors, and configurations.
Bill of Quantity: Vendor shall submit complete detailed bids for each building. The Bills
of Quantity shall be as follows:
Horizontal Cabling
Campus backbone cabling
Vertical/Riser Cabling
Data Centre work
Material Guarantee:
The wiring vendor (installer) shall guarantee at the time of the bid that all cabling and
components will meet and exceed Category 6 Channel specifications (including
installation) of TIA/EIA-568B and 569A, ISO 11801 2nd Edition, and 20 Year Product and
Applications Assurance Warranty documentation
142
1.3 QUALIFICATIONS
Manufacturer
The products proposed shall be supplied and produced by single manufacturer end to end
solutions. Racks and other hardware that is not defined as part of the channel test
configuration by TIA/EIA TSB67, Transmission Performance Specifications for Field
testing of unshielded Twisted-Pair Cabling Systems. Manufacturer shall have a minimum
of seven (7) years‟ experience and shall be ISO 9001 Certified.
Contractor
The contractors selected to provide the installation of this system shall be certified by one
Vendor in all aspects of design, installation and testing of the products described herein,
and have a minimum of five (5) years‟ experience on similar SCS cabling systems.
Grounding and Bonding
Communication bonding and grounding shall be in accordance with International and/or

Local Building Regulations. Horizontal equipment includes cross connect frames, patch
panels and racks, active telecommunication equipment and test apparatus and
equipment. When required by local code, provide a Telecommunications Bonding
Backbone utilizing a #6-AWG or larger bonding conductor that provides direct bonding
between equipment rooms and telecommunications closets. This is part of the grounding
and bonding infrastructure, and is independent of equipment or cable.
Warranty
A twenty (20) year Extended Product Warranty and Applications Assurance for this wiring
system shall be provided.
Extended Product Warranty
The Extended Product Warranty shall cover product defects for all passive cabling
components (excluding termination tools). Passive components are defined as those
exhibiting no gain or contributing no energy. The manufacturer shall warrant, from the
date of installation and after a Registration Certificate is issued, the following:
1. That the SCS manufacturer‟s passive components that comprise of the registered
cabling installation will be free from manufactured defects in material or workmanship
under normal and proper use.
2. That all approved passive cabling products that comprise the registered SCS
installation meet or exceed the NEXT (near end cross talk) PSNEXT, ELFEXT,
PSELFEXT, return loss, bandwidth and attenuation/loss specifications of the ISO/IEC
IS 11801 2nd Edition 2nd Edition 2002, CENELEC EN 50173 2nd Edition
2011 and TIA/EIA 568-B (or any national equivalent) standards and their approved
amendments.
143
3. That the installation will meet or exceed the PSNEXT, ELFEXT, PSELFEXT, return
loss, attenuation and NEXT requirements of the ISO/IEC IS 11801 2nd Edition 2nd
Edition 2002, CENELEC EN 50173 2nd Edition 2011 and TIA/EIA 568-B (or any
national equivalent) standards and their approved amendments for copper cabling.
4. That the installation will meet or exceed the attenuation/loss and bandwidth
requirements of the ISO/IEC IS 11801 2nd Edition 2nd Edition 2002, CENELEC EN
50173 2nd Edition 2011 and TIA/EIA 568-B (or any national equivalent) standards
and their approved amendments for fiber cabling.
Applications Assurance
The Application Assurance shall cover failures of the SCS installation to operate the
application(s) the system was designed to support, as well as additional application(s)
defined below. The manufacturer shall warrant that the registered SCS installation will be
free from failures, which prevent operations of the specific application(s) for which the
original SCS system was designed, not including failures due to electronic hardware
and/or software problems.
The Application Assurance shall also cover the following additional applications:
1. Those as specified in the current (at the time of installation) and future versions
of the manufacturer‟s SCS Performance Specification.
2. Any applications introduced in the future by recognized standards or user forums that
use the ISO/IEC IS 11801 2nd Edition or TIA/EIA 568-B UTP or fibre components and
UTP or fibre link/ channel specifications for cabling.
1.4 DESCRIPTION of REQUIRED SOLUTION
Structured Cabling System
Furnish and install, complete with all accessories, a Structured Cabling System (SCS).
The SCS shall serve as a vehicle for transport of data and voice telephony signals
throughout the network from designated demarcation points to outlets located at various
desks, workstation and other locations described herein. Applications standards
supported should include, but be not limited to, IEEE 802.3,10 BASE-T, 100BaseTX,
1000BaseT, IEEE 802.5, 4 Mbps, 16Mbps and TP-PMD. In addition, the backbone cabling
and horizontal links/channels shall be capable of supporting evolving high-end
applications such as Gigabit Ethernet, 10Gigabet Ethernet. The cabling should also
support legacy LANs and other systems. These should include, but are not limited to Base
band and Broadband video, and Building Management Systems.
The transport of data throughout the network to access rooms located at every floors
should be from two far end distribution locations for all blocks for redundancy and there
should not be crossing of these cables, please refer the riser diagram. And, sufficient
cabling duct for different types of cabling including expansion space (UTP, Fiber, Coaxial)
144
to each floor from the Distribution rooms must be in place.
The distribution rooms should be at block 1 and block 3, and the access rooms will be
located in each floors. Distribution Rooms Host Core network devices like router, firewall,
core switch and GSM/LTE BTS equipment.
In the access rooms, the active devices and passive devices shall be placed in different
racks, and one rack shall be placed for testing.
Access and distribution Rooms shall be equipped with air conditioner, smoke sense and
extinguisher, Access Control based Fire resistance Door.
1.5 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
Contractor Selection
The contractor/sub-contractor selected for this Project must be certified by one vendor,
adhere to the engineering, installation and testing procedures and utilize the Authorized
manufacturer components and distribution channels in provisioning this Project.
Contractor Experience and Training
The contractor/sub-contractor shall be experienced in all aspects of this work and shall be
required to demonstrate direct experience on recent systems of similar type and size. The
contractor shall own and maintain tools and equipment necessary for successful
installation and testing of optical and Category 6, 6A premise distribution systems and
have personnel who are adequately trained in the use of such tools and equipment
The contractor/sub-contractor should have a reference on the installation of large network
greater than 5Km fiber cable and greater than 500 node UTP outlet reference of more than
one customer.
Contractor Resume
A resume of qualification shall be submitted with the Contractor's proposal indicating the
following:
1. A list of recently completed projects of similar type and size with contact names and
telephone numbers for each.
2. A list of test equipment proposed for use in verifying the installed integrity of metallic
and fiber optic cable systems on this project.
3. A technical resume of experience for the contractor's Project Manager and on- site
installation supervisor who will be assigned to this project.
4. Any sub-Contractor, who will assist the SCS contractor in performance of this work,
shall have the same training and certification as the SCS contractor.
1.6 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
The system shall utilize a network of fibre optic, and unshielded twisted pair, riser, tie and
145
station cables. Cables and terminations shall be provided and located as will be shown in
the final design and in the quantities indicated on the final drawings. Fibre cables shall
terminate on Fibre Distribution Centers (FDC's) or modular patch panels located in all
demarcation and termination points. All cables, and terminations shall be identified at all
locations. All cables shall be terminated and labeled in an alphanumeric sequence at all
termination locations. All copper cable terminations shall comply with, and be tested to
TIA/EIA 568B and TSB-67 standards for Category 6, 6A. Station cables shall terminate
on two gang wall plates.
The cabling system proposed must be designed to support legacy and future
applications. Description of how the proposed fibre cabling support proposed 10Gbps
Ethernet should be provided.
1.7 EXECUTION
Cable Installation
Cable Routing
Visual Inspection shall be performed to determine the shortest route for all cable runs prior to
trunking or raceway installations. Care should be taken in the planning process to ensure
that the aesthetics of neither the buildings nor the compound is affected in any way. Existing
routes will be used where possible. In the case where existing routes are not adequate in terms
of capacity and functionality, new routes will be used.
UTP Cable Installation
The cable will be installed in such a way that it offers maximum data transfer with
negligible db loss. Within the buildings, all trunking will be fixed to the structure of the
building with fisher plastic plugs and screws. No screw will be placed further than one
meter apart from each other. In cases where the wall is not evenly surfaced and there is a
gap between the wall and the trunking, the gap will be filled with white silicone sealer.
Wire-ways will be created in such a way that the installed cable will not run adjacent to
any power cables or any devices that might induce electrical current onto the cable.
(a) Workmanship
Components of the SCS system shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike manner. Wiring
color codes shall be strictly observed and terminations shall be uniform throughout the
system. Identification markings and systems shall be uniform. TIA/EIA 606 administration
guidelines shall be used as standard for all SCS wiring.
146
(b) Installation
All installation shall be done in conformance with EIA/TIA 568B, IS11801 2nd Edition
and EN 50173 standards and meet requirements of EIA/TIA 569, prEN50174 and DIS
14763 installation guidelines. Special attention must be made to ensuring that the twists of
the cable pairs are maintained tight up to the connection point. The Contractor shall
ensure that the maximum pulling tensions of the specified distribution cables are not
exceeded and cable bends maintain the proper radius during the placement of the
facilities. Failure to follow the appropriate guidelines will require the Contractor to provide
in a timely fashion the additional material and labor necessary to properly rectify the
situation. This shall also apply to any and all damages sustained to the cables by the
Contractor during the implementation.
(c) Bonding and Grounding
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring an approved ground at all newly installed
distribution frames, and/or insuring proper bonding to any existing facilities. The
Contractor shall also be responsible for ensuring ground continuity by properly bonding all
appropriate cabling, closures, cabinets, service boxes, and framework. All grounds shall
consist of appropriately sized copper wire and shall be supplied from an approved
building ground and bonded to the main electrical ground. Grounding must be in
accordance with all local codes and practices.
(d) Power Separation
The Contractor shall not place any distribution cabling alongside power lines, or share the
same conduit, channel or sleeve with electrical apparatus. Power separation must be
adhered to TIA EIA568A/B It will be the responsibility of the contractor to highlight areas
where these guidelines cannot be met, prior to installation.
(e) Miscellaneous Equipment
The Contractor shall provide any necessary screws, anchors, clamps, tie wraps,
distribution rings, wire moulding (MC/MDF & TC/IDF locations), miscellaneous grounding
and support hardware, etc., necessary to facilitate the installation of the System.
(f) Special Equipment and Tools
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish any special installation equipment
or tools necessary to properly complete the System. This may include, but is not limited to,
tools for terminating cables, testing and splicing equipment for copper/fibre cables,
communication devices, jack stands for cable reels, or cable wenches.
147
(g) Labeling
The Contractor shall be responsible for printed labels for all cables and cords, distribution
frames, and outlet locations, according to FDRE HOF & HOPR specifications ie., 2N-001-V,
2N-001-D1, 2N-001-D2 at the time of delivery. No labels are to be written by hand. Label
formats are to be agreed with the client.
(h) Cable Storage
The Contractor shall not roll or store cable reels without an appropriate underlay and the
prior approval of FDRE HOF & HOPR/The Engineer or its Consultant.
(i) Cable Records
The Contractor shall maintain conductor polarity (tip and ring) identification at the main
equipment room (switch room), risers, and station connecting blocks in accordance with
industry practices, but only in locations authorized by Company's General Contractor,
Consultant Company, and Architect.
1.8 DESIGN APPROVAL
Planning meetings and schedule
An initial planning meeting will be held with the successful bidder to clarify all requirements
(systems, services, distribution methods, etc.), identify responsibilities, and schedule the
events that will transpire during the implementation of the project. Within one (1) weeks of
the initial meeting, the contractor shall provide a written report and project schedule to
clearly document the events and responsibilities associated with the project.
Drawings and review
The New Ethiopian Parliament Project shall provide the Contractor with one (1) clearly
readable, up-to-date scale copy of all architectural, electrical, and mechanical drawings at
the award of the contract. This will allow for a one (1) week review of the diagrams by the
Contractor and FDRE HOF & HOPR/The Engineer to answer any queries pertaining to
the Contractor's review. In reviewing such drawings Contractor shall be obligated to make
an on-site inspection with FDRE HOF & HOPR/The Engineer for on-site verification of
access routes for cabling and other matters.
Proposed wiring solution
Upon completion of the initial design approval stage, the Contractor shall provide two (2)
148
draft copies of engineering documentation for approval by The Engineer will review the
engineering documentation within a one-week period. This documentation will include,
but is not limited to the following: a detailed drawing of the MDF, and a drawing of each
IDF. If no revisions are required, the documentation shall be formally accepted in writing
by FDRE HOF & HOPR/The Engineer Any revisions shall be completed by the contractor
within a one week time period and resubmitted for review.
Drawings and diagrams
Upon completion of final engineering and incorporation of FDRE HOF & HOPR/The
Engineer review comments, Contractor shall provide to FDRE HOF & HOPR/The
Engineer for its records the following: (drawing register to be agreed)
1. MC/MDF and TC/IDF Diagrams - Includes:
a. Cable routing
b. Position of all components and apparatus c.
detailed layout of the wall field/frames
d. Labeling plan.
2. Work Area Floor Plans - Includes:
a. Detailed cable routes
2. CCTV Surveillance System

Introduction:
Surveillance CCTV system is required to ensure effective surveillance of an area as

well as create a tamperproof record for post event analysis. The System shall provide
an on-line display of video images on TFT monitors/Video wall/Large plasma monitors
located in Central as well as Local control rooms.
System should facilitate viewing of live and recorded images and controlling of all
cameras by the authorized users present in the LAN.
System should provide inter-operability of hardware, OS, software, networking,

printing, database connectivity, reporting, and communication protocols. System
expansion should be possible through off-the-shelf available hardware.
Equipment with better specifications shall be accepted.

149
2.1 General Specifications:
Proposed CCTV system shall be an open standard based integrated

system with IP network centric functional and management architecture
aimed at providing high-speed manual/automatic operation for best
performance.
System shall use video signals from various types of indoor/outdoor IP
cameras installed at different locations, process them for viewing on
workstations/monitors at Central Control Room/local control rooms and
Simultaneously record all the cameras after compression using MPEG 4
or better standard.
Network Video Recorder shall offer both video stream management and
video stream storage management. Recording frame rate & resolution in
respect of individual channel shall be programmable.
System should ensure that once recorded, the video cannot be altered,
ensuring the audit trail is intact for evidential purposes.
System shall provide sufficient storage of all the camera recordings for a
period of 30 days or more @ 25 FPS, at 4 CIF or better quality using
necessary compression techniques for all cameras (extended capacity
of cameras i.e. present capacity + 25 %).
he recording resolution and frame rate for each camera shall be user
programmable.
The Area under surveillance shall be monitored and controlled from
Central/Local Control Room(s) through workstations.
Surveillance CCTV System shall operate on 230 V, 50 Hz single -phase
power supply. Power for all the equipment will be conditioned using online
UPS with minimum 30 minutes or more back up from server room
UPS. If any equipment operates on any voltage other than the supply
voltage and supply frequency, necessary conversion/correction device for
supply shall be supplied along with the equipment.
All the control equipment‟s shall be provided in standard Racks.
All the indoor cameras & control equipment shall be suitable for operation
from 100C to 400C and relative humidity up to 80 % non- condensing.
Cameras & other equipment, meant for outdoor installations, shall be
suitable to work from (-) 10oC to (+) 50oC with RH up to 90% non-
condensing. This temperature range may be achieved with or without
heater.
2.2 System requirements:
IP Camera shall be used for image capture.

Indoor cameras shall be either with fixed focal length lens or with
150
Pan/Tilt & Zoom lens as per site requirement.

Housing of cameras meant for indoor use shall be of IP 42 rating
whereas outdoor camera housing shall be of IP 66 or better rating.
These must be integrated by the camera manufacturer.
System m u s t p r o v i d e b u i l t -in facilityof watermarking or Digital
certificate to ensure tamperproof recording so that these can be used as
evidence at a later date, if so desired. The recording shall support audit trail
feature.
All camera recordings shall have Camera ID & location/area of
recording as well as date/time stamp. Camera ID, Location/Area of
recording & date/time shall be programmable by the s y s t e m
administrator with User ID & Password.
Facility of camera recording in real-time mode (25 FPS)/15/12.5/10 or
lower FPS as well as in any desired combination must be available in the
system.
Facility of Camera recording in CIF, 2CIF, 4 CIF as well as in any
combination i.e. any camera can be recorded in any quality – Selective or
Group of cameras must be available in the system.
System to have facility of additional camera installation beyond the
originally planned capacity.
In order to optimize the memory, while recording, video shall be
compressed using MPEG-4 or better standard and streamed over the IP
network. Once on the network, video can be viewed on a Control room
workstation
System shall be triplex i.e. it should provide facility of Viewing,
Recording & Replay simultaneously.
The offered system shall have facility to export the desired portion of
clipping (from a desired date/time to another desired date/time) on CD or
DVD. Viewing of this recording shall be possible on standard PC using
standard software like windows media player etc.
System shall have provision of WAN connectivity for remote monitoring.
2.3 System design:
he camera shall be IP based, UTP ready. And it should be capable of

producing streams @ 25 fps for each camera for viewing on LAN and on
monitors and also recording into the Network Video Recorder, @ 25 fps or
lower frame rate, user selectable as per requirement, for each individual
camera.
The IP cameras shall be Power over Ethernet (POE) compliant and
connected to Layer 2 or Layer 3 switch as per system design using UTP
CAT 6 Cable or fiber optic cable and the required connectors as per
standards.
Central/Local Control Room will have workstations along with
151
controllers for Camera operation. For monitoring purposes, Video

monitors/Plasma monitors/Video wall shall be setup with suitable mounting
arrangements, as per user requirements. Facility for viewing and controlling
all the cameras at various other locations, as required, shall be provided.
Monitoring at Local control rooms may be restricted to operation of
certain cameras only & system administrator should be able to configure the
system, accordingly.
Each control room may have one or more Operators simultaneously
using the installed Video monitors/Video wall. Operator control on cameras
shall be on a static basis or rotary basis depending on the policies to be
decided at site.
There shall be a Control System with Video Control Software to manage all
the video surveillance devices.
Database Server shall keep track of all configurations & events. This will
help in proper System administration & management of
redundancies etc.
All the workstations in LAN should be provided with software to view and
control the cameras, and retrieve the recorded video images from the
Network Video recorder.
2.4 Video Surveillance Application Software
access control, PA and fire / safety systems based on open standards.

control software should be capable to display and manage the
entire surveillance system. It should be capable of supporting variety of devices such
as IP cameras, Network Video
Recorder, Network Storage Manager etc.
The software should Support flexible 1/2/4 Windows Split screen display mode or
scroll mode on the PC monitor or on preview monitor as per site requirement.
The software is required to generate reports of stored device configuration. The
control software is required to provide alarm and alarm log. The log shall be able to be
achieved, printed and displayed using a device filter, a device group filter and/or a time
window.
The software should have user access authority configurable on per device or per device
group basis. The user shall have the facility to request the access of any camera and
can control the camera for a reservation period. Control of camera is released after the
reservation period.
The system shall provide User activity log (audit trail) with user id, time stamp, and action
performed, etc.
The administrator should be able to add, edit & delete users with rights.
It shall be possible to view ability / rights of each user or the cameras which can be viewed
& controlled as per the permission assigned by the administrator.
The users should be on a hierarchical basis as assigned by the administrator. The
higher priority person can take control of cameras, which are already being controlled by
a lower priority user. There should be minimum 3 hierarchical levels of security for
152
providing user level log in.

It s h o u l d h a v e r e c o r d i n g m o d e s v i z . Continuous, m a n u a l , o r
programmed modes on date, time and camera-wise. All modes should be disabled and
enabled using scheduled configuration. It should also be possible to search and replay
the recorded images on date, time and camera-wise. It should provide onscreen controls
for remote operation of PTZ cameras. It should have the facility for scheduled recording.
Different recording speeds (fps) and resolution for each recording mode for each camera
should be possible.
It should provide programmable motion detection and recording, to be defined area-wise.
System must be able to support video motion detection algorithms to detect and track
objects, Learn the scene, Adapt to a changing outdoor environment, Ignore
environmental changes including rain, hail, wind, swaying trees and gradual light
changes.
The settings shall be individually configurable for each alarm and each camera pre-
record duration. This shall allow the Camera Server to capture video prior to the
alarm/event, as well as after the alarm/event. Shall be selectable from a list of values
ranging between 0 seconds and
5 minutes.
The software for clients should also be working on a browser based system for
remote users. This will allow any authorized user to display the video of any desired
camera on the monitor with full PTZ and associated controls.
Retrieval: The CCTV application should allow retrieval of data
instantaneously or any date / time interval chosen through search functionality
of the application software. In case data is older than 30 days and available, the
retrieval should be possible. The system should also allow for backup of specific
data on any drives like CD/DVD/Blu ray Recorders or any other device in a format
which can be replayed through a standard PC based software. Log of any such
activity should be maintained by the system which can be audited at a later date.
Storage: Data storage should be at a Data Centre (main control room) the capacity
of the storage should be equal to 30 days of recoding of all cameras 25 fps/4 CIF.
The system should follow FIFO on recording.
Artificial Intelligence: It shall have image tracking facility. If any object is found to be
stationary for a pre-defined period the system shall track the event and alert the
operator.
3. Access Control System
3.1 GENERAL
The controlled entry, via access control system, of only authorized

personnel to secured areas will be based on cardholder information entered
and stored in the system database.
Readers are connected to local access control panels or so called
networked intelligent controllers.
The central access control application software supervises those local
controllers. Should the security network become disconnected, the
153
controllers will be operated as standalone unit until the communication

network is restored. Standalone activity is then sent back to the
database server, ensuring all records are maintained.
If the disconnection is too long, the internal memory of the controller might
be saturated (full): It will then manage its memory on a “first in, first out”
(FIFO) principle which means that remaining fully operational, it will erase
the oldest information.
Each point of access is provided with battery-supported equipment
permitting uninterrupted operation even in the event of a primary power
failure.
The reader and the associated controller will decide if a person may
have access to a controlled point. If the access is granted, the electric or
magna lock will be released for a fixed time. The magna lock for door access
is designed such as power failure will release the lock (for safety reasons).
The status of the door (is monitored via an additional surface mounted
magnetic door contact. This status will provide information about a door
remaining opened too long.
Each door will have 2 readers (one on the secured and one on unsecured
side).
Some doors only have 1 reader (one for the unsecured side). These are so-
called doors with a request-to-exit button (push button on the
secured side). The cardholder can push on this button in order to open the
door. This combination will only be used for certain internal doors.
Access controlled doors that serve, as an emergency exit will additionally
be equipped with an emergency-break-glass. Operating this device will
release the electric or magna lock and allow egress under emergency
conditions.
All access requests, both authorized and denied, will be sent to the host for
storage and annunciation, with the cardholder identification and access
point or area where access was attempted or gained.
The system equipment and installation shall comply with provisions and
requirements of this specification as well as all applicable national, state and
local codes and standards.
The contractor shall provide and install all equipment, components, wire
cable, and mounting hardware as required to meet manufacture‟s
specifications and documented installation procedures.
3.2 SYSTEM HARDWARE
Access Control database server/Workstation

The computer(s) shall be provided with a 17-inch LCD TFT color
monitor, standard 101-key keyboard and two-button. The computer system
shall be constructed from commercially available computer hardware.
he Computer(s) shall utilize and inter Pentium IV or later processor
supporting true multi-user, multi-tasking and mulit-treated capabilities with a
minimum of 512-MB or RAM, expandable to 2-GB of RAM.
154
The computer(s) shall utilize Microsoft Windows 2000 or XP Pro

operation system. Systems utilizing 16-bit operating systems are not
acceptable and will be rejected.
The Computer (s) shall be capable of accommodating upgrades in
colour monitor, hard disk drive, RAM and I/O port capacity, without
rendering the file server hardware and/ or software obsolete.
The client workstation shall be capable of supporting an alarm colour
graphics software package and photo-ID capability concurrently with the
standard operator software package.
upgrading the software shall entail the loss of no existing field hardware
investment or programmed user database entries.
3.3 NETWORKED INTEGRATED CONTROLLER
The n e t w o r k e d intelligent controller shall utilizing true distributed

processing technology with the capability of local processing based on the
local storage of a least 10,000 cardholders, all system access groups and
time zones, input and output information in RAM memory.
The intelligent controller shall support the monitoring and control a minimum
of two (2) readers or two (2) keypads or two(2) readers with
key pads, monitoring and control of at least four (4) five-state, fully
supervised and fully configurable input points, and control at least two
(2) fully configurable auxiliary output control relays.
he controller shall support all industry standard reader technologies (
Biometrics, Magnetic Stripe, Wiegand, Bar Code, and Proximity) as well as
3x4 matrix keypads
ch controller must also be capable of expansion, by external remote
input modules and/or remote relay modules.
ch networked intelligent controller shall be provided with a battery
backup to sustain complete operational effectiveness including remote
reader electronics, card readers, electric lock(fail secure), remote input
modules and remote out-put modules for a minimum of four(4) hours of
normal operation.
Each networked intelligent controller shall utilize on board self-
diagnostic LED‟s
Each networked intelligent controller shall support RS-232 connections, RS-
485 multi-drop communication and/or TCP/IP technologies.
Each networked intelligent controller shall be supplied with all specified
options available, including an enclosure with an enclosure tamper
switch. In addition to the capabilities referred to, each networked
intelligent controller shall be capable of reporting to file server the
following alarm conditions: enclosure door tamper, primary power
failure, low battery conditions, loss of communications and a access
control violations.
155
3.4 CARD READERS

Card readers shall be used at entrances/areas to prevent any person to
freely access these areas with authorization.
Card readers provided shall be proximity technology and shall include
associated remote reader electronics modules.
Quantity and location of card readers shall be as specified in the Bill of
Quantities and drawings.
3.5 KEY/PIN PADS
Keypads shall be used at entrances/areas to prevent any person to

freely access these areas with authorization.
Keypads provided shall be numeric type that contain the numbers 0 to
9 the * and the # keys and shall include associated remote reader
electronic modules.
Quantity and location of keypads shall be as specified in the Bill of
Quantities and drawings.
3.6 ACCESS CARDS
The system shall utilize PVC industry standard proximity cards compliant
with ISO standards for thickness.
The Proximity card will allow the printing of cardholder record fields
including photo directly on the card if required.
3.7 MAGNETIC CONTACTS

Surface mount magnetic contact switches or ground magnetic contacts
(both HS type) shall be provided to monitor the status of each card reader
controlled door, gate or shutter as noted on the Bill of quantities and
drawings.
3.8 REQUEST-TO-EXIT DEVICES

Request-to-exit devices shall be provided to allow a person exit an access
controlled, monitored door.
Quantity and location of request-to-exit devices shall be as specified in
contract document and drawings.
3.9 ELECTRIC AND MAGNA LOCKING DEVICES
Electric or magna locking devices shall be provided to lock (secure) and

unlock (unsecured) each access controlled door as note in the Bill of
quantities.
156
Quantity and location of electric locking devices shall be as specified in

contract documents.
3.10 SYSTEM SOFTWARE
System Description
he Security management system shall have a modular, networked access
control system capable of handling large proprietary corporations with multiple
remote sites, alarm monitoring, video imaging, visitor management and badging.
The system shall allow for easy expansion or modification of input, outputs, and
remote control stations.
The system control at the central computer shall be under a single software
program control, shall provide full integration of all components, and shall be
alterable at any time, depending upon the
requirement. Reconfiguration shall be accomplished online through
system programming, without hardware changes.
The software shall be a 32-bit,3-tier client/server OBDC compliant application
based on Microsoft tools and standards. The software program shall operate in
Windows 2000, XP of grater.
The database architecture shall utilize, but not limited to, Microsoft
Access, Microsoft SQL Server or Oracle Server.
he system shall have the capability to communicate with the controllers and other
field devices utilizing industry standard RS485, RS422 and TCP/IP communication
protocol.
The system software shall allow support for multiple accounts allowing separate
access to the card database, badge layout, operator access, and reporting.
3.11 MAIN FEATURES
The access control system software shall be a menu-driven, open architecture

that will support the following functions:
System configuration and administrative functions: Field hardware set-
up and configuration, user administration, reporting capabilities, and time zone
and access level set-up.
Assigned passwords shall be possible to define the levels of system
operation for each individual operator. System operation for individual operators
shall include, but not limited to, restricted times for login. Operator actions
range from basic monitoring to full control of the system including
programming.
The system shall support both manual and automatic responses to alarms
entering the system. Each alarm shall be capable of initiating a number of
different actions, such as activation of remote devices and door control,
Access control functions shall include validation based on time of day, day of
157
week, holiday scheduling, site code verification, automatic or manual retrieval

of cardholder photographs,
Alarm monitoring tasks: graphical alarm monitoring via maps and
graphical system status trees, acknowledging alarms, performing traces,
output control functions, user verification, and cardholder record lookup,
Configuration of alarm monitoring client stations to annunciate any or all of
the following types of alarm: access granted alarms, access denied alarms,
system alarms, door held open alarms, emergency alarms, and/or area
control alarms,
Search and view operation of personnel information stored in the system
database,
3.12 PHOTO-ID
the creation of owner customized controlled access, an integrated

video imaging and photo ID badging system including badge design and
photo imaging tools shall be integrated into the systems own database.
Cardholder data entered into the Phote-ID imaging system will be sent to
the system‟s database will be received by the Photo-ID imaging system.
This exchange of data is referred to as synchronizing. In addition to data
synchronizing, the images are automatically transferred to the application
software in such a format that they can be displayed on the operator client
workstations.
The system shall include a seamlessly integrated Photo-ID management
module. The Photo-ID management functionality must allow the enrolment
of cardholders into the database, capturing of images, and import/export of
employee data. This functionality shall also allow the operator to assign
and/ or modify the access rights of a cord holder.
he system, when utilizing the Photo-ID module of the system, s ha l l
utilize a video camera to capture cardholder‟s photos. The video camera
shall be connected directly to the server/Client workstation via supported
interface.
4. INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEMS
4.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
4.2 STANDARD PRODUCTS
Material and equipment shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly

engaged in the manufacture of such products. Items of equipment shall essentially
duplicate equipment that have been in satisfactory use at least 2 years prior to bid
opening. Equipment shall be supported by a service organization that is, in the opinion
158
of the Contracting Officer, reasonably convenient to the site.
4.3 DEFINITIONS
Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these
specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as defined in IEEE Std 100.
a. Active mode: That in which some type of signal is continuously sent across the link,
resulting in simple link breaks being readily detected.
b. Element: Constituent part of a complex signal such as AC or DC voltage or
current, AC phase, or frequency duration.
c. Fail-safe: Capability to monitor for system functions and to report an alarm when
a failure is detected in a critical system function.
d. Installer: Either the Contractor or a subcontractor with whom the Contractor has a firm
contractual agreement.
e. Intruder: Animate object at least 1220 mm 48 inches in height, 34 kg 75 pounds in
weight and 0.113 cubic meter 4 cubic feet in volume, moving through protected zones or
portals at a velocity of 30 to 3050 mm per second 0.1 to 10 feet per second.
f. Sensor zone: Geographic position for which an intrusion must be identified and
displayed and may be the combination of multiple detection devices.
4.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Provide basic intrusion detection system (IDS), including associated equipment and
appurtenances. Provision of IDS shall include supervising installation of rigid or flexible
conduit for IDS during site preparation, running system wires and cables, and system
component installation, component testing, and system checkout. Each system shall be
complete and ready for operation. Equipment, materials, installation, workmanship,
inspection, and testing shall be as specified herein.
4.5 SUBMITTALS
Engineering Command will approve submittals requiring special review in this section.
Drawings and descriptive data shall be approved prior to procurement, fabrication, and
installation. A schedule of required submittals shall be prepared to be integrated with
the overall construction management schedule to ensure adequate review and
necessary corrective work before installation.
Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed
location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and
other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Wiring
Diagrams shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of
equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment. Drawings shall
159
indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating

equipment devices. Submittals shall include the nameplate data, size, and capacity.
4.6 IDS Components

Provide drawings that clearly and completely indicate the function of each component
of the IDS. Indicate termination points of devices and indicate interconnections
required for operation of the system. Indicate interconnection between modules and
devices. In addition, provide a layout drawing which shows spacing of components,
location, and details of mounting and positioning.
4.6.1 Overall System Schematic
The overall system schematic shall indicate the sequence of operation, the relationship
of integrated components on one diagram, and show powersource, system controls,
impedance matches, plus number, size, identification, and maximum lengths of
interconnecting wires. Drawings shall not be less than 420 by
297.
4.6.2 DS Operational Test Plan

Submit for approval at least 30 days prior to commencement of formal operational
testing. Include detailed procedures for operational testing of each IDS component and
subsystem, and for performance of an integrated system test.
4.7 IDS Equipment

Submit manufacturer's certification of UL listing.
4.7.1 Regulatory Requirements
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be

mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it
appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction,"
or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials,
installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory
provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated.
4.7.2 Standard Products

Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged
in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship.
Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to
bid opening. The 2-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials
under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on
the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures
during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are
160
required, these items shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the

component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless
stated in this section
4.8 WARRANTY
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably
convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the
equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract
4.9 IDS SUBSYSTEMS
Provide a complete integrated IDS consisting of the following major subsystems:

a. Detection
b. Arm/disarm multiple function keypad c.
Communications
d. Assessment
e. Alarm reporting
f. Power
4.10 INTEGRATED SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
Ensure that the IDS is fully integrated with the physical security and other elements of
the overall facility security system. Except for multiple function keypads, other
subsystems may be housed in a single enclosure. Specific subsystem functional
requirements are as follows:
a. Detection subsystem: Subsystem shall consist of sensors to detect intrusion
attempts and provide means to indicate a duress condition.
b. Arm/disarm multiple function keypad: Subsystem shall consist of electronic digital
keypads to monitor and control personnel movement through normal access
routes in and out of the facility.
c. Communications subsystem: Subsystem shall consist of elements required to
ensure that pertinent data is transferred from the point of origin to the point where
appropriate actions can be taken.
d. Assessment subsystem: Subsystem shall consist of electronic devices required
to visually and audibly verify the validity of IDS alarms.
e. Alarm reporting subsystem: Subsystem shall consist of electronic devices to
control, process, integrate, and annunciate IDS data
f. Power subsystem: Subsystem shall consist of components required to
ensure continuous operation of the entire IDS.
5. Fire Alarm System
5.1 INTRODUCTION
161
This standard technical specification form part of , and shall be read with, the
conditions of contract, supplementary specification, schedules, drawings and other
parts that form part of the tender/contract documents.
5.2 SCOPE
This standard technical speciation covers the general technical requirement

for automatic fire detection systems and installations. The following aspects
are covered:
System requirements
Equipment requirements
Installation methods and materials
Commissioning and handing over
Documentation and drawings
The supplementary specification, drawings and schedules will take
precedence over this standard technical specification
The supplementary specification, drawings and schedules shall be
referred to for the specific requirements for the system
5.3 DEFINITIONS
See also the definitions in EN 54-1 and BS 839-1
In an analogue addressable system the control equipment Receives analogue

signals from the sensing devices in the system and knows with which sensing
device it is communicating by reading the address of each sensing device.
The term analogue refers to an electronic signal which can represent a large
number (e.g 256) of values. This signal can be in the form of a current level,
pulses, frequency or any combination of these.
A device is addressable if the control equipment can communicate with the

device, or select such a device by sending an address to it.
Approved shall mean accepted by the department for a specific installation. The
department does not deep a list of approved equipment and equipment accepted
for a specific installation does not necessarily imply approval or acceptance for
another installation.
162
ntional System
A system is conventional if the control equipment determines the status of the

zone wiring as flows:
Fault: low or no current
Normal: current within limits
Fire: high current
Short circuit: abnormally high current
Equipment, unit or Panel
The control equipment receives information from the field devices and displays
information as described in BS 5839-4 of EN 54-2,
That part of an automatic fire detection system which constantly, or at frequent

intervals, monitors suitable phenomena, such as smoke, fire, heat, etc.
For high ceiling areas like Conference hall ceiling it is preferable to use beam
detectors.
For the beam detector specification is equivalent or more to the following
specification:
Standard Features
Area coverage up to 1500 m² per unit
Range from 5 - 50 m and 50 - 100 m
Up to ceiling heights of 25 m
10 to 30 VDC operation
Low current consumption
Manual or automatic reset
3 selectable alarm thresholds
Self check and automatic contamination
compensation
Automatic discrimination between fire and fault
Retro operation through prism
Vertical or horizontal mount
Easy wiring and unique alignment
Microprocessor controlled
EN54 approved
VDS and UL certified
5.4 STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS
.The completed system and its components shall be in accordance with the
flowing regulations:
163
Fire detection and Fire Alarm Systems for Building (BS 5839-6:2004)
Local municipal by-lows and regulations
Local fire regulations
Regulations of the local electrical and gas supply authorities.
The design of an automatic fire detection system, the equipment supplied for
the system, and the installation of such equipment shall be in accordance
with the Standard listed below. The equipment and components shall be
deemed to have been tested and approved by a reputable and recognized
international test laboratory to prove compliance with at least one or more of
these Standards. Copies of test certificates shall be provided by bidder with
their tenders:
En 54: Components of automatic fire detection systems
BS 5445: Components of automatic fire detection systems
Fire detection and alarm systems for buildings
ll equipment used shall originate from suppliers which have been certified in
accordance with ISO-9001 of ISO-9002 for quality assurance. Copes of
certificates of approval shall be provided by the bidder with their tenders.
Equipment designed to BS 5446, Fire systems for residential premises, or
similar other standards, are not acceptable.
5.5 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
Quality of Equipment: Only equipment complying with the following shall be

used:
The equipment required under any contract shall be of the latest

manufactured equipment of is kind on the market.
uipment shall exist of completely enclosed units and the units shall be
vermin-proof.
All items of equipment shall be fitted with nameplates containing
information, such as serial numbers, model numbers, type numbers,
manufacturer‟s name, etc. This information, together with the description of
each and every piece of equipment, shall be listed in the
Maintenance Manual.
All components and PC boards shall also be marked with type numbers
and descriptions and this information shall be contained in the Maintenance
manual.
No equipment without detailed specifications and/or testing results will be
allowed.
All components of the system offered and installed, shall be available
for a period of at lest 15 years from the onset of the contract. A certificate of
guarantee to this effect shall be submitted by the supplier of such
components.
164
5.6 FIRE ALARM PANELS GENERAL
Control panels shall conform to BS 5839 part 4 or EN 54-2.

A control panel shall be able to function as a stand-alone unit, together with its
own power supplies, and shall not e dependent on external control equipment,
such as completes, for functioning.
Provision in the form of suitable terminals, connectors, or ports, shall be made on
the control panel for he connection of peripheral equipment, such as computers,
printers and interface equipment, to enable the accumulation of data generated by
detectors and the control panel, to be used for future reference, or for the
relaying thereof to remote monitor or control equipment.
panels shall be constructed for minimum power usage in both
battery and mains power supply modes.
suitable for mounting flush in a console, if so required in the

supplementary specification.
shell be mounted in such a way that 230 Volt terminals and wiring and other
mains voltage equipment are shielded against accidental contact. All shields
shall be marked “230 VOLT”
containing wiring at other voltages.

Reset of the control panel shall only possible at installer level access.
rked with a label strip for
identification, so as to simplify installation and connection of wires on site by
installation personnel. All outgoing and incoming terminals, and all other
equipment in the control panel, shall be suitably labeled to simplify
maintenance and installation, and all panel mounted equipment shall likewise
be labeled. Outgoing and incoming power and field wiring shall be individually,
and correspondingly, numbered at each point of termination.
-outs in the bottom plate thereof to
terminate conduit for all power cabling, and knock-outs in the top plate thereof
to terminate conduit for signal and other electronic cabling/wiring. Holes drilled
on site this purpose will not be acceptable.
shown on all wiring diagrams in the Maintenance Manual.

It shall be possible to silence the audible alarms without influencing the visual
alarms or alarm transmissions to the Fire Brigade. This hall be possible at access
level 1.
5.7 Analogue Addressable Fire alarm panels (Control Panels)
-4 or EN
54-2
ystem consists of a control panel connected to
analogue addressable field devices. The control panel continuously monitors a
165
number of parameters of the field devices, makes decisions and takes actions
based on the information received.
shall not switch into an alarm state. All decisions shall be
taken e the control panel only.
permit future changes, the alarm management shall e configurable

from the control panel via a keypad. This configuration shall be
maintained under power failure conditions in non-volatile memory.
The front panel of the control panel shall comprise a keyboard, alpha
numeric display, text and indicator LED‟s etc. The occurrence and
location of a event shall be displayed on the screen.
graphic display units, computers, printers and intelligent mimic panels shall be
provided where necessary.
Control panels shall incorporate facilities for operating as stand-alone
units, or as part of a network with full communication capability.
lities to execute the following

functions:
o Transmission of a general fire alarm to the fire repeater;
o Monitored switching off of air conditioning equipment in case of a general fire
alarm;
o Monitored closing of dampers over ventilation openings, switching on of
stairwell pressure fans, etc. in case of a general fire alarm;
o Monitored alarm outputs; e.g. sirens;
o Monitored outputs and inputs for gas control panels;
Consecutive alarms shall be stored by the control panel in chronological
order and shall have the ability to determine the priority order of alarms by means of
repetitive receipt of data form detectors.
he type of wire or cable used shall be suitable for the speed of data transmission so
that signals can be carried over without losses or corrupted data. Wiring shall meet the
requirements of the detection system manufacturer, which requirements shall be published
in a formal wiring specification.
5.8 RING ( LOOP) WIRING

(ring), in such manner that, in the
event of an open circuit or a short occurring on the line, the control panel
communicates with the detectors from both sides and the loop.
The arrangement shall be such that during on open or short circuit no
more than 20 detectors hall be deactivated. To enable this, line isolators shall
be provided on the lien on each side of each zone.
CE336/89 for the ability to perform satisfactorily under conditions of electrical
166
surges and transients, and shall comply fully with the requirements of the
following standards as required by EN54:
IEC 801-2 Electrostatic discharges
-3 Radiated Electro magnetic interference
IEC 801-4 Voltage transients – Fast transient bursts
arrangement. Tee-off‟s must e permitted, with full monitoring.

- unit, the system shall
operate satisfactorily with a loop length or up to 3500 meters, of a cable
type and size as specified by the equipment manufacturer.
- power devices, such as loop-powered sounders, in
addition to sensors, call points and interface-units, the system shall operate
satisfactorily with a loop length of up 1000 meters, of a cable type and size as
specified by the equipment manufacturer.
- Voltage electrical test on a complete
loop of cable, with the bases connected, but sensor heads
removed, without damage to any electronics.
5.9 MASTER CONTROL PANEL
one satellite fire control panel, to simplify the central monitoring and contro l of
the other satellite panels. It shall be possible to program any addressable
panel as the master panel.
to be linked. This master control panel shall conform to all the requirements of
the other control panels and shall be of the same manufacture as the other
control panels.
-up system.
and security systems and third party mechanical systems
the master control panel.
panels, shall utilize a protocol which verifies the receipt and accuracy of each
message sent. Receipt of all messages shall be acknowledged by the
receiving panel, and messages shall be retransmitted by the sending panel in
the event of failure to receive such an acknowledgement. An industry standard
method, such as a CRC check sum technique, or similar, shall be used to verify
the accuracy of each message received. Messages received incorrectly shall be
retransmitted by the sending panel. Retransmission shall continue until the
receiving panel acknowledges receipt of a correctly received message. If, after a
number of transmission attempts, the transmitting panel still does not receive an
acknowledgement from the receiving panel, it shall register a fault signal.
167
5.10 REMOTE DISPLAY/ MIMIC PANELS
Remote display/mimic panels or fireman‟s panels shall communicate with the

control panel. No “hard wiring” to these panels will be allowed.
and shall not affect the functioning of the control panels.
Programmability
front of the panel, and through an RS 232 port by using a separate computer.
-ups of the programmed data onto separate
magnetic media by means of an external computer linked to an RS 232 port
on the control panel.
Communications
through RS 232 ports using a fully documented public domain protocol. The
protocol documentation shall also be included in the Maintenance Manual so
that it will be possible for another party to communicate with the control panel
without the approval of the control panel manufacturer.
tions with other equipment, such as be bi-directional, and at

least the functions and displays available on the front of the control panel shall
be possible through the communication port. Programming of the control panel
by means of other equipment is not required (except as described earlier).
Device Addresses
Each sensing device shall be numbered individually and uniquely to correspond

with its address on the control panel.
to another base, the address or such
a detector shall remain at its original location indicated on the control panel.
device shall be manually set to the desired value
Display
panel shall be equipped with an alphanumeric display capable of
displaying at least 80 characters.
A message of at least 40 characters long per devise shall e programmable and
displayable on the display.
The Display of the following reports/information shall be possible; Device status
by the control panel and the equipment
condition and analogue status shall be read and stored in the control panel. The
varying status of each device shall be assessed by software algorithms and the
168
control panel shall indicter the following conditions
5.11 Cable Specification
Fire rated copper conductor 2x1.5 mm2 for fire alarm

Specification
6. MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM (MATV)
6.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This document specifies the furnishing, installing and testing of a complete and
operating Master Antenna TV (MATV) System, and associated equipment. The
system shall include, but not be limited to, single channel antennas, antenna
tower, antenna masts, head-end cabinet, single channel amplifiers, necessary
combiners, traps and filters, distribution amplifiers, cable and connectors, and
necessary passive devices such as splitters, directional couplers, TV outlets and
taps.
B. The Master Antenna (MATV) System shall be delivered free of engineering,
manufacturing, installation and operating defects. The system shall be configured
and installed for ease of operation, maintenance and testing.
C. The MATV system shall receive the specified off air VHF and UHF TV channel
signals, convert the UHF channels to vacant CATV channels and shall process and
distribute them to the designated TV outlets shown on the drawings. In the event
that a selected VHF TV channel's transmitter site is within a radius of 16 km (10
miles) from the Facility, it shall be converted to a vacant CATV channel to minimize
ghosting and other signal interference.
D. The MATV system head-end equipment shall provide adjacent channel operation
of 30 television channels. The head-end equipment shall be installed and
interfaced according to the manufacturer's head-end schematic diagram for
adjacent channel operation. A 32 dB directional coupler test port shall be provided
in the head-end equipment rack. Each TV channel shall be processed as a single
channel. The head-end cabinet shall be located as indicated on the Drawings.
169
6.2 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
1. The signal level of each channel at each TV outlet shall be +10 decibel per
millivolt (dBmV), plus or minus 5 dB across 75 Ohms.
2. When the VAMC is located within the Grade A and B contours of the specified
TV channels, the signal quality at each TV outlet shall not be less than Television
Application Study Organization (T.A.S.O.) Grade EXCELLENT (44 dB S/N ratio).

3. When the VAMC is located outside the Grade A and B contours of the
specified TV channels, the signal quality at each TV outlet shall not be less
than T.A.S.O. Grade FINE (36 dB S/N ratio).
4. The MATV system shall meet the following minimum parameters at each TV
outlet:
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS:
Signal-To-Noise Ratio: 44 dB (Inside Grade A & B)
36 dB (Outside Grade A & B)
Cross Modulation: -46 dB
Hum Modulation: -55 dB
Return Loss: 14 dB
Isolation (outlet-outlet): 24 dB
Aural Carrier Level: 13 dB to 17 dB below visual
Impedance: 75 ohm
5. The total MATV system shall be configured and installed so that the
combination of equipment actually employed does not produce any
undesirable visual or aural effects such as signal distortions, noise pulses,
glitches, hum bars, transients, ghosting, etc.
170
Annex D - MEP and Plumbing Design

(i) Design Phases
The Design Build contractor shall prepare design of the Heating, Ventilation and Air
Conditioning (HVAC) and submit to the design review consultant for approval in the following
manner agreed on from the outset. The Contractor is responsible to prepare a design schedule
that will allow him to commence the construction work at the earliest possible, while undertaking
the design work. But under no way he can start the construction work before the approval of the
preliminary design. After approval by the design review consultant, the Contractor shall prepare
and submit the required documents to the relevant local authorities and utility providers for
construction permits.
MEP design and build phase has to ensure optimum design and installation of mechanical,
electrical and plumbing systems.
The optimum design and installation of MEP systems are essential to the smooth operation of
the Ethiopian Parliament Head Office Building and should have an impact on energy efficiency
and operating costs. Incorporating sustainable design from the onset allows the Client to
establish commitment to protecting public health and the environment.
Mechanical services:
– Heating and ventilation
– Air conditioning
– Gas installation automatic controls
– Water and sewage treatment installation
– Noise and vibration control
– Smoke extract ventilation
– Staircase pressurization
– Sprinkler protection systems
– Renewable technologies
Plumbing services:
– ADA compliant plumbing system design

– Incoming water mains services
– Cold water storage and hot water supplies
– Drinking water supplies
– Plumbing system piping and equipment selection and layout
– Energy conservation measures
– Calculations of energy cost savings/Efficiency gains
– Sanitary appliances
– Soil waste and vent system
171
– Overflow system
– Rainwater system
– Drainage Sustainability services
– Energy modeling
– Energy rating certification
– Environmental certification based on BREEAM & LEED
(ii) Codes and Standards

All design and construction work, including the materials used and methods applied, shall be in
accordance with one or more internationally recognized standards of practice. By definition,
such standards comprise organizations such as the EBCS (Ethiopian Building Code of
Standard), ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials), ISO (International Organization
for Standardization), DIN (German Code), BS (British Standard), SS (Swedish Standard), EN
(European Standard), or equivalent.
Should the Design-Build Contractor request alternatives to the above standards, other relevant
standards may be used subject to Employer‟s approval. Differences between the standards
specified and the proposed alternative standards must be fully described in writing by the
Design-Build (DB) Contractor and submitted to the Employer for review and approval.
The latest editions on the Base Date of the standards and codes, including amendments, shall
be used by the Design-Build Contractor, unless expressly stated otherwise.
An English translation shall be submitted if the standards and codes proposed by the Contractor
are in a language other than English.
The MEP design should comprise of
 Initial client and Client representative Consultant contact to determine project scope
 Preliminary project planning, Evaluations and Analysis
 Report Preparation
 Cost estimating
 Computerized heating and cooling load calculation
 Computer Aided Drafting (CADD)
 MEP equipment selection

The Plumbing System design should comprise of:
 Plumbing system piping and equipment selection and layout
172
 Energy conservation measures
 Calculations of energy cost savings/Efficiency gains

The design Stage comprises:
a. MEP Schematic Design,
b. MEP Preliminary design,
c. MEP Final design.
(iii) Submission Documents
1) Verification of weather data and report specific to the project site

2) System description, system layout, duct positions, riser location
3) Value Engineering report for the MEP System selection considering
3.1) Energy efficiency
3.2) Natural ventilation
3.3) Ease of maintenance and repair
3.4) Durable and flexible materials usage
3.5) Spare part availability and future forecasting
4) Functional advantage report considering the Ethiopian condition
5) Proposed and estimated power demand
6) Guiding HVAC cost estimate,
(iv) Design Report
Design report shall support each of the above if such reports are necessary for the clear
understanding of the various documents.
Design report serves as the design support document and shall cover all aspects listed above
that may not be expressed sufficiently in drawings.
It shall state the justification for using the proposed materials, the site and building and services
layout. It shall also show the occupancy consideration. The report shall clearly indicate
variations from project program and the justification for such action.
(v) MEP (including ventilation and air conditioning, IT, Communication, Sound and
entertainment)

 Floor plan to a scale of 1:50,
 Schemes and riser diagrams,
 Hydraulic and other necessary calculations,
(vi) Electro-mechanical
 Final design of all building services system for each individual building,
 Typical drawings for each servicing system,
 Cross section of typical floors with final services coordination,
173
 Schematic for individual servicing systems,

System calculation,
 1:50 to 1:20 plant room layouts,
 Sectional and typical details for all services scale 1:50 to 1:5,
 Typical riser layouts,
(vii) Technical Standard Specification
For convenience and in order to establish the necessary standards of quality, reference has
been made to specifications issued by national or other widely recognized bodies. Such
specification shall be referred to as “Standard Specifications” and shall be the latest editions of
this tender document together with such additions or amendments as may have been issued
prior to the same date.
Subject to the written approval of the Engineer, any other internationally accepted Standard
Specification which requires an equal quality of work may be used.
If the Contractor proposes to use a Standard Specification other than that specified, three
copies of the proposed Standard Specification in English shall be submitted to the Engineer not
less than 28 days before approval of Standard Specification is required.
Reference in the Specification to any article, device, product, materials, fixture, form or type of
construction by name, make or catalogue number, shall be interpreted as establishing standard
of quality, and not as limiting competition. The Contractor may make substitutions equal to the
items specified, if approved in advance in writing by the Employer.
(vii) Contract Drawings
The contractor shall avail all the necessary drawing at the required scales for a particular work
item and submit for consultant‟s approval before commencing the respective work. All details
shall be worked out in relation to their location and their connection with parts of the work.
(ix) Shop Drawings
The Contractor shall submit for the approval of the Engineer, shop drawings, setting drawings
and schedules, required by specifications or requested by Engineer. No work shall be
fabricated, save at Contractor‟s risk until such approval has been received. Drawings and
schedules shall be delivered to the Engineer unless otherwise directed.
174
Drawings and schedules shall be checked and coordinated with the work of any other trades
involved, before they are submitted for approval of the Engineer and shall bear the Contractor's
stamp of approval as evidence of such checking and coordination. Drawings and schedules
submitted without this stamp of approval will be returned to the Contractor for resubmission.
Drawings and schedules shall be submitted in quadruplicate (unless otherwise specified),
accompanied by a letter of transmission. The letter shall include a list of the numbers and dates
of the individual drawings submitted. Drawings shall be complete, bound in sets and shall bear:
the date, the name of the project, consecutive numbering and the Contractor‟s stamp of
approval.
The Contractor shall submit drawings and schedules sufficiently in advance of construction
requirements to allow ample time for checking.
The approval of drawings and schedule will be general, but approval shall not be construed:
- As permitting any departure from the contract requirements;
- As relieving the contractor of the responsibility for any errors, including details, dimensions,
materials, etc.
- As approving departure from full-size details furnished by the Engineer except as otherwise
provided herein;
(x) As Built Drawings
The Contractor shall on completion of works supply the Employer with a complete set of “As
Built Drawings” in soft and hard copies comprising a semi-original negative film paper.
(xi) Equipment, Fixtures and Accessories Standards
All elements of the MEP Works, materials, and workmanship should be designed and
constructed in accordance with all relevant EUROPEAN/AMERICAN „Standards‟, including the
following (but not limited to) current at the date of the agreement:
Where any product is specified to comply with EUROPEAN/AMERICAN Standard or equivalent
Standard it may be substituted by a product complying with a grade or category within a
national standard of another State or an international standard recognized in the Ethiopia
specifying equivalent requirements and assurances in respect of material, safety, reliability,
fitness for purpose and, where relevant, appearance. Any submitted foreign language
documents must be accompanied by certified translations into English. For all other equivalent
175
products International Certifying Agencies such as SGS, INTERTEK, BV, ETC should give third
party document for approval.
(xii) Basic Workmanship
All MEP workmanship and compliance to be with BS 8000 specified, this is only to the extent
that the recommendations therein define the quality of the finished work.
Where BS 8000 gives recommendations on particular working methods or other matters which
are properly within the province and responsibility of the Contractor, compliance therewith will
be deemed to be a matter of general industry good practice and not a specific requirement of
the PM under the Contract. If there is any conflict or discrepancy between the recommendations
of BS 8000 on the one hand and the project documents on the other, the latter will prevail.
(xiii) MEP Co-ordination
The Design-Build Contractor should do co-coordinating the MEP design and closely coordinate
with the Interior designer for proper function and layout of all the roof level facilities.
HVAC DUCT
All duct work, grills, registers, diffusers, dampers, access panels,, air moving equipment,
maintenance clearances, and any item that may impact coordination with other discipline
HVAC Piping
All overhead piping, vertical piping in shafts, connection to equipment,, scheduled equipment,
maintenance clearances, hangers, supports, and any item that may impact coordination with
other discipline
Plumbing
All overhead piping, vertical piping between floors, connection to equipment and fixtures,
maintenance clearances, hangers, supports, and any item that may impact coordination with
other discipline
Fire Protection Piping
All overhead piping, branch connections, drop and heads, access panels, maintenance
clearances, hangers, supports, and any item that may impact coordination with other discipline
Electrical
All conduits, any rack of two or more conduits, light and fixtures, electrical pull and circuit boxes,
access clearances,, all cable trays, hangers, supports, raceways, and any item that may impact
coordination with other discipline
176
Annex E - Technical Specification

SPECIFICATION OF MAJOR ITEMS
GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF CONTRACTOR’S SCOPE OF WORK
Design and Planning of the Works
The Contractor shall be responsible for the design and planning of the Works in accordance
with the Contract. The Contractor shall further establish and execute a Quality Control Plan to
ensure and verify that his work is in accordance with the requirements of the Contract.
The Contractor shall prepare the design of the Permanent shall consist of the following:
Basic Design, performed immediately after the Tender phase.
Detailed Design, performed before and during the construction of the Project.
The Contractor shall perform all additional field and laboratory investigations needed to fulfill
the design and construction requirements given in the Employer’s Requirements.
All design shall be performed in accordance with the requirements given in the Employer’s
Requirements. The Contractor shall design all Permanent Works and all necessary Temporary
Works.
Standards
All design and construction work, including the materials used and methods applied, shall be in
accordance with one or more internationally recognized standards of practice. By definition,
such standards comprise organizations such as the ASTM (American Society for Testing and
Materials), ISO (International Organization for Standardization), DIN (German Code), BS (British
Standard), SS (Swedish Standard), EN (European Standard), or equivalent.
Should the Contractor request alternatives to the above standards, other relevant standards
may be used subject to Employer’s approval. Differences between the standards specified and
the proposed alternative standards must be fully described in writing by the Contractor and
submitted to the Employer for review and approval.
The latest editions on the Base Date of the standards and codes, including amendments, shall
be used by the Contractor, unless expressly stated otherwise.
An English translation shall be submitted if the standards and codes proposed by the Contractor
are in a language other than English.
177
All specific references to standards and codes throughout these Employer’s Requirements are
governed by this Part.
Design Documents and Construction Drawings

Design documents and construction drawings shall be prepared in the English language.
Design documents and all computations shall be initialed and dated by the designer and
checker, and shall clearly state the Project name, number and title, calculation
description/objective, revision number (where revision 0 is the original submission), key
assumptions, references, and a summary of the calculation conclusions/results.
All construction drawings shall be produced using the latest version of AUTOCAD. Each drawing
shall be initialed by the designer and drafter as well as their respective checkers. The drawings
shall include a revision number (where revision 0 is the original submission), a brief description
of revision(s), and all revisions must be clearly identified on the drawing.
The Contractor shall have staff at the Site to prepare and to revise drawings and documents
during construction as needed to document “as-built” conditions. Contractor shall provide three
(3) copies and one (1) reproducible of final “as-built” plans for the civil works, electrical single-
line drawings, and control logic diagrams, prior to issue of the Taking Over Certificate for the
whole of the Works.
All design documents and construction drawings shall be delivered in digital form to the
Employer. In addition, unless otherwise specified, three (3) printed copies of each drawing and
document shall be submitted to the Employer.
Units of Measure
The system of measurement to be used in the Project shall be in SI units. Angles shall be given
in the 360-degree system.
The coordinate reference system to be used for all Works in the Project shall be defined by a
quadrant grid system. Each drawing shall contain a scale reflecting the appropriate meter
spacing. The grid system shall be defined in accordance with the Ethiopian national grid system.
Seismic Design Requirements

All designs of the Permanent Works shall consider earthquake loadings such that performance
of Works is not adversely impacted under the Maximum Design Earthquake (MDE).
It is the Contractor’s sole responsibility to undertake site-specific, detailed seismicity studies to
determine the appropriate design earthquakes for the Works. Seismic design events shall be
determined based on accepted international practices for probabilistic and deterministic
earthquake analysis. At a minimum, seismic design events for Detailed Design shall include:
Maximum Design Earthquake (MDE) equivalent to the Maximum Credible Earthquake (MCE) for
which the buildings and other related structures shall not cause any Building sag or
serviceability problems such that Operational Basis Earthquake (OBE) for which performance of
the Works is not interrupted.
178
Basic Design
The following matters shall be undertaken by the Contractor in establishing the Basic Design:
Review of results of geological/geotechnical studies, seismic load and wind load.
Additional environmental studies for construction (temporary facilities such as camps, spoil
areas, etc.).
Additional geological and geotechnical studies and investigations.
Additional topographic surveys.
The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Employer for his review and approval a Basic
Design Report that shall include the following as a minimum:
A description of how the design requirements will be achieved including a description of design
computations, design inputs and their sources, proposed design methods, techniques and
software as well as a list of all references to be used for design of all Permanent Works.
A description of how the guaranteed capacity and peak energy requirements will be fulfilled.
A description of all exceptions to or deviation from the Employer’s Requirements.
Principal outline drawings (plans, profiles, sections) of the project layout and all structures with
main measurement data, as well as principal drawings, schematic line diagrams etc. for all
mechanical and electrical deliveries.
Summary of all tests and investigations planned to be carried out in connection with the
Detailed Design.
Basic outline of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
Quality Control Plan.
Any other information specified in Employer’s Requirements.
The Basic Design Report shall include computations and analyses as required to substantiate
the validity of the proposed design. Drawings shall be appended to the Basic Design Report.
Construction Methods
The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Employer for his review and approval a
Construction Method Report and Project Implementation Plan in conjunction with and related to
the Basic Design. The report shall include the following as a minimum:
A description of how the construction requirements will be achieved.
A description of construction methods to be used for all major works.
A procurement plan for major equipment & Machines.
Layout drawings for all temporary works.
Principal items of construction plants to be used.
Description of Site offices and camp facilities.
Description of Quality Control and Quality Assurance.
A plan for disposal of spoil material.
Construction Safety Plan.
The Contractor shall not start any major permanent construction work until the Basic Design
and Construction Method Reports and Project Implementation Plan have been reviewed and
approval by the Employer.
Detailed Design
The Contractor shall make the necessary Detailed Design for construction of the Project. For
each feature of the project, the Contractor shall submit to the Employer for his review and
179
approval, Detailed Design documentation to include as a minimum:

A description of each structure.
Assumptions, design objectives, methods and philosophies adopted.
Design criteria, parameters, loads and load cases used.
Applicable codes, standards and references used.
A short description of each method of analyses, computer programs, etc. used.
Calculations and results of the detailed design analyses for each structure/feature.
Testing requirements and criteria.
Detailed design drawings and specifications ready for construction.
Construction of the Permanent Works

General
The Permanent Works to be planned, designed, engineered, constructed, completed, tested and
handed over to the Employer.
Setting Out of the Works

The Contractor shall make the setting out of the Works, including establishment of all survey
reference points, benchmarks, and control monuments.
Tolerances
The Contractor shall propose tolerances to be used for the Works that shall be subject to the
FDRE HOF & HOPR /The Engineer approval.
Temporary Works
The Contractor shall ensure that all Temporary Works are properly designed and constructed so
that the safety of persons and Works has been properly considered. The Contractor shall be
responsible for all costs associated with the design, construction, and performance of the
Temporary Works.
Protection of Works
All finished Works shall be protected from Building sage, which could arise from other
construction activities.
Work shall not be carried out in weather conditions that may adversely affect the quality of the
Works unless proper protection, acceptable to the Employer, is provided.
Permanent Works under construction and materials for such Works shall be protected from
exposure to weather conditions, which may adversely affect the quality and performance of the
Permanent Works and the materials.
Mobilization and Demobilization

Contractor shall furnish all the labor, materials, equipment and shall perform all work required
for mobilization to and demobilization from the Project Site.
Mobilization shall include, but not be limited to: moving personnel, plant, and equipment to the
Site; arranging for necessary Site utilities; establishing camps, shops, offices and administrative
facilities; and obtaining all required permits, licenses, and other regulatory authorizations
required for the construction of the Project.
Demobilization shall include, but shall not be limited to: removing all plant, equipment, and
180
temporary facilities from the Site; disconnecting temporary utilities; relocating personnel from
the Site; cleaning-up and restoring all areas occupied by the Contractor; closing out permits,
licenses, and other regulatory authorizations; and disposal of all waste materials and excess
construction materials which are not the property of the Employer.
Provision of Camp and Office Facilities
The Contractor shall plan, design, construct, equip, furnish with all utility hook-ups including
power, water and sewer, and telephone, operate and maintain all camps which he requires in
connection with the Works. The camp(s) shall contain all necessary buildings for the
accommodation of the Contractor's employees.
The Contractor shall plan, design, install and maintain throughout the execution of the Works all
temporary facilities, such as foundations for construction plant, workshops, site laboratory (soil,
rock, concrete, etc.), and stores, which he requires for the Work. On completion of the Project,
Contractor shall remove all temporary facilities, including their foundations, which are not
handed over to the Employer, and restore vegetation.
The Contractor shall provide all arrangements for temporary power supply for all sites and
connections for permanent power supply to all permanent facilities identified herein. Electrical
work shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the applicable provisions, General
Electrical Work and, General Requirements for Electrical Equipment. Permanent facilities,
including units, shall be furnished with interior and exterior lighting, receptacles, switches, and
electrical service to the facilities, including transformers and main panels. Permanent facilities
shall also be furnished with telephone and television cable connections.
The Contractor shall provide all arrangements for the supply of potable water as well as
disposal and treatment of used water including permanent arrangements for all permanent
facilities identified herein. Provisions shall be made to accommodate hot and cold water service
to all permanent facilities. All permanent offices units shall be furnished with heating, air
conditioning, and ventilating systems consisting of fans, intake and exhaust louvers, and
thermostat controlled duct heaters and/or unit heaters, air conditioners, controls and all
accessories for a complete system. The heating, air conditioning, and ventilating systems shall
be designed in accordance with the design criteria and the applicable equipment requirements
of Section 10, General Mechanical Work and Equipment.
Fire detection devices shall be installed within each building. All buildings shall have masonry
walls and shall have an overall architectural blend to fit in with the surrounding area.
The Contractor shall provide a furnished and fully equipped medical clinic near the main office.
The size and details of the clinic shall be determined by the Contractor and agreed with the
FDRE HOF & HOPR /The Engineer. The Contractor shall provide a qualified doctor resident
to the site to administer the clinic and who will be provided with drugs and facilities for treating
ailments and giving injections of a non-specialist nature. The clinic shall be operational within
three months following the start of mobilization.
The Contractor shall provide the Employer with the following site office facilities:
The Employer's main site office (permanent) shall have a standard equal to the Contractor’s
main office or at least, as a minimum, to normal European/North American standards for
construction site offices. The main office shall be adjacent to, but not part of, the Contractor’s
main office. The Employer's main site office shall be suitable for up to 6 engineers plus one
secretary and one clerk. The office shall have one conference room with space for a minimum
of 10 persons, 2 toilets and washrooms, and one storeroom. The office shall comprise one
181
private office room with floor area of 10 m2 for the Employer’s Site Manager and cubicles for
engineers with floor area of 6 m2 each.
Each office shall be fully equipped with furniture and shall be provided with all services (potable
water, electrical power, heating, air conditioning, and utilities, lighting, sewerage, telephone).
Office equipment, such as fax, copying machines, computers, etc., will be provided by the
Employer.
The Contractor shall furnish detailed drawings and specifications for all permanent facilities for
the Employer’s review and approval before the start of construction of these facilities.
Permanent facilities include the Employer’s main office, the maintenance facility, and all facilities
for the operations, maintenance and security staffs.
The Contractor shall provide daily maintenance and regular upkeep of the offices.
CONTRACTOR’S DOCUMENTS
General
The Contractor shall submit Contractor’s Documents as specified in these Employer’s
Requirements and other portions of the Contract. Unless otherwise specified below in this Part
6.2, the Contractor shall provide each Contractor’s Document to the Employer within the time
period specified in Table 6.2.1 included at the end of this Section.
Employer's review period and provision to comment shall be to confirm the Contractor's
compliance with the Contract. It is intended that Employer shall have at least one review and
comment opportunity for each Contractor Document.
Monthly Progress Report
Within 28 days after the Commencement Date, and at monthly intervals (by the 5th day of each
month) thereafter, the Contractor shall provide a Monthly Progress Report. Such report shall
include project progress, problems, significant decisions, corrective action required, supplier
status, schedule analysis, and other critical project information. Three (3) original copies of
each report shall be provided. The following is a suggested outline for the Monthly Report:
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
A. Narrative
B. Contract Invoice Summary
C. Executive Summary Schedule
2. ENGINEERING STATUS REPORT
A. Narrative
B. Document List
3. PROCUREMENT STATUS REPORT
A. Narrative
B. Major Equipment Manufacturing Status
C. Procurement Log
4. CONSTRUCTION STATUS REPORT
A. Narrative
B. Quality Summary
C. Sub-Contractor List
D. Photographs
182
E. Progress Curves (Plan vs. actual “S“curves) for each major feature and for summary of
project
5. SCHEDULE
A. 90 Day Look Ahead Schedule
B. Engineering Schedule
C. Equipment Procurement and Manufacturing Schedule
D. Construction Schedule
Monthly Project Meeting
Approximately 5-10 days after receipt of the monthly invoice, a Project Management Meeting
shall be held to review the Monthly Progress Report with the Employer. Contractor shall
present his report orally at the meeting.
Integrated Project Schedule

Within 28 days after the Commencement Date, Contractor shall submit an Integrated Project
Schedule, including engineering, procurement, manufacturing, fabrication, transportation,
construction, and start-up activities. The schedule shall be presented in electronic format as
well as hardcopy. Electronic copies shall be Primavera P3 backup format.
The Contractor shall utilize the Critical Path Method (CPM) of planning and scheduling to
produce the Integrated Project Schedule.
The Contractor shall develop a detailed construction plan covering the entire scope of the work
with the Primavera software package P3 Project Planner, latest version. Each task shall include
relevant information, such as description and duration, work relationships, material or
equipment deliveries, access limitations, and other details that affect the sequence and duration
of the works. Negative lags and constraining dates shall not be allowed. Duration of individual
activities shall not exceed 30 calendar days.
Monthly Progress Reports shall include a schedule update and progress tracking to compare the
actual status of the Project with the scheduled baseline progress. Actual status shall be
measured and reported using Earned Value techniques approved by the Employer.
Earned Value shall be reported in terms of a) Scheduled, or Planned Man-hours, b) Earned
man-hours and c) Actual man-hours. Man-hours are to be defined as direct hands-on craft
man-hours. Indirect, maintenance or supervisory man-hours are not to be included.
The Employer may require the Contractor to modify any portion of his schedule and work plan,
judged impractical, unfeasible, unreasonable, or not in compliance with the Contract.
Specifications
Contractor shall submit to Employer for review all specifications issued by the Contractor to
suppliers for procurement of major permanent equipment materials or subcontract services,
conformed for purchase.
Contractor shall submit detailed technical specifications. The Contractor’s specifications shall be
used to ensure that construction of the Works satisfies the design requirements, achieves
acceptable quality goals, and is consistent with good quality industry standard practices.
Specifications shall include sections relevant to:
183
Site preparation.
Temporary works.
Excavation.
Foundation preparation.
Concrete including cement, reinforcing steel, formwork, joint treatments, placement, and all other
details required for the Works.
Structural steel and miscellaneous steel works.
Masonry construction.
Installation of mechanical equipment.
Installation of electrical equipment.
Any other necessary sections.
Construction specifications shall include:
Materials to be incorporated in the Works.
Standards and codes.
Requirements for material placement and installation.
All technical specifications shall, as a minimum, be prepared in the same standard format and
organization. The organization and format shall be consistent with international practice for
projects of this type and acceptable to the Employer.
Safety Plan
Within 42 days after the Commencement Date, Contractor shall provide a Safety Plan applicable
to this Project.
The Contractor is responsible for the health and safety of all persons on the Site. All necessary
precautions shall be made to prevent accidents and personal injuries. The Contractor shall
present his planning and organization for the health and safety in advance of the actual
construction works.
The Contractor shall make plans for dealing with emergencies at the Site, the Contractor's work
areas, and during transportation. The plan shall include first aid, transporting accident victims to
hospital, first aid education for employees, dealing with fires, etc. Such plans shall provide for
all types of weather and working conditions which will be encountered at the Site and the
184
Contractor's work areas.
In case of an accident connected with the execution of the Works, the Contractor shall
immediately notify the Employer of the accident and shall provide full details of the
circumstances and events regarding the accident.
185
Quality Control Plan
Within 42 days after the Commencement Date, Contractor shall provide a Quality Control Plan
applicable to this Project.
The Contractor’s Quality Control Plan shall comprise procedures for Quality Control and Quality
Assurance. The plans shall include both design requirements and construction materials and
workmanship requirements.
The Quality Control Plan shall define and document the Contractor’s commitment to and policy
for quality. The Contractor shall ensure that the policy and the associated procedures are
understood, implemented and maintained at all levels in his organization, including all
subcontractors. The Contractor's Quality Control Plan shall be based on well-established
principles and proven performance.
The Quality Control Plan shall be supplemented as work proceeds with specific work and
inspection procedures for all major activity. The work and inspection procedures shall include:
Acceptance criteria, witness points and hold points specified in the construction
requirements or in any standard or code adopted by the Contractor.
Witness points for all the stages in the construction process where subsequent
activities will disguise the quality and/or quantity of the previous activity thus making
inspection and testing unfeasible, and/or where the subsequent activities will prevent
correction of non-conformities.
The Contractor shall issue relevant work procedures and inspection plans for the
Employer's review prior to the commencement of each main activity, unless stricter
demands are specified in special cases.
The Contractor's Quality Control Plan shall be submitted to the Employer for review.
The Contractor shall monitor and approve his own work using the Quality Control Plan. The
Employer will monitor the Contractor's ability to follow approved plans and procedures
throughout the entire project. The Contractor shall provide copies of review reports and test
reports to the Employer on a monthly basis. The Employer may audit the Contractor's records
at any time to verify that sufficient reviews, checks, and tests are being performed. The
Employer reserves the right to:
Include further stages as witness or hold points if these are considered to have been omitted by
the Contractor;
Change the designation of any stage from a witness point to a hold point should this be
deemed necessary.
Require all materials to be identifiable and traceable, unless otherwise stated.
186
Environmental Management Plan
Contractor shall be responsible for environmental management for the Works. Within 75 days
after the Commencement Date, Contractor shall provide Environmental Management Plan
detailing measures required during construction to include, but not limited to:
Spoil areas for disposal of waste rock and overburden shall be selected to avoid sedimentation
or pollution of runoff. Spoil areas shall be prepared by removal of topsoil before construction
and placement on the spoil surface. The Contractor shall plant native shrubs and trees to re-
vegetate spoil areas.
Hazardous wastes and spoil not suitable for landfill (i.e. oil, grease, etc.) shall be removed from
the site for disposal at an approved facility.
Waste of oil, fuel, paints, chemical substances, and solutions shall not be discharged to
drainage systems and shall be disposed of appropriately.
In case of an environmental emergency situation (e.g. oil spills or chemical spills), the
Contractor shall immediately notify the Employer.
Advance notification shall also be given if there is any inherent risk that a given event may
develop into an emergency.
Dumping of any kind of material, including excavated earth, construction materials, concrete, or
wood, into rivers or water courses shall not be allowed except if specifically approved by the
Employer.
Performance Test Procedures
Contractor shall provide procedures to perform compliance checks, the system

demonstrations and all performance demonstration tests.
Materials
Current certificates of tests by manufacturers shall be available for inspection by the
Employer. Such certificates shall relate to the materials delivered to the Site and
Contractor’s work areas. Certified true copies of certificates may be submitted if the
original certificates cannot be obtained from the manufacturer. A letter from the supplier
certifying that the certificates are related to the delivered materials shall be submitted
with the certificates.
Parts and/or materials which are to be assembled on the sites and Contractor’s work
areas, shall be marked to identify the component parts.
Materials which are specified by means of trade or proprietary names may be substituted
by the equivalent materials from a different manufacturer provided that the materials are
of the same or better quality and comply with the specified requirements.
All materials and goods shall be stored strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions so as to insure no deterioration occurs prior to incorporation in the Works.
Materials and goods shall be stored to prevent harm to people’s health or the environment.
187
Supplier Information
Contractor shall submit two (2) copies of technical data for major materials and
equipment procured, including shop drawings, erection drawings, and supplier manuals.
Purchase Orders
Un-priced purchase orders, shall be submitted by the Contractor for all purchased
materials and equipment and any subcontracted services. Every 30 days Contractor shall
update and submit two (2) copies of the purchase order log.
Geotechnical Surveys
Contractor shall submit two (2) copies of the results, reports or recommendations of any
additional geotechnical surveys or investigations that the Contractor shall perform at the
Site for the purposes of design and / or construction of the Permanent Works.
Contractor shall submit two (2) copies of the results and reports of seismicity studies used
to establish the seismic design parameters for meeting the seismic design requirements
for the Works as described in Scope of Work.
Notice(s) of Equipment Inspections
Employer will review purchase orders and advise Contractor of any tests or inspection hold
points specified in the purchase orders that Employer desires to witness. Contractor shall
provide Employer reasonable notice to witness these inspections and tests designated to
be witnessed at suppliers' facilities.
Shop Inspection and Test Reports
All shop inspection and test reports for Materials and Equipment shall be submitted to
Employer for review.
Quality Control Reports
The Contractor shall submit two (2) copies of quality control records such as, concrete test
reports, structural steel bolting, weld inspections (visual, magnetic particle, X-ray), stress
relieving, pump alignment, motor beggaring, continuity wiring checks, etc.
Manufacturer Field Service Reports
Manufacturer’s field representatives shall provide field inspection reports upon completion
of each Site visit. Contractor shall submit these reports to Employer.
188
As-Built Drawings
Contractor shall provide three (3) copies and one (1) reproducible of final plans for the
civil works, P&ID's, electrical single-line drawings, and control logic diagrams, prior to
issuance of the Taking-Over Certificate.
Project Procedures
Contractor shall issue a set of Project Procedures within 28 days from the Commencement
Date for Employer's review and approval. Such document shall give the procedures which
shall govern the relationship between Employer and Contractor, document distribution,
lines of communication (including contact information), responsibility of project
participants, etc.
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
Scope
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, and equipment required for the
performance of all work necessary for clearing and grubbing the sites of the Permanent
Works including permanent structures, reservoir area, disposal areas, quarry and borrow
areas and miscellaneous areas of trees, brush and miscellaneous structures as specified
herein or as required for the construction of the Works.
Clearing and grubbing shall also include the permanent disposal of materials removed
during clearing and grubbing operations.
Clearing
Clearing should consist of removing, transporting, and disposing of all logs, trees, brush,
fences, existing structures, surface boulders, and debris. Trees and brush in areas to be
cleared may be removed by heavy machinery that cuts or shears trees and brush below
ground surface or to a height of not more than 15 cm above ground surface measured on
the uphill side.
Areas required for construction of the Permanent Works, quarry areas, borrow areas, and
disposal areas shall be cleared. The limits of clearing shall extend 10 meters measured
horizontally beyond the limits of excavations, fills, and disposal piles.
Grubbing
Grubbing shall consist of removing, transporting, and disposing of stumps and roots,
buried logs, similar organic material, existing structures foundations, and material foreign
to the natural soil mass.
Areas on which fill or concrete is to be placed, quarry and borrow areas, and other areas
required for construction of the Permanent Works shall be grubbed. No separate grubbing
operation shall be required in disposal areas. The limits of grubbing shall extend 10
meters measured horizontally beyond the toes of fill or tops of cuts.
189
Disposal
All debris, brush, roots, and other combustible material removed in clearing and grubbing
shall be disposed of by piling in disposal areas and burning to ashes, or by burying in
disposal areas, or by removal from the Site. Logs from clearing and grubbing operations
may be sold, used, or retained, provided they are removed from the Site prior to
completion of the Work. Disposal areas shall be left with neat appearing graded surfaces
and slopes that assure drainage.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any Building sage done by fire resulting from work
under this item and shall at no time leave a fire unattended until it has been fully
extinguished.
Environmental Considerations
Clearing, grubbing, and permanent disposal of materials removed during clearing and grubbing
operation during the period of construction shall conform to the requirements of all applicable
laws, regulations and permits. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and/or
complying with any and all permits associated with clearing, grubbing, and permanent disposal
of materials.
EXCAVATION
Scope
The Contractor shall plan, design, construct, and maintain all permanent and temporary open
and underground excavations required for construction of the Works. Such work shall include,
but not be limited to the excavation and support of all permanent and temporary open and
underground excavations required in overburden or rock required for construction of the
project.
All excavation work shall be conducted in accordance with this Part and all other pertinent Parts
of the Employer’s Requirements. The Contractor is solely responsible for conducting all
investigations and testing necessary to determine the classifications of excavation, quantities of
each classification, and the proper procedures and equipment for performing all excavation
activities required for construction of the Works.
References
Standards listed below form a part of these Employer’s Requirements to the extent referenced.
The publications listed below are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM C 150 Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM A 616 Specification for Deformed Steel Bars (Rock Bolts and Dowels)
ASTM C 1107 Specifications for Grade Admixtures (Dry Package Hydraulic Cement Grout)
ASTM D 695 Specifications for Neat Cured Resin
ASTM A 185 Specifications for Wire Mesh Fabric (Galvanized)
ASTM A 615 Specifications for Anchors Embedded in Rock
ASTM A-820 Specifications for Steel Fibers (For Shotcrete)
ASTM C 94 Specifications for Admixture (Shotcrete)
ASTM A 36 Specifications for Steel Plates (Rock Bolts/Dowels)
ASTM F 436 Specifications for Washers (Rock Bolts/Washers)
190
ASTM A 563 Specifications for Hexagonal Nuts (Rock Bolts/Dowels)

American Concrete Institute (ACI)
ACI 506 Shotcrete Test Procedure
Post Tensioning Institute (PTI)
Post Tensioning Manual
Specification for Unbonded Single Strand Tendons
Recommendations for Prestressed Rock and Soil Anchors
Quality Control and Assurance
The Contractor’s Quality Control Plan shall include a method statement regarding the quality
assurance intended to be carried out in association with excavation including topographic
survey profiles, drilling, blasting, mucking, support and protection, transportation, disposal of
excavated material and subsequent stabilization of exposed ground. Quality assurance related
to excavation shall also include testing for shotcrete mixes in accordance with ACI 506, and
testing of installed rock bolts and other support for temporary and permanent features of the
project.
Submittals
An excavation plan shall be submitted to the Employer for all excavation activities. The plan
shall include, as a minimum, conceptual plans and diagrams for handling excavation, fill, and
spoil materials, and a description of the proposed excavating and hauling equipment to be
used.
Locations, installation procedures and layouts of rock support patterns shall be submitted to the
Employer for all excavation activities. Layouts shall show spacing type, size, length and any
special accessories; and orientation of rock support to cross rock discontinuities in an optimal
manner.
A disposal and stockpile plan shall be submitted to the Employer for approval prior to the
commencement of construction.
Before commencing blasting operations, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a Blasting Plan
for review by the Employer for conformity with the Employer’s Requirements and applicable
laws and regulations. Blasting plans for all blasts shall be submitted to the Employer a
minimum of 24-hours prior to the blast, which shall include a description of the proposed
standard blasting pattern including details of the hole pattern, explosives loading and blasting
delays. Each plan shall be submitted to an independent blasting consultant hired by the
Contractor for approval and to the Employer for review.
Materials
All materials used to accomplish the work as described herein shall be in accordance with all
applicable standards as listed in Paragraph 7.3-2, References, or elsewhere within the
Employer’s Requirements as well as internationally recognized standards.
Corrosion protection for permanent rock support systems shall be provided in accordance with
PTI specifications and guidelines.
Lines and Grades
Excavation shall be carried out to the lines and grades necessary for the construction of the
Works. Open cut excavations in soil or rock shall be taken to suitable foundation materials.
191
Permanently exposed excavations shall be finished to the required lines and grades, and final
slopes shall be dressed to present a neat and orderly appearance. Excavation slopes and sizes
of underground openings may be modified to fit conditions encountered during construction as
required for construction of the Works in accordance with the Employer’s Requirements.
Care shall be exercised in excavation procedures to avoid slides.
In case of slides, all slide material shall be removed to a stable slope at or outside the lines and
grades, and Buildings aged work shall be repaired in a manner acceptable to the Employer.
The Contractor shall be responsible for repairing the slides, regardless of whether they occurred
in areas where excavation has already been completed or in areas where slopes were steeper
than those shown on his excavation drawings.
Foundation Treatment
Upon completion of excavation in overburden or rock to suitable foundation materials as
defined by the Contractor during Detailed Design, the excavated surface shall be cleaned and
inspected such that any features that may adversely affect the placement of materials on the
foundation or adversely affect the performance of the Works are identified for treatment.
Overburden and rock foundation materials encountered within the limits of the Works that are
soft, fractured, blocky or otherwise not suitable to act as a foundation for fills or other
structures shall be removed to a depth adequate so that design assumptions are met. Where
necessary, rock foundations shall be treated by dental excavation as described in this Part.
Excavation for Contractor's Convenience
Excavation for Contractor's convenience consists of all excavation for temporary Works,
including but not limited to temporary haul and access roads; offices, shops, storage facilities,
and work areas as well as any other excavation performed only for convenience during
construction. Excavation for Contractor's convenience shall be approved prior to the start of
such excavation. Slopes of such excavations shall be stable.
Disposal and Stockpiling
Excavated materials not used for construction of the Works shall be taken to approve disposal
areas. Excavated materials in stockpiles that will be used for construction of the Works shall
not be contaminated or mixed with unusable materials. Materials placed in disposal areas or
stockpiles shall be sloped to drain and shall be maintained and left in such condition that they
present a neat and orderly appearance and blend with the surrounding topography. Areas
surrounding stockpiles and/or disposal areas shall be maintained such that drainage from these
areas remains unimpeded. Materials disposed of within the Site shall be treated to blend in
with the surrounding environment.
FILLS
Scope
The Contractor shall plan, design, construct, and maintain all permanent and temporary fills
required for construction of the Works. Such work shall include, but not be limited to
preparation of foundations for placement of fills, and furnishing, placing, compacting, and
maintaining materials for fills required for construction of the Works.
All fill work shall be conducted in accordance with this Part and all other pertinent parts of the
Employer’s Requirements. The Contractor is solely responsible for conducting all investigations
and testing necessary to determine fill properties, quantities, placement requirements, and
placement techniques to achieve the requirements of the design.
192

assurance intended to be carried out in association with fill placement, including topographic
survey profiles, foundation preparation, material sampling, in-place density testing of all
constructed fills to confirm that the required compaction has been achieved, and related
laboratory testing has been performed. Quality assurance related to fill work shall also include
test fills required to determine the engineering properties of various fill materials in accordance
with Part 6.5, and refine fill placement techniques.
Submittals
The Contractor shall submit to the Employer gradations of all materials, laboratory and field
density testing, and records of inspections and all other tests and test fills required to furnish
and place fills for construction of the Works, as well as records of any corrective actions taken
during fill placement activities.
Materials
The Contractor shall construct test fills as required to determine the engineering characteristics
and suitability of materials obtained from borrow or excavation on Site as fill materials, as well
as to determine the proper placement and compaction conditions and requirements to achieve
the design objectives. Results of all test fill construction and testing shall be recorded and
provided to the Employer.
Foundation Preparation
All surfaces on or against which fill material is to be placed shall be treated after excavation to
final grades in accordance with Part 7.3, Excavation. All foundations upon which fill will be
placed shall be unwatered and free of standing or running water in accordance with Part 7.1,
Diversion and Care of Water. No fill material shall be placed until the foundation has been
treated and prepared for receiving fill.
Foundations in overburden, excavated overburden slopes and fill slopes upon which fill material
will be placed shall be scarified and compacted prior to fill placement.
Placement and Compaction

All fill materials shall be placed in lifts at the proper moisture content and compacted by suitable
compaction equipment to achieve the proper density, including fills placed on slopes that may
require specialized equipment or compaction procedures.
Fills shall be maintained and protected in a satisfactory condition at all times until final
completion and acceptance of the Works. As soon as practicable after the construction of the
fills has commenced, the surfaces shall be sloped or crowned sufficiently to prevent the ponding
of water and this crown or slope shall be maintained during construction.
Any fill material rendered unsuitable after being placed in the fills shall be removed and
replaced to the satisfaction of the Employer.
Temporary construction slopes within the fill should not be steeper than 2.5H: 1V. Materials
placed against temporary slopes should be well keyed into the temporary slope.
In order to achieve a good contact against adjacent structures, and achieve good compaction,
fill materials adjacent to structures and abutments should be ramped for a minimum distance of
5 meters to a height approximately 600 mm, or two layer of fill, higher than the general level of
193
the fill during construction.

Care shall be exercised when operating compaction equipment adjacent to abutment contact
areas to avoid disturbing abutment material. Disturbed material shall be removed, appropriate
foundation treatment be made, and replaced with appropriate fill materials.
During severe weather conditions when fill works must be temporarily halted, the top surface of
fills to receive additional fill materials shall be protected by placing a loose layer of fill or plastic
sheeting over the compacted surface. Prior to resuming fill placement activities, the protective
layer of loose fill or plastic sheeting shall be removed and the original surface scarified and
compacted. Should the original surface be found to be frozen, disturbed, or otherwise
contaminated, such zones shall be removed. Resumption of fill placement activities can occur
only after inspection and acceptance by the Employer of the repaired surfaces.
CONCRETE WORK
Scope
In accordance with the Employer’s Requirements, the Contractor shall:
Design and detail all concrete work;
2. Prepare and submit shop drawings and all other information required by the Employer as
specified herein;
Furnish all Plant, Materials, Contractor’s Equipment, and labor required to manufacture,
transport, place, finish, protect, repair, and cure concrete;
Construct, erect, and dismantle forms;
Detail, furnish, and place steel reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric;
Furnish and place materials for waterstops; expansion, contraction, control, and construction
joints; and beam seats;
Design and furnish all labor, plant, and Contractor’s equipment to manufacture, cure, transport,
and place prestressed or precast concrete components, where approved for use by the
Employer;
Provide telephone and/or 2-way radio communications for concrete control purposes; and
Use lift numbers designated by the Contractor in all correspondence, drawings, and reports.
References
In general, the various standards and recommendations of the ACI (American Concrete
Institute) Manual of Concrete Practice and the American Society For Testing And Materials
(ASTM) shall be adhered to in executing concrete work.
ASTM A185 Specification for Steel Welded Wire, Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A615 Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet - Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM C31 Test Methods for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field
ASTM C33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C39 Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens
ASTM C76 Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe
ASTM C94 Ready-Mixed Concrete
ASTM C136 Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
ASTM C143 Test Method for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete
ASTM C 150 Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM C 172 Method of Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete
ASTM C192 Test Method for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory
194
ASTM C231 Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method
ASTM C260 Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C309 Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete
ASTM C443 Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber
Gaskets
ASTM C478 Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections
ASTM C494 Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C618 Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral
Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete
ASTM C684 Test Method for Making. Accelerated Curing, and Testing of Concrete Compression
Test Specimens
ASTM C989 Specification for Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for Use in Concrete and
Mortars
ASTM C920 Elastomeric Joint Sealants
ASTM D1667 Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride, Polymers and Copolymers
ASTM E8 Test Methods of Tension Testing of Metallic Materials
ACI 117 Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials
ACI 207.1 Mass Concrete
ACI 211.1 Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass
Concrete
ACI 305R Hot Weather Concreting
ACI 306R Cold Weather Concreting
ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary
ACI 347 Guide to Formwork for Concrete
ACI 350 Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures
United States Army Corps of Engineers
CRD-C 572 PVC Water Stop
CRD-C 621 Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-shrink)
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI)
Manual of Standard Practice
195

control and assurance intended to be carried out in association with concrete works, including
reinforcing steel, joint sealers, waterstops, etc. The method statement shall include the
standards and codes that the Contractor proposes to use for his concrete works, the intended
sampling frequencies, quality control testing, and methods for transportation, storage, and
handling of all materials used, as well as testing of the Contractor’s equipment utilized. Material
sampling and testing frequencies shall be in accordance with ACI recommendations.
The Materials used in the project shall be mill or factory tested, where appropriate. Mill or
factory test reports made by the manufacturer or fabricator certifying that the material is in
conformance with the applicable standards shall be delivered with the shipments and shall be
made available for review by the Employer.
Standard release forms shall be utilized for all concrete work to provide check lists for the
Employer to verify that the work is in conformance with the latest revision of the Contractor’s
Quality Control Plan. The release form shall be completed prior to concrete placement and shall
certify that the formwork, reinforcement, embedded items, waterstops, etc. are located
correctly and adequately braced to prevent movement during concrete placement and that
requirements of the design are met in all respects. The release form shall be signed by the
Employer prior to concrete placement.
Submittals
The Contractor shall submit to the The Engineer all sources for concrete constituents including
cement, pozzolan material, aggregate, mix water, and admixtures.
Manufacturer's certification that cement and admixtures conform to specified ASTM standards
shall be obtained and submitted for each delivery.
Certified laboratory test reports showing that the aggregate conforms to the quality
requirements of referenced ASTM standards shall be submitted to the Employer for review of
the aggregate and water sources. Aggregate and water tests shall have been made within 6
months of submittal.
Manufacturer's data for waterstops and joint accessories, including installation and application,
shall be submitted.
A schedule shall be submitted for all concrete placements planned for each work week. The
schedule shall be submitted in advance of the scheduled placements. The schedule shall
identify placements by structure and location within the structure by reference to the
Contractor’s Documents or lift drawings, and shall include the concrete mix to be used, method
of placement, and estimated volume.
Thirty (30) days prior to the first concrete placement the Contractor shall submit to the
Employer for review, a plan describing the equipment and methods to be used for transporting,
placing, consolidating, finishing and curing concrete, for the entire project.
196
Concrete mix designs and supporting data shall be submitted to the Employer, in the format
conforming to ACI 211-5R, for review at least 30 days in advance of the scheduled start of any
concrete work. Mix designs shall include the proportions and types of each ingredient used,
compressive strengths at 7 and 28 days, slump, air content, unit weight, temperature and other
characteristics. Aggregate properties used in the mixture proportions shall be tested, if recent
test results for the aggregates are not available, in accordance with the standards listed herein.
Shop drawings and computations for all formwork required shall be completed and stored in a
manner which is easily accessible should a review be requested. Shop drawings and data shall
include the type, size, quantity and strength of all materials of which the forms are made, the
plan for jointing of facing panels, and the assumed design values and loading conditions.
Manufacturer's literature for forms, form accessories, and form coatings shall also be included.
The shop drawings shall show the locations of all horizontal and vertical expansion, contraction,
and control joints, and shall display the order in which concrete lifts are to be placed. The shop
drawings shall also show bending diagrams, assembly diagrams, splicing and laps, shapes,
dimensions, details, weights and schedules of bar reinforcing and accessories in accordance
with ACI 315.
The Contractor shall submit certified mill test reports for each shipment of reinforcing steel prior
to use of the steel in the Work.
Materials
Concrete shall be composed of cement or cement and supplementary cementitious material,
fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, water, and accepted admixtures, as specified herein.
Materials, including their transporting and storage, shall conform to ACI 318 and the following
requirements or their equivalents:
Aggregates - ASTM C 33
Cement –ASTM C 150
Fly ash and natural pozzolans – ASTM C 618
Blast furnace slag – ASTM C 989
Air-entraining admixtures – ASTM C 260
Water-reducing and set-retarding admixtures – ASTM C 494
Reinforcement – ASTM A 615, Grade 60
Welded Wire Fabric – ASTM A 185
Non-shrink grout – US Army Corps of Engineers CRD-C 621
PVC Waterstop – US Army Corps of Engineers CRD-C 572
197
Aggregate shall be obtained from naturally occurring granular deposits, project excavation (if
suitable materials are available), or quarries. Quarry overburden as well as unsuitable material
from excavation and crushing operations shall be disposed of in approved areas. The
Contractor’s Quality Control Plan shall include a method statement regarding the excavation,
classification, screening, crushing, etc., of aggregate to be used in the concrete works.
Fine aggregate shall be manufactured sand with a uniform and stable moisture content. Coarse
aggregate shall consist of crushed rock or screened natural gravel and shall be of regular shape
and free of flat or elongated particles. Maximum coarse aggregate size and size number
specification shall be based on the provisions of ACI 318 and the Contractor’s design. Fine and
coarse aggregates shall be graded as specified in ASTM C33 and shall be based on a sieve
analysis according to ASTM C136 or equivalent.
For shotcreting, refer to Part 7.3, Excavation.
Reinforcing Steel shall be deformed bars produced from new billet steel and conform to ASTM
A615, including the Supplementary Requirement S1, Grade 60 (415 MPa minimum yield
strength).
All fabricated mesh reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A185 (minimum yield strength 450
MPa).
All chairs and bar supports shall conform to ACI 315. Bar supports for formed surfaces exposed
to view shall be plastic protected wire, stainless steel, or precast concrete. All wire ties shall be
16-gauge or heavier black annealed wire.
Concrete Mix Design
The Contractor shall prepare trial mixes in accordance with ACI 318 using well-established
procedures such as those given in ACI 211.1. The trial mixes shall be used to determine the
best proportions of the constituents of the concrete for maximum density, minimum water
content, minimum permeability, satisfactory workability, and specified strength.
Durability requirements shall be considered in the selection of concrete strength, air content,
cement type, and water-cementitious materials ratio and shall be in accordance with the
applicable provisions of ACI 318 and 350 for the anticipated exposure conditions. At a
minimum, all concrete, which is not specified as fill concrete, shall have a minimum 28-day
compressive strength of 28 MPa (in accordance with ASTM C192 and/or C31) and a maximum
water-cementitous materials ratio of 0.45.
Reinforcing Steel Fabrication
Reinforcing steel shall be cut to length and bent to the shape specified on the Contractor’s
Drawings and bar bending schedules in accordance with the fabricating tolerances specified in
ACI 315. All bars shall be cold bent.
198
Field bending of bars shall not be allowed when the ambient and bar temperatures are less than
No splicing of bars shall be permitted unless noted on the Contractor's shop drawings. All bars
shall be sheared or cut to the correct length from continuous rolled bar stock.
Details of concrete reinforcement and accessories not specified herein or on the Contractor’s
Drawings shall be in accordance with ACI 315.
Concrete Installation
Concrete placement shall conform to the applicable provisions of ACI including, but not limited
to ACI 207, 305, 306 and 318. Concrete construction and material tolerances shall be based on
the procedures given in ACI 117, unless stricter tolerances are specified by the Contractor’s
designer in the Contractor’s Documents. Batching and mixing shall conform to ASTM C 94.
Concrete placed on earth shall be placed upon clean, compacted, Buildings surfaces free from
standing or running water. All other surfaces upon which concrete is to be placed shall be clean
and free from oil, standing or running water, mud, objectionable coating, debris, and loose or
unsound fragments. Immediately before concrete is placed, all surfaces shall be cleaned
thoroughly by the use of high velocity air-water jets, brooming, sandblasting, or other
satisfactory means including combinations of the above. All surfaces shall be wetted for a
period of 24 hours prior to placement and shall be Buildingsp, but not wet, when covered with
fresh concrete.
Forms shall be used whenever necessary to confine the concrete and shape it to the required
lines. Formwork shall conform to ACI 347. The forms shall be constructed true to line and
grade. Forms shall be checked before, during, and after concreting to produce structures
within the tolerances as given ACI Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials,
Designation 117. Forms shall have sufficient strength to withstand the pressure resulting from
placement and vibration and shall be maintained rigidly in correct position. The strength and
rigidity of the forms shall be such that formed surfaces will conform to the specification
requirements relating to surface irregularities and tolerances for concrete construction. Forms
shall be sufficiently tight to prevent loss of mortar or grout from the concrete during placement
and consolidation. “V” grooves and chamfers shall be located on exposed surfaces as indicated
in the Contractor’s Documents.
All steel reinforcement shall be accurately placed in accordance with the approved Contractor's
drawings and adequately secured in proper position by chair supports or spacers and wire ties.
The supports shall insure accuracy of position, both horizontally and vertically, and shall be
sufficiently rigid to prevent displacement of reinforcement during the placing and working of
concrete. Installation tolerances for reinforcement shall be in accordance with ACI 117.
All steel reinforcement, at the time of concrete placement, shall be free from loose flaky rust,
scale, mud, oil, grease, or any other coating that might reduce the bond with the concrete. All
loose and flaky rust shall be removed with burlap or wire brush.
199
Unless otherwise noted on the Contractor’s drawings, the reinforcement steel shall have a
minimum concrete cover in accordance with ACI 318. These values indicate the clear distance
from the edge of main reinforcement to the concrete surface.
Normally, consolidation shall be accomplished by the use of heavy-duty internal vibrators.
Vibrators with flexible operating handles shall be used for heavily reinforced concrete and for
concrete in restricted forms. Care shall be taken to ensure that vibrators do not touch or
disturb the reinforcement, water stops, embedded steel or forms. The vibrators shall be used
systematically and at such intervals that the zones of influence overlap. A vibrator shall be
operated at any point only until the concrete is properly compacted.
Water stops shall be installed in joints as shown on the Contractor’s drawings. The location,
dimensions, and method of installation shall be as shown on the Contractor’s drawings. In
order to eliminate faulty installation that may result in joint leakage, particular care shall be
taken to see that the water stops are correctly positioned during installation. The bottom of
each water stop shall be sealed to other cutoff systems. All water stops shall be installed so as
to form a continuous watertight diaphragm in each joint. Adequate provision shall be made to
support and completely protect the water stops during the progress of the work. The
Contractor shall replace or repair, at his expense, any water stops punctured or otherwise
Buildings aged before issuance of the Taking-Over Certificate. Maximum density and
imperviousness of the concrete shall be ensured by thorough working and consolidation of the
concrete in the vicinity of all water stops. Suitable guards shall be provided to protect exposed
projecting edges and ends of partially embedded water stops from Building sage when concrete
placement has been discontinued.
Joint Design
Construction joints are defined as concrete surfaces on or against which concrete is to be
placed and to which new concrete is to adhere and which have become so rigid that the new
concrete cannot be incorporated integrally with that previously placed without treatment of
concrete surface.
Construction, contraction and expansion joints shall be located where required so as to control
the effects of volume change due to shrinkage and temperature effects and shall be in
accordance with the Contractor’s Documents. Construction joints shall be located so that they
will not affect the continuity of the structure.
Lift heights may be increased if additional measures are taken to control concrete temperatures.
Special precautions and placement techniques shall be employed where formwork or embedded
parts require uniform concrete placement to avoid building differential pressures.
Curing and Finishing

Concrete shall normally be cured by water of other suitable means. The method used for
curing shall be described in the Contractor’s Documents.
200
Concrete surfaces finished against forms shall be smooth, free from projections and
honeycomb, and shall be in proper alignment. Unformed surfaces shall be finished accordingly
based on the exposure and location of the finished surfaces. Unformed finishes include screed,
float, trowel, and broom finishes. The finish for each unformed surface shall be specified in the
Contractor’s Documents. All unformed surfaces exposed to flowing water shall receive a trowel
finish to provide accurate alignment and evenness of the surface for the prevention of the
destructive effects of water action.
Where required, concrete shall be repaired in accordance with the provisions of the USBR
Concrete Manual, Chapter VII, Repair and Maintenance of Concrete.
All concrete structures are to be waterproofed as shown on the Contractor’s Documents and as
specified herein. The Contractor shall furnish and install a complete waterproofing system, at
all specified locations, that prevents the passage of water. The substrate shall be prepared,
and the waterproofing system shall be applied, in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Embedded Items and Items Bearing on Concrete
Before placing concrete, care shall be taken to determine that all embedded items are firmly
and securely fastened in place as shown on the Contractor’s Drawings. All embedded items
shall be thoroughly clean and free of oil and other foreign matter such as loose coating of rust,
paint, scale, mortar, and etcetera.
Grouting of Bearing Plates and Machinery Bases: Grout to be placed under bearing plates,
machinery bases, and where otherwise required shall be as thin as practicable except where
specific thicknesses are shown on the Contractor’s drawings. Grout shall be pre-mixed non-
shrink grout requiring only the addition of water. Forms for the grout shall be installed where
necessary, and care shall be taken that the grout shall fill all spaces under the base leaving no
voids.
Special Concrete Placement Requirements
Building
Unless the concrete and reinforcement surrounding the spiral case is designed to accommodate
the anticipated maximum internal pressures, the spiral case and spiral case extension shall be
pressurized as specified in Section 8 during concrete embedment and for the next 14 days. For
the same period, water maintained at a temperature below 18º C shall be circulated through
the spiral case and extension. The unit shall be checked for concentricity and alignment before
embedment and periodically throughout the placing operations. Thin wall steel pipes or other
approved methods may be used to fill with concrete or grout the space left underneath the stay
ring and spiral case. All placing equipment, such as thin wall pipes, brackets, etc., shall be
supported independently and not welded to the spiral case, or stay ring.
201
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

Scope of Work
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, material and equipment and shall perform all work
necessary for the supply, manufacture, testing, delivery, storage, handling and construction of
all masonry as specified herein.
General
The Contractor shall protect completed masonry from staining and mortar droppings. Mortar
droppings shall be partially dry before being removed and brushed clean.
Temporary bracing of masonry work shall be provided during and after erection until permanent
lateral support is in place.
Standards and Codes
Publications listed below form part of the Employer’s Requirements to the extent referenced.
The publications are referred to in the text by the basic description only.
ACI 530.1 Specifications for Masonry Structures
ASTM A82 Specifications for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete
ASTM A153 Specification for Zinc Coating
ASTM A615 Specification for Deformed Steel Bars for Concrete
ASTM C33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C90 Specification for Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units
ASTM C144 Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar
ASTM C150 Specification for Portland cement
ASTM C207 Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry
ASTM C270 Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry
ASTM C476 Specification for Grout for Masonry
National Concrete Masonry Association (NCA)
NCA-TR75-B Design and Construction of Load Bearing Concrete Masonry
Submittals
The Contractor shall submit shop drawings for review by the Employer. The shop drawings
shall show plans and elevations of concrete masonry construction, and locations of all
penetrations, openings, lintels, bond beams, reinforcing, control joints, and embedded items.
The shop drawings shall also show the locations and sizes of all temporary shoring and bracing
used during construction of the concrete masonry features.
The following material certifications shall accompany the shop drawings:
Masonry units to ASTM C90
Mortar material to ASTM 270
Grout material to ASTM 476
Materials
Concrete Block.
Concrete block: Unless otherwise noted, concrete block masonry shall be reinforced hollow
load-bearing units conforming to ASTM C90, Type 1. Units shall be manufactured from normal
weight aggregates conforming to ASTM C33.
Special shapes: square units shall be provided for exposed corners. Purpose-made shapes for
lintels and bond beams shall also be provided.
202
Mortar.
Mortar for masonry: Mortar shall conform to ASTM C270. Cement for mortar and grout should
be Portland Cement Type II conforming to ASTM C150. Hydrated lime should be Type S
conforming to ASTM C207.
Concrete for lintels and bond beams shall conform to the requirements of Part 7.7, Concrete
Work.
Reinforcement. Horizontal masonry reinforcing shall conform to ASTM A82. Cross roads shall
be galvanized. Vertical masonry reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A615, Grade 60, and
shall be fabricated in accordance with ACI 530.1. Anchors and ties shall be zinc-coated ferrous
metal conforming to ASTM A153, Class B-2.
Installation
Concrete masonry units shall be installed by the Contractor in accordance with ACI 530.1,
“Specification for Masonry Structures”, and as noted herein.
Masonry units shall be laid plumb, true-to-line, with level courses accurately spaced. Bond
pattern shall be kept plumb throughout. Corners and reveals shall be plumb and true. Vertical
joints shall be shoved tight. Each unit shall be adjusted to final position while mortar is still soft
and plastic. Any unit that is disturbed after mortar is stiffened shall be removed and re-laid
with fresh mortar.
All masonry units shall be laid in running bond unless otherwise specified on the Contractor’s
Drawings so that vertical joints between units will be located over the center of the units in the
next course below and in alignment from bottom to top of wall. Hollow load-bearing concrete
masonry units shall be fully bedded in mortar under both face shells and webs under starting
courses on slabs, lintels, and beams, and where cores are to be filled with grout, mortar or
concrete fill. Chases and raked-out joints shall be kept free of mortar or other debris.
Chipped, cracked and otherwise Buildings aged units in exposed masonry shall be replaced with
Buildingsaged units.
203
Small-mesh wire fabric or expanded metal shall be embedded in mortar below cores of hollow
concrete masonry units receiving mortar, grout, or concrete fill. Voids adjacent to openings,
and other spaces requiring fill shall be filled solid with grout, mortar, or concrete fill.
Concrete surfaces at the base of masonry walls shall be smooth and free from projections which
could puncture flashing material. Where required, copper flashing shall be placed on a bed of
mortar and then covered with a further bed of mortar to receive the first masonry course.
Anchorage to abutting walls and ceilings shall be provided where shown on the Contractor’s
Drawings. Hollow masonry units within vertical planes of the anchors shall be filled solid with
grout for the full height of walls or partitions and as further indicated. When concrete masonry
units are to be laid in extremely hot weather, drying wind conditions, or under daily hot sun
exposure appropriate measures must be taken to shelter the work and preserve the necessary
moisture of the mortar. If curing in extremely hot weather is required, it shall be done by
Buildingspening the concrete masonry surfaces with a light fog spray that water does not run
down the surfaces.
Wherever possible, full units of the proper size shall be clean, true and sharp. When cutting is
necessary, units shall be either dry or wet-cut with power masonry saws. Wet-cut units shall be
dried before placing to the same surface-dry appearance as uncut units being laid in the wall.
Openings shall be carefully cut, formed or otherwise neatly made for mechanical installations.
Webs of hollow masonry units shall be cut the minimum required for the installation.
Reinforced-masonry lintels shall be provided above openings including pipe, ducts, ventilators,
mechanical openings, and cable trays that exceed 300 mm in width unless steel sleeves are
used.
Spaces around metal doorframes or mechanical equipment shall be filled solidly with mortar.
Openings around flush-mounted electrical outlet boxes in wet locations shall be pointed flush
with mortar, including a flush joint above the box. Anchors, ties, wall plugs, accessories,
flashing, reinforcing, lintels, control joint material, pipe sleeves and other items requiring
embedment shall be embedded as the masonry work progresses. Anchors, ties and masonry
reinforcing shall be fully embedded in mortar. Hollow masonry units receiving anchor bolts shall
be solidly filled with grout. Control joints shall be kept free of mortar.
For hollow load-bearing concrete masonry units, unfinished work shall be stepped back for
joining with new work. Tooting shall be avoided. Loose mortar shall be removed and the
exposed joints shall be thoroughly cleaned before laying new work.
Surfaces of concrete block masonry not being worked on shall be properly protected at all
times. At the end of each workday period, and when rain is imminent, the tops of all exposed
concrete block masonry shall be covered with a strong non-staining waterproof membrane well
secured in place in a manner that will prevent moisture from accumulating within the unfinished
wall. Adequate provisions shall be made during construction to prevent Building sage by wind.
204
Mortar for all concrete masonry units shall be thoroughly mixed and only in quantities needed
for immediate use. Water shall be used in the quantity necessary to give proper workability,
and in accordance with accepted mix design.
All mortar joints shall be 10 mm thick. Mortar beds shall be spread smooth or only slightly
furrowed and shall be full bed. Joints in exposed-to-view or painted hollow load-bearing
concrete masonry unit walls and partitions, except control joints, joints to be pointed or caulked
or sealed, and openings around flush-mounted electrical outlet boxes in wet locations, shall be
tooled slightly concave with the mortar thoroughly compacted and pressed against the edges of
the units. Tooling shall be done when the mortar is thumbprint hard. The tooled joints shall be
finished to uniformly straight and true lines and surfaces, smooth and free of tool.
Vertical control joints shall be made at locations shown on the Contractor’s drawings and filled
with joint filler and sealant. Control joints shall be raked to a 12 mm depth on room side only
in walls having exposed-to-view or painted interior walls or partitions constructed of square-end
units. Control joints on other exposed-to-view or painted interior walls or partitions shall be
raked to a 6 mm depth. Joints between metal doorframes around mechanical equipment and
abutting concrete masonry units shall be raked to a 9 mm depth along both sides of doorframe
or equipment.
Horizontal joints between the top of load-bearing concrete masonry walls and the underside of
concrete or masonry ceilings shall be filled with mortar unless otherwise indicated on the
Contractor’s drawings. Joint widths in hollow concrete masonry units shall be approximately 10
mm.
Unless noted otherwise on the Contractor’s drawings, lintels in concrete-masonry-unit
construction shall be cast-in-place and reinforced as shown on the Contractor’s drawings or if
not shown with a minimum of two 16 mm diameter reinforcing bars. Lintels should extend
beyond each side of a masonry opening at least 200 mm for openings up to 2400 mm wide,
400 mm for openings between 2400 mm and 4800 mm wide, and as required for openings over
4800 mm wide. Cores under lintel bearings on each side of openings should be filled solid with
grout, mortar, or concrete fill for full height of openings.
External and internal corners and internal perpendicular intersections shall be bonded with steel
reinforcement and interconnected bond beams.
Vertical masonry reinforcement shall be continuous and rigidly secured at top and bottom and
at intervals as necessary to hold in proper position. Splices shall be 30 diameters in length and
shall be held centered in the masonry blocks. Stirrups shall be secured to vertical
reinforcement. Splices in vertical reinforcing bars shall be made only at such points and in such
a manner that the structural strength of the member will not be reduced.
Cores of hollow masonry units containing reinforcement shall be filled solidly with grout. Grout
should be poured in 1200 mm maximum lifts, and rodded or puddled to ensure complete filling
of the hollow masonry core. Mortar daubs or splashing shall be completely removed from hollow
load-bearing concrete masonry unit surfaces that will be exposed or painted before setting or
hardening. All defects in joints of concrete masonry to be exposed or painted shall be raked
out as necessary, filled with mortar, and tooled to match existing joints. Concrete masonry
surfaces shall not be cleaned, other than removing excess surface mortar, until mortar in joints
has hardened. Masonry surfaces shall be left clean, free of mortar daubs, dirt, stain, and
discoloration, including scum from cleaning operations, and with tight mortar joints throughout.
Metal tools and metal brushes shall not be used for cleaning.
205
METAL WORK
Scope
The Contractor shall design, detail, fabricate, furnish, install, and paint or galvanize all
metalwork.
References
Publications listed below form a part of the Employer’s Requirements to the extent referenced.
The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)
AISC Manual of Steel Construction
AISC Specification for Structural Steel Buildings
AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges
AISC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
ANSI B18.22.1 Plain Washers
ANSI/ASME B46.1 Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts
ASTM A6 General Requirements for Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling and Bars for
Structural Use
ASTM A36 Structural Steel
ASTM A53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless
ASTM A108 Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold Finished, Standard Quality
ASTM A120 Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for
Ordinary Uses
ASTM A121 Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Barbed Wire
ASTM A123 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
ASTM A153 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware
ASTM A307 Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 psi Tensile
ASTM A325 High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints
ASTM A392 Zinc-Coated Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric
ASTM A525M General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip
Process
ASTM A563 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
ASTM A569 Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent), Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial
Quality
ASTM A572 High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel
ASTM A588 High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel with 50 ksi Minimum Yield Point to 4
inches thick
ASTM A780 Repair of Buildingsaged Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings
ASTM A792 Sheet Steel Aluminum-Zinc Alloy Coated
ASTM B209 Aluminum Shapes, Sheets
ASTM F436 Hardened Steel Washers
American Welding Society (AWS)
AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code
Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)
206
SSP Manual Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volumes 1 and 2

Aluminum Association (AA)
AA ASM35 Aluminum Sheet Metal Work
AA C22A41 Aluminum Finishes
AA 1100-H14 Aluminum Sheet
AA 6063-T5 Aluminum Extrusions, Anodizing Quality
Chain-Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (CLFMI)
CLFMI MANUAL Chain-Link Fence Manufacturer’s Institute Product Manual
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM)
NAAMM MBG 531 Metal Bar Grating Manual
NAAMM MBG 532 Heavy Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual
NAAMM MBG 533 Welding Specifications for fabrication of Steel, Aluminum, and Stainless Steel
Bar Gratings
NAAMM AMP 521 Pipe Railing Manual
Steel Deck Institute (SDI)
SDI 30 Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, and Roof Decks
SDI DDM02 Diaphragm Design Manual
SDI DDP Deck Buildingsage and Penetrations
SDI MOC1 Manual of Construction with Steel Deck
U.S. National Archives and Records Administration (NARA)
29 CFR 1910.27 Fixed Ladders
Steel Joist Institute (SJI)
SJI Manual Steel Joist Institute Specifications and Load Tables
Design
Structural steelwork shall be in accordance with the AISC MAnual of Steel Construction. In
general, shop connections shall be welded and field connections shall be bolted. Welding shall
be in accordance with AWS D1.1. High-strength bolting shall be in accordance with the AISC
Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.
Drawings
The Contractor’s Documents shall show all shop and erection details. Shop drawings shall
include members, connections, their fabrication details and a material list. Erection drawings
shall include all details and information for assembly and erection purposes such as description
of methods, sequence of erection, type of equipment used in erection and temporary bracing.
All welds shall be indicated by standard welding symbols of AWS.
Submittals
Design drawings of all components shall be submitted to the Employer. The Drawings shall be
accompanied by the Contractor's specifications for fabrication and erection. Manufacturer’s
literature and certified test reports shall be included where applicable.
Storage
Material shall be stored in such manner and location as will prevent Buildingsage,
contamination, and deterioration.
Material
All material and components shall be ordered and produced by manufacturers and suppliers
with proven and documented experience in production of material to codes and standards
required by this document, or equivalent internationally well-recognized codes and standards.
207
The following minimum requirements for material shall apply, unless otherwise approved by the
Employer:
Structural steel shall conform to one of the ASTM specifications approved for use in the
AISC Manual of Steel Construction.
High-strength bolts shall conform to ASTM A325 or A490.
Carbon steel bolts shall conform to ASTM A307, Grade A.
Anchor bolts and threaded rods shall conform to ASTM A36 or A307 (standard) and A588 (high
strength).
Heavy hex nuts shall conform to ASTM A563.
Hardened washers shall conform to ASTM F436.
Welding electrodes shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1 with a minimum tensile strength of
480 MPa.
Plain washers, other than those in contact with high-strength bolt heads and nuts, shall
conform to ANSI B18.22.1, Type B.
Galvanized components shall be hot-dipped galvanized, with minimum weight or zinc coating
according to ASTM A123.
Primer coat shall be rust inhibiting red oxide conforming to SSPC 15, Type 1.
Steel pipe to be embedded or for handrails shall conform to ASTM A53.
Steel grating and grating treads should conform to NAAMM MBG 531 or 532.
Tread nosings should be cast iron abrasive with cross-hatched texture.
Welded stud anchors shall conform to ASTM A108, Grades 1010 through 1020 and be fully
welded to base steel to develop the ultimate strength of the anchors.
Hatch covers in the Building floor shall have a skid-resistant raised pattern.
Hatch cover and frames shall be galvanized.
Cast-iron frames, covers and gratings shall conform to ASTM A 48, Class 35.
Steel decking for roofing should be in accordance with SDI 30.
Steel joists should be in accordance with the Steel Joist Institute Manual.
Grating and Grating Treads
Grating shall be per NAAMM MBG 531 for standard grating and per NAAMM MBG 532 for heavy
duty grating. Depth of the bearing bars shall be based on the loading and span requirements.
Gratings shall have an anti-slip system. Welding should be per NAAMM MBG 533.
Grating stair treads shall be sized for the required design load and span and shall meet the
requirements of NAAMM.
Handrails
Handrails shall be designed, fabricated and installed per NAAMM AMP 521. Handrails should
consist of hollow steel pipe of nominal size not less than 25 mm and thickness not less than 3
mm. Posts, rail and corners maybe joined by either flush-type rail fittings, mitering and
welding, or bending with suitable jigs so as to not crush the pipe. Removable sections should be
provided where appropriate around access openings. Hand railing shall be attached to walls
and floors by suitable connections and face plates.
Fixed Ladders
The ladders and the stays shall be thickly galvanized after complete manufacture. After
erection ladders shall be painted in accordance with Part 7.13, Painting.
Staircases
Staircases shall be suitable for the design loads acting on the plan area of the stair. The grating
208
treads should be as described above. Stair and landings shall be guarded on each side with a
continuous guard/handrail as appropriate. Staircases should have a maximum angle to the
ground of 50º, while above 65º ladders should be boarded between 50º & 65º.
Access Covers
Access covers and frames shall be fabricated from standard steel sections and checker plate.
They shall be weatherproof (prevent the ingress of water) when closed, and shall in all respects
be strong and durable.
The minimum thickness of all materials shall be 3 mm. The covers shall be lockable. The
covers and frames shall be galvanized.
Chain-Link Fence and Gates
Chain-link fence shall be per the Chain-Link Fence Manufacturer’s Institute Product Manual.
Fence posts, gates, and accessories shall be of the design that is standard with the
manufacturer. Post tops, extension arms, gate hinges, stretcher bars, top-fitting rails,
stretcher-bar bands, bolts and nuts, clips, and fabric bands shall be steel, wrought iron, or
malleable iron.
Barbed wire shall be zinc coated after fabrication. Extension arms shall be cast steel galvanized
to accommodate the provided number of strands of barbed wire and sloped to 45 degrees.
Gates should be of the swing type, hinged to swing through 90 degrees from closed to open,
and shall be complete with latches, stops, keepers, hinges, fabric, braces, and padlocks. Gate
frames and fabric shall match the fence. Provisions shall be made for the padlocks to be
attached and operated from either side of the installed gate. Gate posts and gate end
members shall extend above the top of fabric to support three strands of barbed wire.
With the exception of the chain link fabric, all ferrous metal used in the construction of the
fence shall be hot-dipped zinc-coated after fabrication.
Guard Rail
Guard rail shall consist of a galvanized steel beam mounted on galvanized steel posts. Bolts,
washers, and nuts used in connection with the guard rails shall be galvanized.
Fabrication and Erection
Connections
In general, shop connections shall be welded and field connections shall be bolted. All bolted
connections for structural framing shall be made using ASTM A325/A490 high-strength bolts.
Welded connections shall be completed in accordance with AWS D1.1.
Fabrication
Fabrication and assembly shall be performed in the shop to the greatest extent possible. All
work shall be performed to the best modern practice in the manufacture and fabrication of
materials of the type covered by the Employer’s Requirements.
The Contractor shall fabricate all metal work in accordance with the accepted shop drawings
and all requirements of AISC “Manual of Steel Construction.” All work shall be square, true,
straight, and accurate to the required size, with joints closely fitted and properly secured. All
shearing, planning and machine flame-cutting shall be done neatly and accurately. All joints
that depend on bearing contact for transfer of load shall have the bearing surfaces machined to
a common plane. Self-tapping shake-proof screws shall be used on items requiring assembly
by screws or as required. Exposed welds shall be continuous for the length of each joint.
Exposed welds shall be filed or ground smooth and flush.
209
Corrosion Protection, Painting, and Galvanizing

The Contractor shall adequately protect all parts of the Works against corrosion under service
conditions and during transport, storage, and erection. The surface treatment shall in general
be carried out at the manufacturer’s facilities. Prior to shipment, the work shall be cleaned and
primed or galvanized as required using material and procedures outlined herein and in Section
7.13 Painting.
Items in contact with concrete, friction connection surfaces, machined surfaces, surfaces to be
field welded and galvanized items shall not be primed. One shop coat of red oxide primer
should be applied to all no galvanized steelwork items. Minimum film thickness should be 50
mm. After grinding of rough welds and sharp edges, surfaces to be painted should be blast
cleaned to Commercial SSPC SP6. Heavy deposits of grease shall be removed by solvent prior
to blast cleaning. Any rust formed on cleaned surfaces prior to painting shall be removed and
the affected surfaces cleaned again. All Building sagged surfaces and surfaces without shop
coat with primer shall be touched up, except as specified otherwise.
Material, including structural shapes, plates, bolts, expansion anchors, nuts, lock nuts,
handrails, railings, railing posts, gratings and grating frames shall be hot-dip galvanized.
Material shall not be galvanized until all shop operations upon it have been completed, except
that nuts may be threaded after galvanizing.
Aluminum surfaces should be treated as follows:
Clean all surfaces and degrease with white spirit.
Apply etching primer to a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils.
Apply to two finishing coatings with paint of a single pack alkyd finish.
The final total dry film thickness should not be less than 12.0 mils. The coats of paint shall
have different colors.
Erection of Structural Steel
General
Erection of structural steel shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of the AISC
Specification, unless otherwise indicated.
Connections
Anchor bolts and other connections between the structural steel and the concrete structure
shall be provided and shall be properly located and embedded.
Field-Welded Connections
Field-welded structural connections shall be completed in accordance with AWS D1.1.
Correction of Errors
Minor misfits may be corrected by moderate amounts of reaming, chipping, or cutting, and the
drawing of elements into line through the use of drift pins. The Contractor shall clean with
mechanical brushes and touch up shop primer to bolts, rivets, welds and burned or scratched
surfaces at completion of erection.
Quality Assurance
Contractor shall submit 4 copies of mill test reports showing chemical and physical properties
and other details of structural steel to be incorporated into work at least 4 weeks prior to
fabrication of structural steel. Mill test reports shall be certified by qualified metallurgist.
Fabricator of structural steel shall, in addition, provide an affidavit stating that materials and
products used in fabrication conform to applicable material and products standards called for by
design drawings and specifications.
210
Steel Works
Erection Procedure
A complete description of the Contractor's proposed erection procedure, including welding and
test procedures, shall be submitted to the Employer 90 days prior to the start of erection.
Welding Procedures
Welding operator qualification tests and welding and welding repair procedures shall be
submitted to the Employer prior to any welding. Welding procedure qualification record (PQR)
in data-forms shall be submitted as specified in ASME Code, Section IX, QW-483, “Procedure
Qualification Record” and QW-484, “Manufacturer's Record of Welder or Welding Operator
Qualifications Tests.”
Weld Inspection
Reports of all ultrasonic, radiograph, and magnetic particle inspections with Contractor’s
interpretation of results shall be submitted to the Employer.
Test Reports
Certified copies of test reports shall be furnished to the Employer for all materials incorporated
into the work for review within 10 days after the tests are made and shall be in the Employer’s
possession prior to incorporating the material in the work. Where the manufacturer desires to
use stock material not manufactured specifically for the penstock sections being furnished,
satisfactory evidence that such material conforms to the requirements stated herein shall be
furnished to the Employer, in which case tests on these materials may be waived. Certified mill
test reports of plates will be acceptable. They shall include results of chemical analysis,
mechanical and physical tests and ultrasonic examinations, and duration and temperature of all
heat treatments.
Quality Control and Quality Assurance
Source
All steel plates shall be furnished from one mill unless otherwise approved by the Employer.
Tests of Materials
Materials, parts, and assemblies thereof entering into the work shall be tested, unless otherwise
directed, according to the best generally accepted method for this type of work.
Qualifications of Welders and Welding Operators
Qualification shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of the ASME Code, Section IX.
Welding Electrodes
Welding electrodes shall conform to AWS A5.1, and AWS A5.5 or as otherwise required to
match the base metal being used. The electrodes shall be low hydrogen and suitable for the
current characteristics, materials, and welding position. The quality of the weld metal in other
welding process shall be equivalent to that obtained with the electrodes specified above.
Fittings, Flanges, and Fabrications
Contractor shall design and provide fittings, flanges, and fabrications in accordance with ASME,
AWWA or other standard industry practice. Contractor shall design and provide expansion
joints, miter bends, anchor rings, and other accessories for a complete installation.
Transportation, Storage, and Handling
Transportation, storage and handling of the steel sections shall be in accordance with the
approved Contractor's transportation, storage and handling procedures and instructions to
ensure proper care of the steel sections.
211
Corrosion Protection
The Contractor shall provide suitable corrosion protection measures for the steel pipelines
including but not limited to interior and exterior surface finishes as well as cathodic protection
where deemed appropriate. Corrosion protection measures shall be submitted to the Employer
with the Detailed Design Report for review.
Field Quality Control
All circumferential joints and longitudinal joints shall be radiographed throughout their entire
length. Standards of acceptance of welded joints and the procedure for ultrasonic (UT) and
radiographic (RT) examination shall be in accordance with the ASME Code, Section VIII,
Division 2 and, where applicable, Section VIII, Division 1, Paragraph UW 51. Double-Vee-
Groove welds can utilize either RT or UT. Single-Vee-Groove welds with backing bar shall only
use UT examination.
Every precaution shall be taken for the protection of personnel from the harmful effects of
radiation.
All equipment, materials and trained personnel required for non-destructive weld testing shall
be furnished, and a suitable laboratory shall be furnished and equipped at the Site. Trained
personnel required for testing shall be furnished.
All weld examination shall be made in the presence of the Employer or of its authorized
representative.
Contractor shall notify the Employer prior to backfilling buried pipe or concreting around so that
Employer may inspect the work prior to it being covered.
The Contractor shall correct all deficiencies discovered during the examination and testing using
approved procedures for repair. The repaired areas shall then be reexamined to determine if
the repair is acceptable.
212
CARPENTRY
Scope of Work
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, material, equipment and shall perform all work necessary
for supplying and installing rough and finish carpentry as specified herein.
References
Publications listed below form a part of the Employer’s Requirements to the extent referenced.
The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
American Plywood Association (APA)
APA Y510 Plywood Design
ASTM E119 Fire Test of Building Construction and Materials
American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA)
AWPA C2 Pressure Treatment
AWPA C9 Pressure Treatment for Plywood
AWPA M4 Field Treatment
Materials
Unless specified elsewhere in the Contractor’s Documents, Contractor should use local
softwood, sanded four sides, moisture content 19% or less for rough carpentry and 11% for
interior work. Softwood for paint finish should be yard lumber select grade.
Plywood shall be sheathing quality, exterior waterproof.
Particle board shall be high-density grade, sanded faces and graded thickness.
For products treated with preservative by pressure impregnation, Contractor shall submit to the
Employer for review the following information certified by an authorized signing officer of the
treatment plant:
Specific treatment carried out.
Moisture content after drying following treatment.
Acceptable types of paint, stain and clear finished that may be used over treated material.
Timber should be treated using vacuum-pressure process preservative to obtain minimum net
retention of 6.5 kg/m2 of wood. Following water-born preservative treatment, the material
should be dried to maximum moisture content of 19%.
Field treatment shall comply with AWPA. Chemical deposits on treated wood to receive applied
finish shall be removed with fine sandpaper. Two coats of a concentrated preservative
Treatment acceptable to Employer shall be brushed on pressure-treated wood on all field-cut
and drilled surfaces and bolt holes.
Fasteners should comply with the following requirements:
Bolts should be 12.5 mm diameter, unless indicated otherwise, complete with nuts and
washers.
Proprietary fasteners should be toggle bolts, expansion shields and lag bolts, screws and lead or
inorganic fiber plugs, and explosive actuated fastening devices shall be recommended for the
purpose by manufacturer.
Fasteners for exterior work, interior highly humid areas, or pressure preservative treated lumber
should be galvanized.
Fabrication
Millwork should be fabricated to locally acceptable millwork standards.
Cabinet doors should be 19 mm thick, lipped style, custom grade.
213
Contractor should set nails and screws, apply plain wood filler to indentations, and sand smooth
ready to receive finish. Any finish carpentry Building sagged by Contractor, including hammer
and other bruises, shall be replaced.
Cabinet hardware for doors, shelves and drawers should be shop installed. Shelf standards
should be recessed unless noted otherwise. Shelving for cabinet work shall be adjustable
unless otherwise noted. Cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes and
other fixtures shall be provided.
A 10-mm thick, solid matching wood strip should be provided on plywood and particle board
edges 12 mm or thicker, exposed in final assembly. The strips shall be the same width as the
plywood or particle board.
Casework and cabinetwork for on-site painting should be factory-sealed.
Contractor should shop-assemble work for delivery to Site in sizes which are easily handled and
to ensure passage through building openings.
Installation
All work shall be executed by qualified workmen well skilled in the trade, under supervision of a
supervisor with a minimum of 5 years’ experience in supervising similar finish carpentry work.
Finish carpentry shall be strongly, neatly and accurately fitted, framed, plumbed, squared and
finished throughout, in keeping with the best trade practices.
214
ARCHITECTURAL FINISHE STANDARDS

Scope
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, material, equipment and shall perform all work necessary
for installing architectural finishes as specified herein. The basic reference of finishing schedule
is attached in Annex-A-architectural finishes
A significant portion of the Work discussed in this Part requires the use of proprietary materials.
The storage, use, installation and subsequent protection of completed work involving such
materials shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
References
Publications listed below are provided to indicate the desired level of quality that shall be
supplied for architectural finishes. Publications form a part of the Employer’s Requirements to
the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
Aluminum Association (AA)
AA ASM35 Aluminum Sheet Metal Work
AA C22A41 Aluminum Finishes
AA 1100-H14 Aluminum Sheet
AA 6063-T5 Aluminum Extrusions, Anodizing Quality
American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)
AISC Manual of Steel Construction
American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI)
AISI Specification for the Design of Light Gauge Cold Formed Steel Structural Members
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
ANSI A108.1 Installation of Ceramic Tile
ANSI A137.1 Ceramic Tile
ANSI/BHMA A156 Hardware
ANSI DHI-A115 Steel Doors and Frame, Preparation for Hardware
ANSI ISDI-102 Steel Door System, Insulated, Installation
ANSI SDI-100 Steel Door and Frame
ANSI SDI-119 Steel Door Frame
ANSI UL-14C Fire Door Swinging
American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)
ASCE 7 Calculation of Wind Loads
ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary
ASTM A36 Structural Steel
ASTM A123 Zinc (Hot-Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
ASTM A167 Stainless Steel
ASTM A307 Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs 60 000 psi Tensile
ASTM A325 Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints
ASTM A446 Zinc Coated Steel Specification
ASTM A490 Specification for Heat-Treated, Steel Structural Bolts, 150 ksi (1030 MPa) Tensile
Strength
ASTM A526 Sheet Metal, Galvanized
ASTM A792 Sheet Steel Aluminum-Zinc Alloy Coated
215
ASTM B32 Lead Solder

ASTM B117 Test Method for Salt Spray
ASTM C36 Gypsum Wallboard
ASTM C126 Ceramic Glazed Facing Tile
ASTM C206 Hydrated Finishing Lime
ASTM C476 Grout for Masonry
ASTM C578 Rigid Polystyrene Insulation
ASTM C635 Specification for Metal Suspension System for Acoustical Tile
ASTM C636 Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension System
ASTM C920 Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
ASTM C1036 Glass Quality
ASTM C1086 Glass Fiber Insulation
ASTM D638 Tensile Properties
ASTM D695 Compressive Properties
ASTM D790 Flexural Properties
ASTM D4357 Plastic Laminate
ASTM D4690 Urea FormaldehydeResinAdhesive
ASTM E84 Surface Burning Characteristics
ASTM E119 Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
ASTM E331 Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows
ASTM E413 Classification for Determination of Sound Transmission Class
ASTM E814 Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Materials
ASTM F588 Resistance of Window Assemblies to Forced Entry
ASTM F1066 Vinyl Composition Tile
American Welding Society (AWS)
AWS D 1.1 Structural Welding Code, Steel
Federal Specification
RR-W-365 Wire Fabric (Insect Screen)
Federal Test Methods Standards (FTMS)
FTMS 7031 Water Absorption
FTMS 7061 Glass Content
216
International Code Council (ICC)

International Building Code
International Fire Code
International Energy Conservation Code
National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA)
Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
UL 1256 Fire Test of Roof Deck Construction
UL 1715 Test Method for Classification of Interior Finish Material Assemblies
UL Fire Resistance Directory
Warnock Hersey (WH)
Certification Listings
Fire Prevention and Protection
Project facilities shall be planned, designed and constructed with an emphasis on life-safety,
and to safeguard physical property and insure safety of the Building.
General Building design, fire protection systems and identification and protection of hazards
shall be in accordance with industry recognized standards such as NFPA.
Roof and Wall Systems
The manufacturer of the roofing system shall have a minimum of 10 years’ experience in
manufacturing roof panels similar to those required for this project.
Manufacturer shall issue a 10-year warranty to the Employer that the roof will remain in a
watertight condition and the warranty shall cover materials and workmanship.
Warranty issued by the Contractor to the Employer for the same duration shall cover roofing
installation against leaks arising out of or caused by ordinary wear and tear under normal
weather and atmospheric conditions.
Flashing and accessories, as well as gutters and downspouts shall be structural quality
aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet (galvalume), complying with ASTM A792 and with
coating weight, grade and thickness to suit manufacturer's standards.
Windows
Windows shall be of extruded aluminum (ASTM B221) awning type, complete with hardware
and insect screens, and shall include tubular aluminum sections, factory fabricated, factory
finished, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices.
Forced entry resistance shall conform to ASTM F588.
Glazing shall conform to ASTM C1036 and shall be clear, double strength, select “A” quality, and
free from imperfections that may interfere with good straight vision. Wire glass shall be
provided for all glazed hollow metal doors and frames.
217
Doors and Frames

Contractor shall indicate each type of door and frame, material core thickness, reinforcements,
glazing, location of exposed fasteners and arrangement of hardware. Contractor shall include
schedule identifying each unit, with door marks and numbers relating to numbering on the
Contractor’s Drawings and in the Door Schedule.
Fire resisting door shall be a product completely manufactured at specialized factory and shall
have high durability and the required fire endurance rating for location and standards. Fire
resisting door shall bear the label of an approved manufacturer certifying the door's
conformance to fire performance standards and fire rating.
Door hardware shall be industrial grade and conform to ANSI A156. Contractor shall locate
hardware on doors and frames to standards indicated on hardware supplier's drawings.
Hardware shall be in accordance with fire protection, egress and security requirements with
labeled hardware used for doors in fire separation and exit doors.
Floors in rooms used for storage of oil and hazardous material shall be appropriately sealed and
provided with curbs or drained recesses to contain spills.
Ceramic tile shall conform to ANSI A137.1 and installation shall be per ANSI 108.1.
Interior Facilities
All materials, components and accessories shall be of standard manufacturer’s heavy
commercial design and installed per the manufacturer’s recommendations.
The washrooms shall be unisex with full size mirrors the full width of the vanity, paper towel
dispensers, a soap dispenser, towel bars and clothes hooks.
The shower/locker/changing facilities shall have full height lockers set on concrete curbs, coat
racks, walk-in showers with shower curtains, benches, clothing hooks, and soap dispensers.
Water heaters shall be provided to supply hot water to offices and all other facilities.
The kitchen shall include upper and lower cabinets, ranges, microwave ovens, sinks,
refrigerators, waste receptacles, soap dispensers and towel dispensers. Space shall be provided
for dining tables and chairs.
Painting
General
Painting for this Part of the Employer’s Requirements; deals with painting of architectural
finished items.
Paint materials for each coating formula shall be products of a single manufacturer.
All materials shall be delivered to the site in unbroken, sealed and labeled containers of the
paint manufacturer. They shall be stored in a separate building or room well ventilated and
free from excessive heat, sparks, flame or direct sunlight.
Contractor shall supply, erect and afterward remove all scaffolding, ladders, etc., required for all
painting work.
All necessary precautions shall be taken to protect personnel performing the work, and other
personnel in the vicinity of the work, from hazards due to toxic exposure, explosion and fire.
Adequate ventilation shall be maintained, especially in confined spaces.
Contractor shall protect all floors, walls and other adjacent areas and equipment from droppings
by covering with tarpaulins, masking or other means. Dripped or spattered paint shall be
promptly removed.
The following shall not be painted and shall be suitably protected:
Equipment operating nameplates, signages, warning signs and identifications tags.
218
Threaded valve spindles and other operating surfaces.

Instruments.
Control switches and other such operating devices.
Contractor shall exercise extreme care in the vicinity of electrical equipment, mechanical
equipment, control panels and distribution boxes.
Generally, all surfaces to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned, by effective means, of all
foreign substances. Cleaning shall be done with approved solvents, or wire brushing.
Hardware, electrical fixtures and similar accessories shall be removed or suitably masked during
preparation and painting operations.
Surfaces of steel assemblies embedded in concrete and non-embedded steel assemblies to be
finish painted under this item shall be shop primed and Buildingsaged areas of primer shall be
re-primed in the field.
Surfaces of galvanized steel shall be thoroughly degreased and etched.
Surfaces of gypsum plaster shall be tested and sealed if required.
Surfaces of concrete and cement plaster shall be thoroughly brushed to remove all dirt and
loose or powdered materials.
Surfaces of mechanical equipment and piping shall be prepared by solvent cleaning to remove
all oil, grease, dirt, loose rust and mill scale, followed by power tool cleaning.
Paints shall be thoroughly stirred, strained and kept at a uniform consistency during the
application. Mixing of pigments to be added shall be done strictly as recommended by the
manufacturer.
Where thinning is required, only the products of the manufacturer furnishing the paint and
recommended for the particular purpose shall be allowed according to the manufacturer's
written instructions.
Dry Film Thickness
Dry film thickness of paint coats shall be to manufacturer's recommendations.
Interior Finishes
Formula 1: Concrete block and poured concrete walls.
One coat emulsion type masonry block filler.
One coat latex type primer sealer.
Two coats alkyd type interior semi-gloss enamel.
Formula 2: Poured concrete ceiling.
One coat latex type primer sealer.
Two coats alkyd type flat interior finish.
Formula 3: Wood to receive paint finish.
One coat interior enamel undercoat.
Formula 4: Mild acid-resistant coatings on concrete floors and concrete or masonry walls.
One coat cold curing epoxy primer.
One coat epoxy block filler.
Two coats polyamide converted, cold cured epoxy (2 parts) epoxy coating.
Formula 5: Primed ferrous metal surfaces (handrails, stair stringers, and miscellaneous steel
items).
One coat, oil alkyd type spot primer.
One coat interior enamel undercoating.
219

Formula 6: Galvanized and zinc coated metal (doors, door frames, and miscellaneous steel
items).
One coat vinyl wash primer, vinyl pretreatment.
One coat interior enamel undercoating.
Exterior Finishes
Formula 7: Primed ferrous metal surfaces.
One coat oil alkyd type spot primer.
One coat oil alkyd type, iron oxide, red lead primer.
Two coats alkyd type exterior gloss enamel.
Formula 8: Galvanized and zinc coated metals.
One coat vinyl wash primer, vinyl pretreatment.
One coat oil alkyd steel type steel primer.
To coats alkyd type exterior gloss enamel.
Formula 9: Exterior masonry and concrete.
Two coats emulsion type stucco and masonry coating.
Application
Work shall be done strictly in accordance with the paint manufacturer's printed instructions and
recommendations, which shall be considered part of the Employer’s Requirements.
Contractor shall apply paint coatings producing an even film of uniform thickness using brush,
roller or spray gun. If paint has thickened or must be diluted for application by spray gun, the
coating shall be built up to the same film thickness achieved with undiluted material. The
coverage of paint shall remain the same whatever method of application is used. Each coat of
paint shall be in a different tint to the succeeding one. All surfaces shall be sanded lightly
between coats and dusted before the succeeding coat is applied.
Each coat of paint shall be in a proper state of cure before the application of the succeeding
coat. Paint shall be considered dry when an additional coat can be applied without the
development of any detrimental film irregularities such as lifting or loss of adhesion of the
undercoat.
Paint shall be applied either with brushes or by means of rollers or spraying machines to obtain
a uniform, even coating.
By Brush. The primary movement of the brush shall describe a series of small circles to
thoroughly fill all irregularities in the surface, after which the coating shall be smoothed and
thinned by a series of parallel strokes.
220
By Roller. This application shall be done by rolling the second coat at right angles to the first
coat.
By Sprayer. Spray equipment shall be of ample capacity for the work and shall at all times be
kept clean and in good working order. Spray guns shall be suited to the type of paint specified
and shall be operated with orifices, nozzles and air pressure adjusted to consistency. Paint pots
shall be of ample capacity and shall be equipped with means of controlling air pressure on the
pot independently of the pressure of the gun. Airlines shall be equipped with water traps to
positively remove condensed moisture.
Where surfaces are inaccessible for brushes and where spraying is not being employed, the
paint shall be applied with sheepskin daubers specially constructed for the purpose.
Painting shall be continuous over all bolt and rivet head, nuts and other surface protuberances.
Welding shall be complete, and all bolts and rivets securely in place before painting.
To the maximum extent practicable, each coat of paint shall be applied as a continuous film of
uniform thickness, free of pores. Any thin spot or area missed in the application shall be
repainted and permitted to dry before the next coat of paint is applied.
The finished surfaces shall be free from runs, drops, sags and brush marks, exhibiting good
hiding, spreading and leveling.
Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Systems
System Description.
The Building shall be provided with a forced ventilation system to meet the various temperature
and ventilating requirements as described herein. During the summer the system shall bring in
fresh air and exhaust warm air continuously. During the winter the ventilation system shall
recirculate the Building air with supplemental makeup air to account for a small portion of air
which shall be continuously exhausted from contaminated areas.
The following spaces shall be provided with air conditioning: toilets, showers, kitchens, offices
and the Control Rooms.
A ventilation room shall be provided at the downstream side of El. 1617.50. This room shall be
provided with a louvered outside and recirculation air intakes, air filters, motor operated
Building spers and ventilation fans.
Design Criteria. The Contractor shall design the heating, ventilating and air conditioning
systems based on the following design criteria:
Air Volumes. The volume of air circulated through each room shall be determined by the larger
air volume computed from the following two criteria: The amount of air required to maintain
the design temperatures, considering heat gains from equipment, lights, and personnel and
other sources.
The number of air changes per hour.
FF&E
The Contractor shall supply and fix all furniture, fixture and equipment‟s according to the
approved (by the engineer) detailed specifications and layout. The FF & E shall conform to
the architectural style of the building and fulfill design and technical quality standards
conforming to BIFMA and ANSI.
221
Annex F - Geotechnical investigation document
222

Employers Requirement NEPB PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Employers Requirement NEPB PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

VOLUME – II

6.1.1 Project Overview .............................................................................................................................. 5

6.1.2 Project Goals and Objectives ........................................................................................................... 6

6.1.3 The Building Project ......................................................................................................................... 6

6.1.4 Site Location ................................................................................................................................... 9

6.1.5 Sub surface conditions ..................................................................................................................... 9

6.1.6 Items of work ................................................................................................................................... 9

6.1.7 Standards and Design References.................................................................................................. 10

6.2 General Requirement............................................................................................................................ 12

6.2.1 Conceptual Framework .................................................................................................................. 12

6.2.2 Contract Duration ........................................................................................................................ 12

6.2.3 Project Schedule........................................................................................................................... 12

6.2.4 Key Personnel/Staffing ................................................................................................................. 14

6.2.5 Meetings and Progress Reporting ................................................................................................ 16

6.2.6 Engineer’s (The Engineer) Facilities ............................................................................................... 16

6.3 Preliminary Design ................................................................................................................................ 17

6.3.1 Copy Right ...................................................................................................................................... 17

6.3.2. Architectural Design Components ................................................................................................ 17

6.4 Design Services Requirement ............................................................................................................... 19

6.4.1 Data Collection Topographical Survey and Geotechnical Investigation..................................... 19

6.4.2 Design Criteria and Considerations ................................................................................................ 20

6.4.3 Design Program .............................................................................................................................. 24

6.4.4. Major works of the design phase .................................................................................................. 41

6.5 Construction Works Requirement ........................................................................................................ 48

6.5.1 General ........................................................................................................................................... 48

6.5.2 Technical Specification ................................................................................................................... 51

6.5.3 Control of Work and Material ........................................................................................................ 60

6.6 Quality Assurance/Quality Control (QA/QC)......................................................................................... 62

6.6.1 Design Quality Management Plan ................................................................................................. 62

6.6.2 Construction Quality Management Plan (CQMP) .......................................................................... 63

6.7 Environmental ....................................................................................................................................... 64

6.7.1 General ........................................................................................................................................... 64

6.7.2 Mandatory Standards .................................................................................................................... 64

6.7.3 Performance Requirements ........................................................................................................... 64

6.7.4 Design and Construction Criteria (Commitments) ......................................................................... 65

6.6.5 Submittals ...................................................................................................................................... 69

6.9 Product Warranty Provisions ................................................................................................................ 72

6.9.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 72

6.9.2 Project Warranties ......................................................................................................................... 73

6.9.3 General Warranty .......................................................................................................................... 73

6.9.4 Time of General Warranty ............................................................................................................. 73

6.9.5 General Warranty - Performance Responsibility ........................................................................... 74

6.9.6 Extension of General Warranty...................................................................................................... 74

6.9.7 Damages for Breach of Warranty .................................................................................................. 74

6.9.8 General Warranty – No Limitations of Liability.............................................................................. 74

6.9.9 Warranty Bond and Pledge ............................................................................................................ 74

6.9.10 Warranty Performance Requirements......................................................................................... 75

6.9.11 Costs of Correction of Work......................................................................................................... 75

6.9.12 Disputes ....................................................................................................................................... 75

6.9.13 Mandatory Standards .................................................................................................................. 75

6.9.14 Performance ................................................................................................................................ 75

6.9.15 Material Quality ........................................................................................................................... 76

6.10 Submittals by the Contractor .............................................................................................................. 76

Annex A - Architectural Design references and finishing schedule ............................................................ 78

Annex B - Structural design references..................................................................................................... 117

Annex C - Electrical design ........................................................................................................................ 131

Annex D - MEP and Plumbing Design........................................................................................................ 171

Annex E - Technical Specification.............................................................................................................. 177

Annex F - Geotechnical investigation document ...................................................................................... 222

6.1.1 Project Overview

The House of Federation /Amharic የፌዴሬሽን ምክር ቤት Yefedereshn Mekir Bet/ is

The House of Peoples' Representatives (Amharic የሕዝብ ተወካዮች ምክር ቤት Yehizb

6.1.2 Project Goals and Objectives